Capital Diamond

Tower

CN09 – MU7 – CBD

Prepared By
Amazon – Table of Contents – Site Works .2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 02 – SITE WORKS

Section No.
Descriptions

02 51 90 SIDEWALKS, CURBS AND ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING

02 58 00 PAVEMENT MARKING

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |1 TOC
Diamond Tower – New Capital project

SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 02 51 90: SIDEWALKS, CURBS AND

ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING

Prepared By

Year 2022
Rev. 00
Amazon - Sidewalks, Curbs and Asphaltic.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital
Concrete Paving

1. GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

1. Comply with General Conditions of Contract, Conditions of Particular Application,

and the Requirements of Division 1 of these Specifications.

2. Supply and installation of interlocking precast concrete unit pavers sidewalks, precast
concrete curbs to separate unit pavers from the street paving and to border unit
pavers, and asphalt street paving to approval of the Engineer and local Authorities
Having Jurisdiction.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

1. Samples: Contractor shall submit four samples of each type and colour of unit pavers
and of precast concrete curbing for approval. The sample submission procedures are
intended to assist with the design selection and Contractor’s assistance in mandatory.
Resubmit samples as often as is deemed necessary by the Engineer to obtain
approval. Mock-up shall match approved samples.

2. Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings for Engineer’s approval. Show layout of
curbs, pavers, patterns and colours, installation details and interface details with
adjacent constructions.

1.3 SITE PREPARATION

.1.3.1 Hoarding:

.1 Rigid post and plywood hoarding around entire area of construction, with
gate at entrance, not less than 2400 mm high, and with timber overhead cover
over
Pedestrian walkways. Maintain in good order for the duration of the work.
.2 See Drawings for location and extent of hoarding;
.3 Provide view holes.

.2 Demolitions of existing building (5-storey light structure), removal, and

disposal of existing
Site features to approval area.

.3 Protections and relocation:

.1 Protections of existing trees and site features (if any).

.2 Protections of existing light fixtures and utility external services.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |1 SECTION 02 51 90
Amazon - Sidewalks, Curbs and Asphaltic.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital
Concrete Paving

1.3.2 Earthwork

.1 The excavation to accept the building generally is vertical cut, to a depth as indicated on
The drawings. The side of the site against an existing building will be permanently shored
With concrete piles. The earth walls on other sides will be restrained by a temporary
Shoring system. Where space within the property lines permits, the sides of the
Excavation is sloped to minimize the use of shoring. Dewatering will be provided as
required. Refer to Geotechnical Report.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1. Mock-up: Provide sample installation (mock-up) of sidewalk and curbing to size and
location as directed by the Engineer. The mock-up shall be at equivalent to area of
4m x 4m. Mock-up shall show installation techniques, quality of workmanship,
patterns and jointing to adjacent constructions. Modify mock-up as often as necessary
to obtain Engineer’s approval. Work shall match approved mock-up.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIAL

1. Base Course material: crushed limestone or granite, graded uniformity from 40mm to
12mm.

2. Bedding Course: fine granular bedding course material of sharp sand or limestone
screenings. Particle sizes: about 0.5mm to 3mm with 30% of 3mm.

3. Joint Filler (for interlocking pavers) clean, dry, sharp sand.

4. Interlocking Pavers: molded high compressive strength concrete pavers having the
following characteristics:

5. Compressive Strength: 58 MPa

6. Water Absorption: less than 5%

7. Colours: as selected by Engineer; allow for 5 colours.

8. Type: shapes as selected by the Engineer; allow for 3 shapes.

9. Size: min. 56mm thick.

10. Precast concrete curbs: sizes, profiles and finish to Municipality standards, if
applicable.

11. Asphalt concrete paving and related sub-base courses: to match existing and to
approval of Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |2 SECTION 02 51 90
Amazon - Sidewalks, Curbs and Asphaltic.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital
Concrete Paving

2.2 EQUIPMENT FOR INTERLOCKING PAVERS

1. Saw for cutting pavers and precast concrete curb units: carborundum or diamond
blade powered circular saw.

2. Vibrator: Mechanical plate type developing approximately 35 MPa of centrifugal

force.

3 EXECUTIONS

3.1 PREPARATION

1. Excavate to sub grade to accept new curbs, sidewalks and to make good and to
provide new asphalt concrete paving.

2. Remove and dispose of all extraneous soils and debris.

3. Proof-roll sub-base and compact to refusal.

4. Provide slopes for surface drainage away from building and paved area.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF INTERLOCKING PAVER SIDEWALKS

1. Install pavers to patterns as directed by the Engineer.

2. Install 100mm base course (thickness as measured after compaction) and compact to
95% Modified Proctor Density.

3. Place 50mm of bedding course over sub-base and screed uniformity conforming to
grade.

4. Place pavers to special patterns and layout as per approved shop drawings and mock-
up and so spaces of joints do not exceed 3mm. Ensure spaces are uniform to retain
consistency of pattern. Maintain uniform joints in locations of double slope. Cut sides
of pavers if necessary to prevent oversize joints.
5. Use interlocking edge units at perimeter and at curbs. Prepare layout to ensure that
cut pavers are not smaller than one third of paver’s dimension.

6. Where cutting of paving units is required, cut only with specified saw.

7. Fill joints with sand by sweeping. Tamp down and level pavers with a mechanical
vibrator until pavers are uniformity level true to grade and free of any movement.

8. Make additional pass over pavers with mechanical vibrator and again fill joints by
sweeping-in sharp sand.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |3 SECTION 02 51 90
Amazon - Sidewalks, Curbs and Asphaltic.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital
Concrete Paving

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CURBS

1. Install curbs to sizes and profiles to match existing adjacent curbs, to City of Dubai
standards and to approval of authorities having jurisdiction. Top of curbs shall be in
plane, flush with surface of pavers.

2. Make joints between curb units 3mm wide and fill with dry sand/Portland cement
mixture and mist with water to allow mixture to set.

3.4 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING

1. Provide new asphalt paving and make good existing paving to match existing paving
system when new, to approval of Authorities Having Jurisdiction and to approval of
the Engineer.

3.5 CLEANING

1. Wash and sweep sidewalks and paving clean of dust and laitance. Refill any open
joints.

2. Leave adjoining areas cleaned of debris and surplus materials.

End of Section 02 51 90

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |4 SECTION 02 51 90
Diamond Tower – New Capital project

SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 02 58 00: PAVEMENT MARKING

Prepared By

Year 2022
Rev. 00
Amazon - Pavement Marking.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTION 02 58 00
PAVEMENT MARKING

1. GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1. Comply with General Conditions of Contract, Conditions of Particular Application,

and the Requirements of Division 1 of these Specifications.

2. Provision of pavement markings in the parking areas, on ramps and at exterior of

building where indicated, including:

1. Parking stall lines, 100mm wide and parking stall numbers – white colour.

2. Sides and top edges of all curbs on the ramps inside and outside the building,
safety yellow colour or as directed by Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

3. Raise concrete platforms outside of entries to stair and elevator lobbies, on sides
of platforms and on horizontal surface with border lines 100mm wide and lines
within the zone field 300mm wide separated by a 100mm wide exposed strip of
concrete, safety yellow colour.

4. Traffic directional arrows in drive aisles as indicated on Drawings – white

colour.

1.2 Municipal Walks and Curbs

3. .1 Pedestrian walkways of interlocking pre-cast concrete pavers and pre-cast concrete
4. curbs at grade level, on a suitable granular base as per municipal requirements, and
will
5. Match the appearance of the existing sidewalks in the area.
6. .2 Decorative landscaping consists of ornamental plants in both raised and recessed

1.3 SUBMITTALS

1. Submit for review by the Engineer, a complete set of data sheets for paint and
equipment, together with manufacturer’s certificates, indicating that materials and
equipment to be used are in accordance with the Specifications.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

1. Pavement Markings: The markings to pavements shall be applied according to the

standards and regulations of local Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |5 SECTION 02 58 00
Amazon - Pavement Marking.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

3 EXECUTIONS

3.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

1. Paint applicator to be an approved pressure-type mobile spray distributor, capable of

applying paint in single, double, and dashed lines. Applicator to be capable of
applying marking components uniformity, at rates specified, and to dimensions as
indicated, and to have positive shut-off.

3.2 PREPARATION

1. Ensure pavement surface is free from surface water, dust, oil, grease and other
foreign materials, which would reduce the bond between paint and paving materials.

2. Immediately before application of paint, a final cleaning shall be performed using a

water jet and after drying, an oil-free compressed air jet to remove any scaling, loose
materials and other debris.

3.3 APPLICATION

1. Lay out pavement markings according to the drawings and/or as required by the
Engineer, and by the Authorities having Jurisdiction.

2. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer apply paint only when air temperature is
above 10°C and below 40°C, when no rain is forecast, and when weather is not
excessively windy or dusty.

3. Apply pavement marking paint evenly at spreading rate of 5m²/litre.

4. Do not thin paint unless approved by paint manufacturer or the Engineer.

5. Paint lines of uniform colour and density, with sharp edges.

6. Symbols to conform to dimensions indicated and to local traffic marking standards.

7. Thoroughly clean distributor tank before refilling with paint of different colour.

8. Apply paint using oil-less spraying equipment in accordance with paint

manufacturer’s recommendations. Use brush application only at locations which can
not be reached with the painting equipment.

3.4 TOLERANCES

1. Paint, markings to be within plus or minus 12mm of dimensions indicated.

2. Finish thickness of paint markings shall be between 1mm and 1.5mm.
3.5 PROTECTION OF COMPLETED WORK

1. Protect pavement markings from traffic and from any kind of damage until paint is
completely dry.

End of Section 02 58 00

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |6 SECTION 02 58 00
Amazon – Table of Contents – Masonry Works. .2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

TABLE OF CONTENTS

ARCHITECTURAL WORKS

DIVISION 04 - MASONARY

Section No.
Descriptions

04 20 00 UNIT MASONARY
04 22 15 LIGHT WEIGHT CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |1 TOC
Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

MASONARY WORKS

SECTION 04 20 00: UNIT MASONARY

Prepared By

Year 2022
Rev. 00
Amazon – Unit Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTION :04 20 00

UNIT MASONARY

PART1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Concrete Block.
B. Mortar and Grout.
C. Reinforcement and Anchorage.
D. Flashings.
E. Lintels.
F. Accessories.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing: Reinforcing steel for grouted masonry.
B. Section 04 05 11 - Masonry Mortaring and Grouting.
C. Section 07 21 23 - Loose Fill Insulation: Granular insulation for masonry unit cores.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A ACI 530/530.1/ERTA- Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry

Structures and Related Commentaries; American Concrete Institute International;
2011.
B. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008.
C. ASTM A82/A82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete
Reinforcement; 2007.
D. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on
Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009.
E. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-
Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2012.
F. ASTM A641/A641M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon
Steel Wire; 2009a.
G. ASTM 8370 - Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building
Construction;
2011e1.
H. ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2011b.
1. ASTM C91/C91M - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement; 2012.
J. ASTM C129 - Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units;
2011.
K. ASTM C140 - Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry
Units and Related Units; 2012.
L. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 2011.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 1|P a g e Section: 04 20 00
Amazon – Unit Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

M. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2012.

N. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2012.
0. ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2011.
P. ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2010.
Q. ASTM C652 - Standard Specification for Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units
Made from Clay or Shale); 2011.
R. ASTM C780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation
of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry; 2011.
S. ASTM C1357 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Masonry Bond Strength; 2009.

T. ASTM E514/E514M - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage
Through Masonry; 2011.
U. UL (FRO) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

G. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

8. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement,
mortar, and masonry accessories.
C. Samples: Submit four samples of masonry units to illustrate color, texture, and
extremes of color range.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified
requirements.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that water repellent admixture manufacturer has
certified masonry unit manufacturer as an approved user of water repellent admixture
in the manufacture of concrete block.
F. Test Reports: Concrete masonry manufacturer's test reports for units with integral
water repellent admixture.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

H. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA, except were exceeded by requirements

of the contract documents.
1. Maintain one copy of each document on project site.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

I. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage
and contamination by other materials.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 2|P a g e Section: 04 20 00
Amazon – Unit Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows:
1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 400 x 200 mm and nominal
depths as indicated on the drawings for specific locations.
2. Special Shapes: Provide non-standard blocks configured for corners.
3. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C90, normal weight.
a. Hollow block, as indicated.
4. Non-Loadbearing Units: ASTM C129.
a. Hollow block, as indicated.
b. Lightweight.

2.2 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Mortar and grout: As specified in Section 04 05 11.
B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, Type N.
C. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I; color as required to produce approved color sample.
D. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144.
E. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404.
F. Water: Clean and potable.
G. Accelerating Admixture: Nonachloride type for use in cold weather.

2.3 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE

A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 40 (280) deformed billet bars; galvanized.
B. Joint Reinforcement: Use ladder type joint reinforcement where vertical
reinforcement is involved and truss type elsewhere, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss or ladder type; ASTM A 82/A 82M
steel wire, mill galvanized to ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3; 3.8 mm side rods
with 3.8 mm cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 25 mm and
not less than 13 mm of mortar coverage on each exposure.
D. Strap Anchors: Bent steel shapes configured as required for specific situations, 32
mm width,
2.7 mm thick, lengths as required to provide not more than 25 mm and not less than
13 mm of mortar coverage from masonry face, corrugated for embedment in
masonry joint, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
E. Flexible Anchors: 2-piece anchors that permit differential movement between
masonry and building frame, sized to provide not more than 25 mm and not
less than 13 mm of mortar coverage from masonry face.
1. Concrete frame: Dovetail anchors of bent steel strap, nominal 25 mm width x
0.61 mm
thick, with corrugated strap ties of nominal 25 mm width and 1.91 mm thick,
hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
2. Steel frame: Crimped wire anchors for welding to frame, 6.3 mm thick,
with trapezoidal wire ties 4.75 mm thick, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A
153/A 153M, Class B.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 3|P a g e Section: 04 20 00
Amazon – Unit Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

2.4 FLASHINGS
A. Plastic Flashings: Sheet polyvinyl chloride; 1mm thick.

2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Preformed Control Joints: Polyvinyl chloride material. Provide with corner and
tee accessories, fused joints.
B. Joint Filler: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride; oversized 50 percent to joint width;
self-expanding;
200 mm wide x by maximum lengths available.
C. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.

2.6 LINTELS
A. Precast Concrete Lintels: Window lintel type, 200 x 200 mm size, 20.7 MPa
strength at 28 days.

2.7 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, using the Proportion Specification.
1. Masonry below grade and in contact with earth: Type S.
2. Exterior, loadbearing masonry: Type N.
3. Exterior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type N.
4. Interior, loadbearing masonry: Type N.
5. Interior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type 0.

B. Grout: ASTM C476. Consistency required to fill completely volumes indicated

for grouting; fine grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 50 mm
or less; coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than
50 mm.
C. Admixtures: Add to mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate and in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly.
D. Mixing: Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced standards.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry.
B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and
located.
C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry
work.

3.2 PREPARATION

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 4|P a g e Section: 04 20 00
Amazon – Unit Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

D. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other
sections.
E. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place
until building structure provides permanent bracing.

3.3 COLD AND HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS

F. Comply with requirements of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA or applicable building code,
whichever is more stringent.

3.4 COURSING
G. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.
H. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints
of uniform thickness.
I. Concrete Masonry Units:
1. Bond: Running.
2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 200 mm.
3. Mortar Joints: Concave.
J. Brick Units:
1. Bond: Running.
2. Coursing: Three units and three mortar joints to equal 200 mm.
3. Mortar Joints: Concave.

3.5 PLACING AND BONDING

K. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly
jointed with other work.
L. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.
M. Remove excess mortar with water repellent admixture promptly. Do not use acids,
sandblasting or high-pressure cleaning methods.
N. Interlock intersections and external corners, except for units laid in stack bond.
O. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where
adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace.
P. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean,
unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.
Q. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a
control joint as indicated.

3.6 CAVITY MORTAR CONTROL

R. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weep/cavity
vents.
S. For cavity walls, build inner wythe ahead of outer wythe to accommodate accessories.
T. Install cavity mortar control panels continuously throughout full height of
exterior masonry cavities during construction of exterior wythe, complying with
manufacturer's installation instructions. Verify that airspace width is no more than
9 mm greater than panel thickness. Install horizontally between joint

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 5|P a g e Section: 04 20 00
Amazon – Unit Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

reinforcement. Stagger end joints in adjacent rows. Fit to perimeter construction

and penetrations without voids.

3.7 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - GENERAL

U. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or specified under specific wall type, install
horizontal joint reinforcement 400 mm on center.
V. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls.
W. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 150 mm.
X. Fasten anchors to structural framing and embed in masonry joints as masonry is
laid. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or closer spacing is indicated under
specific wall type, space anchors at maximum of 900 mm horizontally and 600 mm
vertically.

3.8 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - SINGLE WYTHE MASONRY

Y. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above
and below openings. Extend minimum 400 mm each side of opening.
8. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls.
C. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 150 mm.
D. Reinforce stack bonded unit joint corners and intersections with strap anchors
400 mm on center.

3.9 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - MASONRY VENEER

A. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above
and below openings. Extend minimum 400 mm each side of opening.
B. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls.
C. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 150 mm.

3.10 MASONRY FLASHINGS

A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water
to exterior at all locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted.
B. Extend plastic, laminated, EPDM, and flashings to within 6 mm of exterior
face of masonry

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 6|P a g e Section: 04 20 00
Amazon – Unit Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

3.11 LINTELS
A. Install precast concrete lintels over openings.
B. Maintain minimum mm bearing on each side of opening.

3.12 GROUTED COMPONEN

Lap splices minimum 24 bar diameters.
C. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position
within 13 mm of dimensioned position.
D. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.
E. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 300 mm either side
of opening.
3.13 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints.
B. Form control joint with a sheet building paper bond breaker fitted to one side of
the hollow contour end of the block unit. Fill the resultant core with grout fill.
Rake joint at exposed unit faces for placement of backer rod and sealant.
C. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and
corner joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07 90 05 for sealant performance.
E. Form expansion joint as detailed.

3.14 BUILT-IN WORK

A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door frames and other items to be built
into the work and furnished under other sections.
B. Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line.
C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame
voids solid with grout.
1. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 300 mm from framed openings.
D. Do not build into masonry construction organic materials that are subject to
deterioration.

3.15 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Alignment of Columns: 6 mm.
B. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1.6 mm.
C. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 6 mm/3 m and 13 mm/6 m or more.
D. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 6 mm per story non-cumulative; 13 mm in two
stories or more.
E. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 3 mm/m and 6 mm/3 m; 13 mm/9 m.
F. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 3 mm/m.
G. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 6 mm.

3.16 CUTTING AND FITTING

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 04 20 00
Amazon – Unit Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

A. Cut and fit for chases. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct
size, shape, and location.
B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where
appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired.

3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in
Section 01 40 00.
B. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: Test each variety of concrete unit masonry in
accordance with ASTM C140 for conformance to requirements of this
specification.
C. Mortar Tests: Test each type of mortar in accordance with ASTM C780, testing
with same frequency as masonry samples.
D.
3.18 CLEANING
A. Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings.
B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
3.19 PROTECTION
A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external
corners that are subject to damage by construction activities.

END OF SECTION 04 20 00

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 04 20 00
 Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

MASONARY WORKS

SECTION 04 22 15: LIGHT WEIGHT CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

Prepared By

Year 2022
Rev. 00

SECTION 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

LIGHT WEIGHT CONCRETE MASONRY

UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: The work under this section includes all labor, materials,
equipment and services to complete Light Weight Concrete Masonry works as
shown on the Drawings and specified herein.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing dovetail slots for

masonry anchors.
2. Section 042000 " Unit Masonry".
3. Section 044200 "Exterior Stone Cladding" for stone trim.
4. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for installing anchor sections of
adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural steel frame.
5. Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation" for cavity wall insulation.
6. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for sheet metal flashing and
for furnishing manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints.

1.3 REFERENCE

A. The minimum standards for products specified in this section shall be including as
under but not limited to the following. Except as otherwise specified herein, perform
work in accordance with specifications, codes and standards cited therein, and their
latest editions, revisions, applicable addenda and supplements. Where there is
conflict between the referenced standards the most stringent of the
conditions/requirements shall be applicable.

B. American Concrete Institute:

1. ACI 530-95 - Building Code Requirements commentary

for Masonry Structures.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 2|P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

2. ACI 530.1-95 - Specifications for Masonry Structures.

3. Masonry Designer’s Guide, latest edition.

C. American Society for Testing and Materials:

1. ASTM C1386-98 - Standard specification for precast

Autoclaved Aerated Concrete Units.

2. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of

Building Methods for fire tests of Building
Construction and materials.

3. ASTM C331 - Standard Specification for Light Weight

Aggregates for Concrete Masonry units.

4. ASTM C153 - Zinc coating (Hot dip) on iron and steel

hardware.

5. ASTM C1555 - Standard practice for Autoclaved Aerated

Concrete Masonry.

D. All applicable local codes, regulations, etc of Authorities having Jurisdiction.

Note: Contractor shall note that he shall keep copies of all of the referenced
standards on the site and shall provide the Engineer copy of the requested
referenced standard as and when requested.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Light Weight Concrete Masonry units is also known as Insulated block Masonry
units or Autoclaved Aerated Concrete Block Units.

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site one (1) week prior to
the installation.

1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s specifications and other data for Light Weight
Concrete block units and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For the following:

1. Light Weight Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of
special shapes.
2. Shop Drawings signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in
Kuwait, whose specialization is structural design.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 3|P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

3. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit masonry
reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315. Show elevations of reinforced walls.
4. Certification: Provide certification signed by an authorized officer of the
manufacturer that the products comply with the specified strength
requirements.

C. Samples for Initial Selection:

1. Light Weight Masonry Units.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:

1. Light Weight Masonry Units.

2. Accessories embedded in masonry.

1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names

together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot
numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to
identify materials used. Include mix proportions for adhesive and grout and source
of aggregates.

1. Submittal is for information only. Receipt of list does not constitute approval
of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are
specifically brought to the attention of Engineer and approved in writing.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:

1. Light Weight Masonry Units:

a. Provide certification signed by an authorized officer for material

properties, material test reports substantiating compliance with
requirements.
2. admixtures.
3. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing

indicated.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to

demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and
execution.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 4|P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings and as directed by

the Engineer.
2. Build mockups for typical exterior and interior walls in sizes 10m² length not
smaller than 2400 mm unless otherwise as direted by the Engineer by full
height by full thickness, including face and backup wythes and accessories.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part

of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.9 ACOUSTIC AND FIRE RESISTANCE REQUIRMENTS

A. Acoustic, General: Comply with Acoustic Report.

B. Fire requirements: All requirements for resistance of fire shall be in accordance with
the provisions of the NFPA and the Fire Strategy Report.

C. Submit certificates and other documents as evidence for compliance with acoustic
and fire resistance requirements as specified in the Acoustic and Fire Strategy
Report.

1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store Light Weight Concrete Masonry units on elevated platforms or on pallets in a

dry location.

B. Keep blocks dry. Protect blocks during inclement weather and non-work hours.

C. Protect Light Weight Concrete blocks from oil and chemical staining.

D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and

accumulation of dirt and oil.

1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental requirements: As per the instructions of the manufacturer.

B. Spread adhesive no more than 1200mm ahead of blocks and set blocks within one
minute of spreading adhesive.

C. Blocks must be dry with a moisture reading no greater than 15% when placed/set
and when plaster or any other finish is applied.

D. Maintain temperature recommended by manufacturer during mixing.

E. Protect in-place blocks from rain by covering with weather resistant membrane for
24 hours.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 5|P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

F. Protect blocks from direct exposure to wind and sun as per the recommendation of
the manufacturer.

1.12 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING

A. Loading block after completion shall only be done after the blocks have properly set
as follows:

1. Uniform floor or roof loads: 12 hours minimum.

2. Concentrated loads: 72 hours minimum.

B. Schedule, sequence and coordinate with work in other Sections for chases or routing
areas required in Light Weight Concrete block walls for electrical, plumbing and
other items.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Light Weight Masonry Units: Obtain Light Weight masonry
units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted
for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each
product required.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, the following
manufacturers (though not limited to) are acceptable:

1. National Industries
Tel. No. 1844555
Website: [Link]

2. Aerated Concrete Industries (ACICO)

Kuwait – Tel.: 2242 2100

3. Saudi Aerated Concrete Industries [Link] – KSA

Tel: 966 3 8472 543
Fax: 966 38472 574

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Medium Density Thermally Insulated Concrete blocks

1. Net Area Compressive Strength: Minimum 5.0 N/mm2,

2. Dry Density: Not more than 600 kg/m3
3. Thermal Transmittance (U-value): Not more than 0.483 W/m2k as per MEW
requirements of “Medium construction, medium light external colors” for
complete wall assembly including structural components not

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 6|P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

limited to slabs, beams and columns. This value shall be revised in accordance
with latest MEW regulations.
4. Size: As indicated on drawings.
5. Special Shapes: Provide where required for lintels, corners, jambs, control
joints, headers, bonding, scored accented walls and other special conditions.
6. Lintel Blocks:

a. Solid reinforced blocks: Same width as walls.

b. “U-shaped” lintel blocks: Same width as walls.

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with requirements for fire-resistance-rated

assembly designs indicated.

1. Wall assemblies shall meet ASTM-E 119

2. Where fire-resistance-rated construction is indicated, units shall be listed and

labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.

C. Defective Units: Do not use.

2.3 CONCRETE LINTELS

A. Concrete Lintels: ASTM C 1623, matching CMUs in color, texture, and density
classification; and with reinforcing bars indicated.

B. Precast Concrete Lintels: Sized to suit block wall thickness and coursing. Minimum
bearing at each side of structure openings shall be 200mm. Concrete strength shall be
not less than 30 N/mm2 at 28 days.

C. Concrete Lintels: Precast or formed-in-place concrete lintels complying with

requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete," and with reinforcing bars
indicated.

2.4 ADHESIVE AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Adhesive: shall be as recommended by the block manufacturer.

B. Grout

1. Composition and compressive strength shall be in accordance with ASTM C476

and ASTM C 1019
2. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
3. Compressive strength shall be 2000 PSI (14MPa).

C. Water: Potable.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 7|P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

2.5 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A

996/A 996M, Grade 420.

B. Light Weight Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.

1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel.

2. Wire Size for Side Rods: 4.8-mm) diameter.
3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 4.8-mm diameter.
4. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 400 mm o.c.
5. Provide in lengths of not less than 3 m, with prefabricated corner and tee units.

C. Light Weight Masonry-Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Ladder or

truss type with single pair of side rods.

D. Seismic clips: Provide galvanized steel seismic clips for juncture of underside of
slab and top of partition walls to accommodate seismic considerations. Type as
approved by the Engineer.

2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, the following
manufacturers (though not limited to) are acceptable:

1. Catnic
Local Agent: KMMC
Tel.: 2243 4752

2. Expamet
Tel.: 965-2291 2800/2801
Website: [Link]

3. Unitech Kuwait
Tel: 2245 9984
Website: [Link]

4. Hohmann & Barnad

Local Agent: Al Ghanim Specialities
Tel.: 1820044

B. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from
materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, with

ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.
2. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel,
Z180 zinc coating.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 8|P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

3. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M,

Commercial Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.
4. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Corrugated-Metal Ties: Metal strips not less than 22 mm wide with corrugations
having a wavelength of 7.5 to 12.5 mm and an amplitude of 1.5 to 2.5 mm made
from 1.52-mm thick steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication.

D. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 100 mm
wide.

1. Z-shaped ties with ends bent 90 degrees to provide hooks not less than 50 mm
long may be used for light weight masonry constructed from solid units.
2. Where wythes do not align, use adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye connections
having a maximum adjustment of 32 mm.
3. Wire: Fabricate from 6.35-mm diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

E. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors

that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces
perpendicular to plane of wall.

1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 6.35-mm diameter, hot-
dip galvanized steel wire.
2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie made from 6.35-mm diameter, hot-dip
galvanized steel wire.

F. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical
or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to
plane of wall.

1. Connector Section: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete
and attached to tie section; formed from 2.66-mm thick steel sheet, galvanized
after fabrication.

2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie made from 6.35-mm diameter, hot-dip
galvanized steel wire.

G. Partition Top Anchors: 2.66-mm thick metal plate with a 9.5-mm diameter metal rod
152 mm long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that
allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.

H. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 38 mm wide by 6.35 mm thick by 610 mm
long, with ends turned up 50 mm or with cross pins unless otherwise indicated.

1. Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A

153/A 153M.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS

A. Unit Type Inserts in Concrete: Cast-iron or malleable-iron wedge-type inserts.

B. Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM F

568M, Property Class 4.6; with ASTM A 563M hex nuts and, where indicated, flat
washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class
C; of dimensions indicated.

C. Postinstalled Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.

1. Load Capacity: Capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six

times the load imposed when installed in light weight masonry and four times
the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing
according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing
agency.
2. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to
comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5 unless
otherwise indicated.
3. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy
Group A4 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 738M, and nuts, ASTM F 836M.

D. Special Purpose Anchors & Fittings: For areas where any cladding is expected on
lightweight concrete block surfaces use block work manufacturer’s recommended
proprietary anchors, fasteners and details. Contractor shall submit shop drawings
with all required details, calculations and manufacturer’s written recommendations
for Engineer’s review and approval.

2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural

Sheet Metal Manual" and as specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and
Trim".

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade
2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated
from neoprene.

B. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated felt complying with ASTM D

226/D 226M, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

C. Weep/Cavity Vent Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 10 | P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

1. Round Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Medium-density polyethylene, 9-mm OD

by 100 mm long.

2.10 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing

adhesive/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new
masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly
approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of light weight
masonry units being cleaned.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions
detrimental to performance of the Work.
2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
4. Verify that substrates are free of substances that impair adhesive bond.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to
verify actual locations of piping connections.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Lay Thermally Insulated Concrete blocks plumb, level and true to line for range.

B. Lay blocks in running bond with 200mm minimum head joints lapping in alternate
courses.

C. Thickness: Build Light Weight Concrete masonry construction to full thickness

shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of
widths indicated.

D. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other
Sections.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 11 | P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

E. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After

installing equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent
to opening.

F. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a

continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor- driven
saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges.

G. Cut Light Weight Concrete blocks with block manufacturer’s recommended hand-
type saw or electric band saw specially designed for cutting Light Weight Concrete
blocks. Lay out blocks to minimize cutting.

3.3 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 12
mm or minus 6 mm.
2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than
plus or minus 12 mm.
3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more
than plus or minus 6 mm in a story height or 12 mm total.

B. Lines and Levels:

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by
more than 6 mm in 3 m, or 12-mm maximum.
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do
not vary from level by more than 3 mm in 3 m, 6 mm in 6 m, or 12-mm
maximum.
3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 6 mm in
3 m, 9 mm in 6 m, or 12-mm maximum.
4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals,
and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 3 mm
in 3 m, 6 mm in 6 m, or 12-mm maximum.
5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 6 mm in 3 m, 9
mm in 6 m, or 12-mm maximum.
6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by
more than 6 mm in 3 m, or 12-mm maximum.

C. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or
minus 3 mm, with a maximum thickness limited to 12 mm.
2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent
courses by more than 3 mm.
3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than
plus 9 mm or minus 6 mm.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 12 | P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than
plus or minus 3 mm. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint
thicknesses by more than 3 mm.
5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a
straight line by more than 1.5 mm from one masonry unit to the next.

3.4 LAYING LIGHT WEIGHT MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform
joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement- type joints,
returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners,
jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by
lapping not less than 100 mm. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at
corners. Do not use units with less-than-nominal 100-mm horizontal face
dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by stepping back units in each course
from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry
surfaces that are to receive adhesive, remove loose masonry units and adhesive.

D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other
Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

E. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with adhesive unless otherwise
indicated.

F. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a
layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod adhesive
or grout into core.

G. Provisions For Other Work:

1. Make provisions (chases and routing) for work to be installed under other
sections that are required to be coordinated as work progresses. Exercise care
not to disturb other materials from position.
2. Coordinate with SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING article for required
rouing and chases.
3. Fill in interior spaces around built-in items with fine grout or interior plaster.
4. Fill in exterior spaces around built-in items with fine grout.

H. Build nonload-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid

floor or roof structure above unless otherwise indicated.

1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of

structure above.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 13 | P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition.
Grout cells of light weight concrete blocks solidly around plastic tubes of
anchors and push tubes down into grout to provide 12- mm clearance between
end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 1200 mm o.c. unless
otherwise indicated.
3. Wedge nonload-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of
tile, slate, or metal. Fill joint with adhesive after dead-load deflection of
structure above approaches final position.
4. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of
structure above to comply with Section 078443 "Joint Firestopping."

3.5 BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Joints:

1. Make adjustment while adhesive is still soft and plastic by tapping to plumb
and bringing to alignment.
2. Check each block as laid with mason’s level for level and plumb with wall
below.
3. Remove and replace adhesive with fresh adhesive where adjustment must be
made after adhesive has started to set.
4. Keep bed and head joints uniform in width.
5. Standard thickness for both horizontal and vertical adhesive joints: as noted
above.
6. Take particular care to avoid spreading adhesive on exposed face of block.
7. Clean block surfaces smooth. Maintain free from projections capable of
puncturing flashing material

B. Joint treatment: Remove excess extruded adhesive immediately after laying block.
The tooling of joints is not required. Trowel joints flush with face of block.

3.6 LIGHT WEIGHT MASONRY-JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in adhesive with a minimum
cover of 16 mm on exterior side of walls, 12 mm elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a
minimum of 150 mm.

1. Space reinforcement not more than 400 mm o.c.

2. Space reinforcement not more than 200 mm o.c. in foundation walls and
parapet walls.
3. Provide reinforcement not more than 200 mm above and below wall openings
and extending 300 mm beyond openings in addition to continuous
reinforcement.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise

indicated.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 14 | P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at

corners, returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special
conditions.

3.7 ANCHORING LIGHT WEIGHT MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND

CONCRETE

A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete, where masonry abuts or faces
structural steel or concrete, to comply with the following:

1. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to

structure.
2. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 600 mm o.c. vertically and 915
mm o.c. horizontally.

3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Install control- and expansion-joint materials in light weight masonry as

masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints
without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.

B. Form control joints in light weight concrete masonry using one of the following
methods:

1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of light weight concrete
masonry on one side of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout, and rake
out joints in exposed faces for application of sealant.
2. Provide control joints in light weight concrete masonry walls greater than 6m in
length at maximum 6000mm intervals, and apply control joint filler. For control
joints in fire resisting walls use fire stopping as specified in Section for Fire
Stopping.
3. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.
4. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips
at joint. Keep head joints free and clear of adhesive, or rake out joint for
application of sealant.
5. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints, and remove filler when
light weight masonry is complete for application of sealant.

C. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an airspace or

inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod
specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," but not less than 10 mm.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 15 | P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting

masonry.

3.9 LINTELS

A. Install steel lintels where indicated.

B. Provide concrete lintels where shown and where openings of more than 600 mm for
block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.

C. Maintain minimum 200 mm bearing on each side of opening for spans up to 2.0m.
Increase by 100mm for each 1.0m in excess of 2.0m span.

3.10 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND CAVITY VENTS

A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles,
lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where
indicated. Install cavity vents at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to
upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated.

B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that
could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within adhesive joint, place
through-wall flashing on sloping bed of adhesive and cover with adhesive.
Before covering with adhesive, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive,
sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.
2. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through
outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 100 mm, and through inner wythe to
within 13 mm of the interior face of wall in exposed masonry. Where interior
face of wall is to receive furring or framing, carry flashing completely through
inner wythe and turn flashing up approximately 50 mm on interior face.
3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 150 mm into
masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 150 mm at ends and
turn up not less than 50 mm to form end dams.
4. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less
than 38 mm or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with
elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint
Sealants" for application indicated.
5. Install metal drip edges and sealant stops with ribbed sheet metal flashing by
interlocking hemmed edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric
sealant complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for
application indicated.
6. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of
wall. Stop flexible flashing 13 mm back from outside face of wall, and adhere
flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 16 | P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

7. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall
construction is completed.

C. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where
indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans
with upturned edges located below face shells and webs of CMUs above and with
weep spouts aligned with face of wall. Install CMU web covers so that they cover
upturned edges of CMU cell pans at CMU webs and extend from face shell to face
shell.

D. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are
shown to be built into masonry.

E. Install weep holes in exterior wythes and veneers in head joints of first course of
masonry immediately above embedded flashing.

1. Use specified weep/cavity vent products to form weep holes.

2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing under brick sills.
Turn wicking down at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible.
3. Space weep holes 600 mm o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
4. Space weep holes formed from plastic tubing 400 mm o.c.
5. Cover cavity side of weep holes with plastic insect screening at cavities
insulated with loose-fill insulation.
6. Trim wicking material flush with outside face of wall after adhesive has set.

F. Place pea gravel in cavities as soon as practical to a height equal to height of first
course above top of flashing, but not less than 50 mm, to maintain drainage.

G. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements

for cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.

H. Install cavity vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use
specified weep/cavity vent products to form cavity vents.

1. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner

indicated. Install through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal
blocking.

3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections
and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas as
needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply
with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

B. Inspections: Special inspections according to Level 1 according to the "International

Building Code."

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 17 | P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified

proportions of site-prepared adhesive.
2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and
of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.
3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site- prepared
grout.

C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.

D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 460 sq. m of wall area or portion
thereof.

E. Light Weight Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided,
according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.

F. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C
1019.

3.12 PARGING

A. Use a steel-trowel finish to produce a smooth, flat, dense surface with a maximum
surface variation of 3 mm per 300 mm. Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at
bottom.

B. Damp-cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured.

3.13 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace light weight masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken,
stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units
to match adjoining units; install in fresh adhesive, pointed to eliminate evidence of
replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes.
Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a
neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean light weight masonry as work progresses by dry

brushing to remove adhesive fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After adhesive is thoroughly set and cured, clean light weight
masonry as follows:

1. Remove large adhesive particles by hand with wooden paddles and

nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel
uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Engineer's approval of sample
cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 18 | P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

3. Protect adjacent stone and no masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by
covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and
waterproof masking tape.
4. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA
TEK 8-4A.
5. Clean masonry with a cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
6. Clean limestone units to comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana
Limestone Handbook."

3.14 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are

Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project
site.

B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess
or soil-contaminated sand, waste adhesive, and broken masonry units, by crushing
and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.

1. Crush masonry waste to less than 100 mm in each dimension.

2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each
part of masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Section 312000 "Earth
Moving."
3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 450 mm of finished grade.

C. Masonry Waste Recycling: Return broken CMUs not used as fill to manufacturer for
recycling.

D. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as
fill, as described above or recycled, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of
off Owner's property.

END OF SECTION 04 22 15

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 19 | P a g e Section: 04 22 15
 Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

MASONARY WORKS

SECTION 04 22 15: LIGHT WEIGHT CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

Prepared By

Year 2022
Rev. 00

SECTION 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

LIGHT WEIGHT CONCRETE MASONRY

UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: The work under this section includes all labor, materials,
equipment and services to complete Light Weight Concrete Masonry works as
shown on the Drawings and specified herein.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing dovetail slots for

masonry anchors.
2. Section 042000 " Unit Masonry".
3. Section 044200 "Exterior Stone Cladding" for stone trim.
4. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for installing anchor sections of
adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural steel frame.
5. Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation" for cavity wall insulation.
6. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for sheet metal flashing and
for furnishing manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints.

1.3 REFERENCE

A. The minimum standards for products specified in this section shall be including as
under but not limited to the following. Except as otherwise specified herein, perform
work in accordance with specifications, codes and standards cited therein, and their
latest editions, revisions, applicable addenda and supplements. Where there is
conflict between the referenced standards the most stringent of the
conditions/requirements shall be applicable.

B. American Concrete Institute:

1. ACI 530-95 - Building Code Requirements commentary

for Masonry Structures.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 2|P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

2. ACI 530.1-95 - Specifications for Masonry Structures.

3. Masonry Designer’s Guide, latest edition.

C. American Society for Testing and Materials:

1. ASTM C1386-98 - Standard specification for precast

Autoclaved Aerated Concrete Units.

2. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of

Building Methods for fire tests of Building
Construction and materials.

3. ASTM C331 - Standard Specification for Light Weight

Aggregates for Concrete Masonry units.

4. ASTM C153 - Zinc coating (Hot dip) on iron and steel

hardware.

5. ASTM C1555 - Standard practice for Autoclaved Aerated

Concrete Masonry.

D. All applicable local codes, regulations, etc of Authorities having Jurisdiction.

Note: Contractor shall note that he shall keep copies of all of the referenced
standards on the site and shall provide the Engineer copy of the requested
referenced standard as and when requested.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Light Weight Concrete Masonry units is also known as Insulated block Masonry
units or Autoclaved Aerated Concrete Block Units.

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site one (1) week prior to
the installation.

1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s specifications and other data for Light Weight
Concrete block units and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For the following:

1. Light Weight Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of
special shapes.
2. Shop Drawings signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in
Kuwait, whose specialization is structural design.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 3|P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

3. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit masonry
reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315. Show elevations of reinforced walls.
4. Certification: Provide certification signed by an authorized officer of the
manufacturer that the products comply with the specified strength
requirements.

C. Samples for Initial Selection:

1. Light Weight Masonry Units.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:

1. Light Weight Masonry Units.

2. Accessories embedded in masonry.

1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names

together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot
numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to
identify materials used. Include mix proportions for adhesive and grout and source
of aggregates.

1. Submittal is for information only. Receipt of list does not constitute approval
of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are
specifically brought to the attention of Engineer and approved in writing.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:

1. Light Weight Masonry Units:

a. Provide certification signed by an authorized officer for material

properties, material test reports substantiating compliance with
requirements.
2. admixtures.
3. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing

indicated.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to

demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and
execution.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 4|P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings and as directed by

the Engineer.
2. Build mockups for typical exterior and interior walls in sizes 10m² length not
smaller than 2400 mm unless otherwise as direted by the Engineer by full
height by full thickness, including face and backup wythes and accessories.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part

of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.9 ACOUSTIC AND FIRE RESISTANCE REQUIRMENTS

A. Acoustic, General: Comply with Acoustic Report.

B. Fire requirements: All requirements for resistance of fire shall be in accordance with
the provisions of the NFPA and the Fire Strategy Report.

C. Submit certificates and other documents as evidence for compliance with acoustic
and fire resistance requirements as specified in the Acoustic and Fire Strategy
Report.

1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store Light Weight Concrete Masonry units on elevated platforms or on pallets in a

dry location.

B. Keep blocks dry. Protect blocks during inclement weather and non-work hours.

C. Protect Light Weight Concrete blocks from oil and chemical staining.

D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and

accumulation of dirt and oil.

1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental requirements: As per the instructions of the manufacturer.

B. Spread adhesive no more than 1200mm ahead of blocks and set blocks within one
minute of spreading adhesive.

C. Blocks must be dry with a moisture reading no greater than 15% when placed/set
and when plaster or any other finish is applied.

D. Maintain temperature recommended by manufacturer during mixing.

E. Protect in-place blocks from rain by covering with weather resistant membrane for
24 hours.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 5|P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

F. Protect blocks from direct exposure to wind and sun as per the recommendation of
the manufacturer.

1.12 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING

A. Loading block after completion shall only be done after the blocks have properly set
as follows:

1. Uniform floor or roof loads: 12 hours minimum.

2. Concentrated loads: 72 hours minimum.

B. Schedule, sequence and coordinate with work in other Sections for chases or routing
areas required in Light Weight Concrete block walls for electrical, plumbing and
other items.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Light Weight Masonry Units: Obtain Light Weight masonry
units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted
for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each
product required.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, the following
manufacturers (though not limited to) are acceptable:

1. National Industries
Tel. No. 1844555
Website: [Link]

2. Aerated Concrete Industries (ACICO)

Kuwait – Tel.: 2242 2100

3. Saudi Aerated Concrete Industries [Link] – KSA

Tel: 966 3 8472 543
Fax: 966 38472 574

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Medium Density Thermally Insulated Concrete blocks

1. Net Area Compressive Strength: Minimum 5.0 N/mm2,

2. Dry Density: Not more than 600 kg/m3
3. Thermal Transmittance (U-value): Not more than 0.483 W/m2k as per MEW
requirements of “Medium construction, medium light external colors” for
complete wall assembly including structural components not

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 6|P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

limited to slabs, beams and columns. This value shall be revised in accordance
with latest MEW regulations.
4. Size: As indicated on drawings.
5. Special Shapes: Provide where required for lintels, corners, jambs, control
joints, headers, bonding, scored accented walls and other special conditions.
6. Lintel Blocks:

a. Solid reinforced blocks: Same width as walls.

b. “U-shaped” lintel blocks: Same width as walls.

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with requirements for fire-resistance-rated

assembly designs indicated.

1. Wall assemblies shall meet ASTM-E 119

2. Where fire-resistance-rated construction is indicated, units shall be listed and

labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.

C. Defective Units: Do not use.

2.3 CONCRETE LINTELS

A. Concrete Lintels: ASTM C 1623, matching CMUs in color, texture, and density
classification; and with reinforcing bars indicated.

B. Precast Concrete Lintels: Sized to suit block wall thickness and coursing. Minimum
bearing at each side of structure openings shall be 200mm. Concrete strength shall be
not less than 30 N/mm2 at 28 days.

C. Concrete Lintels: Precast or formed-in-place concrete lintels complying with

requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete," and with reinforcing bars
indicated.

2.4 ADHESIVE AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Adhesive: shall be as recommended by the block manufacturer.

B. Grout

1. Composition and compressive strength shall be in accordance with ASTM C476

and ASTM C 1019
2. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
3. Compressive strength shall be 2000 PSI (14MPa).

C. Water: Potable.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 7|P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

2.5 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A

996/A 996M, Grade 420.

B. Light Weight Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.

1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel.

2. Wire Size for Side Rods: 4.8-mm) diameter.
3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 4.8-mm diameter.
4. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 400 mm o.c.
5. Provide in lengths of not less than 3 m, with prefabricated corner and tee units.

C. Light Weight Masonry-Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Ladder or

truss type with single pair of side rods.

D. Seismic clips: Provide galvanized steel seismic clips for juncture of underside of
slab and top of partition walls to accommodate seismic considerations. Type as
approved by the Engineer.

2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, the following
manufacturers (though not limited to) are acceptable:

1. Catnic
Local Agent: KMMC
Tel.: 2243 4752

2. Expamet
Tel.: 965-2291 2800/2801
Website: [Link]

3. Unitech Kuwait
Tel: 2245 9984
Website: [Link]

4. Hohmann & Barnad

Local Agent: Al Ghanim Specialities
Tel.: 1820044

B. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from
materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, with

ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.
2. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel,
Z180 zinc coating.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 8|P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

3. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M,

Commercial Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.
4. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Corrugated-Metal Ties: Metal strips not less than 22 mm wide with corrugations
having a wavelength of 7.5 to 12.5 mm and an amplitude of 1.5 to 2.5 mm made
from 1.52-mm thick steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication.

D. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 100 mm
wide.

1. Z-shaped ties with ends bent 90 degrees to provide hooks not less than 50 mm
long may be used for light weight masonry constructed from solid units.
2. Where wythes do not align, use adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye connections
having a maximum adjustment of 32 mm.
3. Wire: Fabricate from 6.35-mm diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

E. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors

that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces
perpendicular to plane of wall.

1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 6.35-mm diameter, hot-
dip galvanized steel wire.
2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie made from 6.35-mm diameter, hot-dip
galvanized steel wire.

F. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical
or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to
plane of wall.

1. Connector Section: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete
and attached to tie section; formed from 2.66-mm thick steel sheet, galvanized
after fabrication.

2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie made from 6.35-mm diameter, hot-dip
galvanized steel wire.

G. Partition Top Anchors: 2.66-mm thick metal plate with a 9.5-mm diameter metal rod
152 mm long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that
allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.

H. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 38 mm wide by 6.35 mm thick by 610 mm
long, with ends turned up 50 mm or with cross pins unless otherwise indicated.

1. Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A

153/A 153M.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS

A. Unit Type Inserts in Concrete: Cast-iron or malleable-iron wedge-type inserts.

B. Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM F

568M, Property Class 4.6; with ASTM A 563M hex nuts and, where indicated, flat
washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class
C; of dimensions indicated.

C. Postinstalled Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.

1. Load Capacity: Capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six

times the load imposed when installed in light weight masonry and four times
the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing
according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing
agency.
2. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to
comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5 unless
otherwise indicated.
3. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy
Group A4 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 738M, and nuts, ASTM F 836M.

D. Special Purpose Anchors & Fittings: For areas where any cladding is expected on
lightweight concrete block surfaces use block work manufacturer’s recommended
proprietary anchors, fasteners and details. Contractor shall submit shop drawings
with all required details, calculations and manufacturer’s written recommendations
for Engineer’s review and approval.

2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural

Sheet Metal Manual" and as specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and
Trim".

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade
2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated
from neoprene.

B. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated felt complying with ASTM D

226/D 226M, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

C. Weep/Cavity Vent Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 10 | P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

1. Round Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Medium-density polyethylene, 9-mm OD

by 100 mm long.

2.10 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing

adhesive/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new
masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly
approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of light weight
masonry units being cleaned.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions
detrimental to performance of the Work.
2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
4. Verify that substrates are free of substances that impair adhesive bond.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to
verify actual locations of piping connections.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Lay Thermally Insulated Concrete blocks plumb, level and true to line for range.

B. Lay blocks in running bond with 200mm minimum head joints lapping in alternate
courses.

C. Thickness: Build Light Weight Concrete masonry construction to full thickness

shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of
widths indicated.

D. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other
Sections.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 11 | P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

E. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After

installing equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent
to opening.

F. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a

continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor- driven
saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges.

G. Cut Light Weight Concrete blocks with block manufacturer’s recommended hand-
type saw or electric band saw specially designed for cutting Light Weight Concrete
blocks. Lay out blocks to minimize cutting.

3.3 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 12
mm or minus 6 mm.
2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than
plus or minus 12 mm.
3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more
than plus or minus 6 mm in a story height or 12 mm total.

B. Lines and Levels:

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by
more than 6 mm in 3 m, or 12-mm maximum.
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do
not vary from level by more than 3 mm in 3 m, 6 mm in 6 m, or 12-mm
maximum.
3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 6 mm in
3 m, 9 mm in 6 m, or 12-mm maximum.
4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals,
and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 3 mm
in 3 m, 6 mm in 6 m, or 12-mm maximum.
5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 6 mm in 3 m, 9
mm in 6 m, or 12-mm maximum.
6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by
more than 6 mm in 3 m, or 12-mm maximum.

C. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or
minus 3 mm, with a maximum thickness limited to 12 mm.
2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent
courses by more than 3 mm.
3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than
plus 9 mm or minus 6 mm.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 12 | P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than
plus or minus 3 mm. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint
thicknesses by more than 3 mm.
5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a
straight line by more than 1.5 mm from one masonry unit to the next.

3.4 LAYING LIGHT WEIGHT MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform
joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement- type joints,
returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners,
jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by
lapping not less than 100 mm. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at
corners. Do not use units with less-than-nominal 100-mm horizontal face
dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by stepping back units in each course
from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry
surfaces that are to receive adhesive, remove loose masonry units and adhesive.

D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other
Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

E. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with adhesive unless otherwise
indicated.

F. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a
layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod adhesive
or grout into core.

G. Provisions For Other Work:

1. Make provisions (chases and routing) for work to be installed under other
sections that are required to be coordinated as work progresses. Exercise care
not to disturb other materials from position.
2. Coordinate with SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING article for required
rouing and chases.
3. Fill in interior spaces around built-in items with fine grout or interior plaster.
4. Fill in exterior spaces around built-in items with fine grout.

H. Build nonload-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid

floor or roof structure above unless otherwise indicated.

1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of

structure above.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 13 | P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition.
Grout cells of light weight concrete blocks solidly around plastic tubes of
anchors and push tubes down into grout to provide 12- mm clearance between
end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 1200 mm o.c. unless
otherwise indicated.
3. Wedge nonload-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of
tile, slate, or metal. Fill joint with adhesive after dead-load deflection of
structure above approaches final position.
4. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of
structure above to comply with Section 078443 "Joint Firestopping."

3.5 BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Joints:

1. Make adjustment while adhesive is still soft and plastic by tapping to plumb
and bringing to alignment.
2. Check each block as laid with mason’s level for level and plumb with wall
below.
3. Remove and replace adhesive with fresh adhesive where adjustment must be
made after adhesive has started to set.
4. Keep bed and head joints uniform in width.
5. Standard thickness for both horizontal and vertical adhesive joints: as noted
above.
6. Take particular care to avoid spreading adhesive on exposed face of block.
7. Clean block surfaces smooth. Maintain free from projections capable of
puncturing flashing material

B. Joint treatment: Remove excess extruded adhesive immediately after laying block.
The tooling of joints is not required. Trowel joints flush with face of block.

3.6 LIGHT WEIGHT MASONRY-JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in adhesive with a minimum
cover of 16 mm on exterior side of walls, 12 mm elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a
minimum of 150 mm.

1. Space reinforcement not more than 400 mm o.c.

2. Space reinforcement not more than 200 mm o.c. in foundation walls and
parapet walls.
3. Provide reinforcement not more than 200 mm above and below wall openings
and extending 300 mm beyond openings in addition to continuous
reinforcement.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise

indicated.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 14 | P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at

corners, returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special
conditions.

3.7 ANCHORING LIGHT WEIGHT MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND

CONCRETE

A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete, where masonry abuts or faces
structural steel or concrete, to comply with the following:

1. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to

structure.
2. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 600 mm o.c. vertically and 915
mm o.c. horizontally.

3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Install control- and expansion-joint materials in light weight masonry as

masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints
without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.

B. Form control joints in light weight concrete masonry using one of the following
methods:

1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of light weight concrete
masonry on one side of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout, and rake
out joints in exposed faces for application of sealant.
2. Provide control joints in light weight concrete masonry walls greater than 6m in
length at maximum 6000mm intervals, and apply control joint filler. For control
joints in fire resisting walls use fire stopping as specified in Section for Fire
Stopping.
3. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.
4. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips
at joint. Keep head joints free and clear of adhesive, or rake out joint for
application of sealant.
5. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints, and remove filler when
light weight masonry is complete for application of sealant.

C. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an airspace or

inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod
specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," but not less than 10 mm.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 15 | P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting

masonry.

3.9 LINTELS

A. Install steel lintels where indicated.

B. Provide concrete lintels where shown and where openings of more than 600 mm for
block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.

C. Maintain minimum 200 mm bearing on each side of opening for spans up to 2.0m.
Increase by 100mm for each 1.0m in excess of 2.0m span.

3.10 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND CAVITY VENTS

A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles,
lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where
indicated. Install cavity vents at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to
upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated.

B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that
could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within adhesive joint, place
through-wall flashing on sloping bed of adhesive and cover with adhesive.
Before covering with adhesive, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive,
sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.
2. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through
outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 100 mm, and through inner wythe to
within 13 mm of the interior face of wall in exposed masonry. Where interior
face of wall is to receive furring or framing, carry flashing completely through
inner wythe and turn flashing up approximately 50 mm on interior face.
3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 150 mm into
masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 150 mm at ends and
turn up not less than 50 mm to form end dams.
4. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less
than 38 mm or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with
elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint
Sealants" for application indicated.
5. Install metal drip edges and sealant stops with ribbed sheet metal flashing by
interlocking hemmed edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric
sealant complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for
application indicated.
6. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of
wall. Stop flexible flashing 13 mm back from outside face of wall, and adhere
flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 16 | P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

7. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall
construction is completed.

C. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where
indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans
with upturned edges located below face shells and webs of CMUs above and with
weep spouts aligned with face of wall. Install CMU web covers so that they cover
upturned edges of CMU cell pans at CMU webs and extend from face shell to face
shell.

D. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are
shown to be built into masonry.

E. Install weep holes in exterior wythes and veneers in head joints of first course of
masonry immediately above embedded flashing.

1. Use specified weep/cavity vent products to form weep holes.

2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing under brick sills.
Turn wicking down at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible.
3. Space weep holes 600 mm o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
4. Space weep holes formed from plastic tubing 400 mm o.c.
5. Cover cavity side of weep holes with plastic insect screening at cavities
insulated with loose-fill insulation.
6. Trim wicking material flush with outside face of wall after adhesive has set.

F. Place pea gravel in cavities as soon as practical to a height equal to height of first
course above top of flashing, but not less than 50 mm, to maintain drainage.

G. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements

for cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.

H. Install cavity vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use
specified weep/cavity vent products to form cavity vents.

1. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner

indicated. Install through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal
blocking.

3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections
and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas as
needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply
with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

B. Inspections: Special inspections according to Level 1 according to the "International

Building Code."

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 17 | P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified

proportions of site-prepared adhesive.
2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and
of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.
3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site- prepared
grout.

C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.

D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 460 sq. m of wall area or portion
thereof.

E. Light Weight Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided,
according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.

F. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C
1019.

3.12 PARGING

A. Use a steel-trowel finish to produce a smooth, flat, dense surface with a maximum
surface variation of 3 mm per 300 mm. Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at
bottom.

B. Damp-cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured.

3.13 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace light weight masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken,
stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units
to match adjoining units; install in fresh adhesive, pointed to eliminate evidence of
replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes.
Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a
neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean light weight masonry as work progresses by dry

brushing to remove adhesive fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After adhesive is thoroughly set and cured, clean light weight
masonry as follows:

1. Remove large adhesive particles by hand with wooden paddles and

nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel
uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Engineer's approval of sample
cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 18 | P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Light Weight Concrete Masonry. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

3. Protect adjacent stone and no masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by
covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and
waterproof masking tape.
4. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA
TEK 8-4A.
5. Clean masonry with a cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
6. Clean limestone units to comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana
Limestone Handbook."

3.14 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are

Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project
site.

B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess
or soil-contaminated sand, waste adhesive, and broken masonry units, by crushing
and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.

1. Crush masonry waste to less than 100 mm in each dimension.

2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each
part of masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Section 312000 "Earth
Moving."
3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 450 mm of finished grade.

C. Masonry Waste Recycling: Return broken CMUs not used as fill to manufacturer for
recycling.

D. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as
fill, as described above or recycled, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of
off Owner's property.

END OF SECTION 04 22 15

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 19 | P a g e Section: 04 22 15
Amazon – Table of Contents – Metal Works. 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

TABLE OF CONTENTS

ARCHITECTURAL WORKS

DIVISION 05 - METAL

Section No.
Descriptions

05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

05 50 00 METAL FABRICATION
05 52 13 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
05 53 05 METAL GRATINGS AND FLOOR PLATES

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |1 TOC
 Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

METAL WORKS

SECTION 05 12 00: STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

Prepared By

Year 2022
Rev. 00
Amazon structural steel framing.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTION: 05 12 00

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Structural steel framing members, support members, suspension cables, sag rods,
and struts.
B. Base plates, shear stud connectors and expansion joint plates.
C. Grouting under base plates.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Steel fabrications affecting structural steel
work.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AISC (MAN) - Steel Construction Manual; American Institute of Steel
Construction, Inc.; 2005.
B. AISC S303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges;
American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 2005.
C. AISC S348 - Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490
Bolts; 2004.
D. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008.
E. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-
Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012.
F. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold
Finished; 2007.
G. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron
and Steel Hardware; 2009.
H. ASTM A242/A242M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy
Structural Steel; 2004 (Reapproved 2009).
I. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000
PSI Tensile Strength; 2010.
J. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated,
120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2010.
K. ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated
830 MPa Tensile Strength (Metric); 2009.
L. ASTM A490 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat-
Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2012.
M. ASTM A490M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Steel Bolts, Classes
10.9 and 10.9.3, for Structural Steel Joints (Metric); 2012.
N. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and
Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2010a.
O. 0. ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 05 12 00
Amazon structural steel framing.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing; 2007.

P. ASTM A514/A514M - Standard Specification for High-Yield Strength, Quenched
and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding; 2005 (Reapproved 2009).
Q. ASTM A529/A529M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-
Manganese Steel of Structural Quality; 2005 (Reapproved 2009).
R. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts; 2007a.
S. ASTM A563M - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
[Metric]; 2007.
T. ASTM A572/A572M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy
Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel; 2012.
U. ASTM A992/A992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes; 2011.
V. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled,
Carbon, Structural, High-Strength, Low Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy
with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened , and Bake Hard enable; 2012
W. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-
Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy
with Improved Formability; 2012.
X. ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-
Cement Grout (No shrink); 2011.
Y. ASTM E94 - Standard Guide for Radiographic Examination; 2004 (Reapproved
2010).
Z. ASTM E164 - Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Contact Examination of
Weldments; 2008.
AA. AA. ASTM E165 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination;
2009. AB. ASTM E709 - Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing; 2008.
BB. AC. ASTM F436 - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers; 2011.
CC. AD. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive
Examination; American Welding Society; 2007.
DD. AE. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel: American Welding
Society; 2010. AF. IAS AC172 -Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection
Programs for Structural Steel;
EE. International Accreditation Service, Inc.; 2011.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal
procedures.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, and locations of structural members,
openings, attachments, and fasteners.
2. Connections not detailed.
3. Indicate cambers and loads.
4. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate
net weld lengths.
C. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS
qualification within the previous 12 months.
D. Fabricator's Qualification Statement: Provide documentation showing steel
fabricator is accredited under IAS AC172.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 05 12 00
Amazon structural steel framing.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC "Steel

Construction Manual.''
B. Comply with Section 10 of AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges" for architecturally exposed structural steel.
C. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified steel fabricator that is accredited by the
International Accreditation Service (IAS) Fabricator Inspection Program for
Structural Steel (AC172).
D. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum five years of documented experience.
E. Design connections not detailed on the drawings under direct supervision of a
Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and
licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel Angles and Plates: ASTM A36/A36M.
B. Steel W Shapes and Tees: ASTM A992/A992M.
C. Rolled Steel Structural Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M.
D. Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 242/A 242M high-strength,
corrosion-resistant structural steel.
E. Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A529/A529M high-strength,
carbon-manganese structural steel, Grade 50.
F. Steel Plates and Bars: ASTM A572/A572M, Grade 50 (345)
high-strength, columbium-vanadium steel.
G. Cold-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B.
H. Hot-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A501, seamless or welded.
I. Steel Bars: ASTM A108 .
J. Steel Plate: ASTM A514/A514M.
K. Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011M, Designation SS, Grade 30 hot-
rolled, or ASTM A1008/A1008M, Designation SS, Grade 30 cold-
rolled.
L. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B, Finish black.
M. Shear Stud Connectors: Made from ASTM A 108 Grade 1015 bars.
N. Suspension Cable: Dire rope.
0. Sag Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C. Structural Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, ASTM A307, Grade a galvanized to
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.
D. High-Strength Structural Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 (ASTM
A325M), Type 1, medium carbon, galvanized.
E. High-Strength Structural Bolts: ASTM A490 (ASTM A490M}, with matching
ASTM A563 (ASTM A563M) nuts and ASTM F436 washers; Type 1 alloy

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 05 12 00
Amazon structural steel framing.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

steel.
F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.
G. Grout: Non-shrink, non-metallic aggregate type, complying with ASTM
C1107/C1107M and capable of developing a minimum compressive strength
of 48 MPa at 28 days.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible.

B. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. Grind exposed welds
smooth.
C. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors.

2.3 FINISH
A. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be
fireproofed, field welded, in contact with concrete, or high strength bolted.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Provide shop testing and analysis of structural steel.
B. High-Strength Bolts: Provide testing and verification of shop-bolted
connections in accordance with AISC "Specification for Structural Joints
Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts".
C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect all shop-welded connections and test
using one of the following:
• Radiographic testing performed in accordance with ASTM E94.
• Ultrasonic testing performed in accordance with ASTM E164.
• Liquid penetrant inspection performed in accordance with ASTM E165.
• Magnetic particle inspection performed in accordance with ASTM E709.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and
that the work may properly proceed.

3.2 ERECTION

A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC "Code of Standard Practice

for Steel Buildings and Bridges".
B. Allow for erection loads, and provide sufficient temporary bracing to
maintain structure in safe condition, plumb, and in true alignment until
completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.
C. Field weld components and shear studs indicated on shop drawings.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 05 12 00
Amazon structural steel framing.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

D. Use carbon steel bolts only for temporary bracing during construction,
unless otherwise specifically permitted on drawings. Install high-strength
bolts in accordance with AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using
ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts".
E. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect.
F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed,
except surfaces to be in contact with concrete.
G. Grout solidly between column plates and bearing surfaces, complying with
manufacturer's instructions for no shrink grout. Trowel grouted surfaces
smooth, splaying neatly to 45 degrees.

3.3 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 6 mm per story, non-cumulative.
B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 6 mm.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as
specified in Section 01
B. 40 00.
C. High-Strength Bolts: Provide testing and verification of field-bolted
connections in accordance
D. With AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or
A490 Bolts".
E. Welded Connections: Visually inspect all field-welded connections and test
using one of the following:
• Radiographic testing performed in accordance with ASTM E94.
• Ultrasonic testing performed in accordance with ASTM E164.
• Liquid penetrant inspection performed in accordance with ASTM E165.
• Magnetic particle inspection performed in accordance with ASTM E709.

END OF SECTION 05 12 00

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 05 12 00
Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

METAL WORKS

SECTION 05 50 00: METAL FABRICATION

Prepared By

Year 2022
Rev. 00
Amazon – Metal Fabrication.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTION: 05 50 00

METAL FABRICATION

PART1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Shop fabricated steel and aluminum items.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 05 52 13 - Pipe and Tube Railings.
B. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Paint finish.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural

Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012.
B. ANSI A14.3 -American National Standard for Ladders -- Fixed --
Safety Requirements; 2008.
C. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel;
2008.
D. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and
Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012.
E. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip
Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2012.
F. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-
Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009.
G. ASTM A283/A283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate
Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates; 2003 (Reapproved 2007).
H. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat
Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2010.
I. ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat
Treated 830 MPa Tensile Strength (Metric); 2009.
J. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded
and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes;
2010a.
K. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-
Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2010.
L. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-
Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2010.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 1|P a g e Section: 05 50 00
Amazon – Metal Fabrication.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

M. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-

Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2012.
N. ASTM 8221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-
Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2012.
O. 0. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and
Nondestructive Examination; American Welding Society; 2007.
P. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding
Society; 2010.
Q. AWS D1.2/D1.2M - Structural Welding Code - Aluminum; American
Welding Society; 2003, and Errata 2004.
R. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective
Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004).
S. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type 11,
"Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004).
T. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982
(Ed. 2004).

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing,
anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection
drawings, elevations, and details where applicable.
1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols.
Indicate net weld lengths.
C. Welders' Certificates: Submit certification for welders employed on the
project, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS - STEEL

A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M.
B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing.
C. Plates: ASTM A283.
D. Checkered Steel Plate: ASTM A786/A786M, rolled steel floor plate: pattern
no. 2; galvanized finish.
E. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish.
F. Slotted Channel Framing: ASTM A653, Grade 33.
G. Slotted Channel Fittings: ASTM A1011/A1011M.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 2|P a g e Section: 05 50 00
Amazon – Metal Fabrication.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

H. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 (ASTM A325M), Type 1, galvanized
to ASTM A153/A153M were connecting galvanized components.
I. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M: type required for materials being welded.
J. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC
limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.
K. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic,
complying with vie limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 MATERIALS - ALUMINUM

A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper.
B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM 8209M), 5052 alloy, H32 or H22 temper.
C. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Stainless steel.
D. Welding Materials: AWS D1.2/D1.2M; type required for materials being welded.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.
B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
C. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make
exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small
uniform radius.
D. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors
and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where
specifically noted otherwise.

2.4 FABRICATED ITEMS

A Ladders: Steel; in compliance with ANSI A14.3; with mounting brackets and
attachments; prime paint finish.
C. Bumper Posts and Guard Rails: As detailed; prime paint finish.
D. Bollards: Steel pipe, concrete filled, crowned cap, as detailed; prime paint finish.
E. Door Frames for Overhead Door Openings, Wall Openings, and prime paint finish.
F. Elevator Hoist way Divider Beams: Beam sections; prime paint finish.
G. Toilet Partition Suspension Members: Steel channel sections; prime paint finish.
H. Slotted Channel Framing: Fabricate channels and fittings

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 3|P a g e Section: 05 50 00
Amazon – Metal Fabrication.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

from structural steel complying with the referenced standards; factory-applied, rust-
inhibiting thermoset acrylic enamel finish.
2.5 FINISHES • STEEL
A. Prime paint all steel items.
B. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP2.
C. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.
D. Prime Painting: One coat.
E. Galvanizing of Structural Steel Members: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM
A123/A123M requirements.
F. Galvanizing of Non-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM
A123/A123M requirements.

2.6 FINISHES - ALUMINUM

A. Exterior Aluminum Surfaces: Class I color anodized.
B. Interior Aluminum Surfaces: Class I natural anodized.
C. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating
not less than
0.018 mm thick.
D. Class I Color Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A44 Electrolytically
deposited colored anodic coating not less than 0.018 mm thick; light bronze.
E. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum surfaces in contact with
cementitious or dissimilar materials.

2.7 FABRICATION TOLERANCES

A. Squareness: 3 mm maximum difference in diagonal measurements.
B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1.5 mm.
C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1.5 mm.
D. Maximum Bow: 3 mm in 1.2 m.
E. Maximum Deviation from Plane: 1.5 mm in 1.2 m.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.
B. Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to
be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 05 50 00
Amazon – Metal Fabrication.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.

C. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.
3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 6 mm per story, non-cumulative.
B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment: 6 mm.
C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 6 mm.

END OF SECTION 05 50 00

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 05 50 00
Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

METAL WORKS

SECTION 05 52 13: PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

Prepared By

Year 2022
Rev. 00
Amazon –Pipe and tube railings.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTION: 05 52 13

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

PART1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Wall mounted handrails.
B. Stair railings and guardrails.
C. Free-standing railings at steps

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of anchors in concrete.
B. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Placement of anchors in masonry.
C. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Placement of backing plates in
stud wall construction.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)
Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2012.
B. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and
Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2010a.
C. ASTM E985 - Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems
and Rails for Buildings; 2000 (Reapproved 2006).
D. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Paint; The Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed.
2004).
E. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic");
The Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004).

1.4 SUBMITTAL$
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, anchorage, size
and type of fasteners, and accessories.
C. Samples: Submit two, 1000 mm long samples of handrail. Submit two samples of
elbow, wall bracket, and end stop.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS, GENERAL
1. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam
marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
2. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails unless
otherwise indicated.
3. Provide extruded-aluminum brackets with interlocking pieces that conceal

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 1|P a g e Section: 05 52 13
Amazon –Pipe and tube railings.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

anchorage. Locate setscrews on bottom of bracket.

2.2 RAILINGS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1. Design, fabricate, and test railing assemblies in accordance with the most
stringent requirements of ASTM E985 and applicable local code.
2. Allow for expansion and contraction of members and building movement without
damage to connections or members.
3. Dimensions: See drawings for configurations and heights.

4. Provide anchors and other components as required to attach to structure, made

of same materials as railing components unless otherwise indicated; where
exposed fasteners are unavoidable provide flush countersunk fasteners.
• For anchorage to concrete, provide inserts to be cast into concrete, for bolting
anchors.
• For anchorage to masonry, provide brackets to be embedded in masonry,
for bolting anchors.
• For anchorage to stud walls, provide backing plates, for bolting anchors.
• Posts: Provide adjustable flanged brackets.
5. Provide slip-on non-weld mechanical fittings to join lengths, seal open ends,
and conceal exposed mounting bolts and nuts, including but not limited to
elbows, T-shapes, splice connectors, flanges, escutcheons, and wall brackets.

2.3 STEEL RAILING SYSTEM

1. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing.
2. Non-Weld Mechanical Fittings: Slip-on, galvanized malleable iron castings, for
Schedule 40 pipe, with flush setscrews for tightening by standard hex wrench, no
bolts or screw fasteners.
3. Welding Fittings: Factory- or shop-welded from matching pipe or tube; seams
continuously welded; joints and seams ground smooth.
4. Exposed Fasteners: No exposed bolts or screws.
5. Straight Splice Connectors: Steel concealed spigots.
6. Galvanizing in accordance with requirements of ASTM A123/A123M.
7. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic.
8. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with vie limitations of
authorities having jurisdiction.

2.4 STAINLESS STEEL

1. Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 316.
2. Pipe: ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP 316.
3. Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade CF 8M or CF 3M.
4. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: ASTM A 666, Type 316.
5. Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 316.
6. Wire Rope and Fittings (Where indicated):
7. Wire Rope: 1-by-19 wire rope made from wire complying with ASTM A 492, Type
316.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 2|P a g e Section: 05 52 13
Amazon –Pipe and tube railings.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

8. Wire-Rope Fittings: Connectors of types indicated, fabricated from stainless steel, and
with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to minimum breaking strength
of wire rope with which they are used.
9. Expanded Metal: ASTM F 1267, Type II (expanded and flattened), Class 3
(corrosion-resisting steel), made from stainless-steel sheet complying with ASTM
A 666, Type 316.
10. Style Designation: As indicated.
11. Perforated Metal: Stainless-steel sheet, ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type
316L,
0.062 inch (1.59 mm) thick, with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) holes 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) o.c. in
staggered rows.
12. Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, diamond pattern, 2-inch (50-mm)
woven-wire mesh, made from 0.135-inch (3.5-mm) nominal diameter wire
complying with ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 316.

2.5 FABRICATION
1. Accurately form components to suit specific project conditions and for proper
connection to building structure.

2. Fit and shop assemble components in largest for delivery to site.

3. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. Provide spigots and
sleeves to accommodate site assembly and installation.
4. Welded Joints:
• Exterior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by intermittent welds and
plastic filler. Drill condensate drainage holes at bottom of members at locations
that will not encourage water intrusion.
• Interior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by intermittent welds and
plastic filler.
• Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed
joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
• Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.

3.2 PREPARATION
• Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.
• Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting
templates, for installation as work of other sections.
• Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum surfaces that will be in
contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials.

3.3 INSTALLATION
• Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
• Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects,
with tight joints.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 3|P a g e Section: 05 52 13
Amazon –Pipe and tube railings.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

• Anchor railings securely to structure.

• Conceal anchor bolts and screws whenever possible. Where not concealed, use
flush countersunk fastenings.

3.4 TOLERANCES
• Maximum Variation From Plumb: 6 mm per floor level, non-cumulative.
• Maximum Offset from True Alignment: 6 mm.
• Maximum Out-of-Position: 6 mm.

END OF SECTION 05 52 13

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 4|P a g e Section: 05 52 13
 Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

METAL WORKS

SECTION 05 53 05: METAL GRATINGS AND FLOOR PLATES

Prepared By

Year 2022
Rev. 00
Amazon – Metal Gratings and Floor Plates.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTION: 05 53 05

METAL GRATINGS AND FLOOR PLATES

PART1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Formed metal floor and stair tread gratings.

B. Perimeter closure.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

C. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008.
D. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized}
Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2012.
E. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on
Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009.
F. ASTM A786/A786M - Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low-Alloy,
High-Strength Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates; 2005 (Reapproved 2009).
G. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive
Examination; American Welding Society; 2007.
H. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society;
2010.
I. NAAMM MBG 531 - Metal Bar Grating Manual: The National Association of
Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2009 (ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531).
J. NAAMM MBG 532 - Heavy Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual; The National
Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2009 (ANSI/NAAMM
MBG 532).
K. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004).

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

L. Conform to applicable code for loading requirements.
M. Maximum Allowable Deflection under Live Load: 1/240 of span; size
components by single support design.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide span and deflection tables.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate details of component supports, openings, perimeter
construction details, and tolerances.
D. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net
weld lengths.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 1|P a g e Section: 05 53 05
Amazon – Metal Gratings and Floor Plates.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A Designer Qualifications: Design gratings and plates under direct supervision of
a licensed Professional Engineer experienced in design of this type of work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
• Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A786/A786M; pattern as indicated.
• Steel Framing: ASTM A36/A36M shapes, unfinished.
• Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.

2.2 ACCESSORIES
A Fasteners: Galvanized steel:
B. Perimeter Closure: Of same material as grating.

2.3 FABRICATION
• Grating Type: NAAMM MBG 532, Pressure Locked Type.
• Mechanically clinch joints of intersecting metal sections.
• Fabricate support framing for openings.
• Top Surface: Serrated.
• Bearing Bar: Size and spacing as indicated on Drawings.
• Cross Bar: Oize and spacing as indicated on Drawings.

2.4 FINISHES
• Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP 2.
• Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.
• Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is
required.
• Prime paint items with one coat.
• Galvanizing for Steel Shapes: ASTM A123/A123M.
• Galvanizing for Steel Hardware: ASTM A153/A153M.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings.
B. Verify that opening sizes and dimensional tolerances are acceptable.
C. Verify that supports are correctly positioned.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Place frames in correct position, plumb and level.
C. Mechanically cut galvanized finish surfaces. Do not flame cut.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 2|P a g e Section: 05 53 05
Amazon – Metal Gratings and Floor Plates.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

D. Anchor by welding.
E. Set perimeter closure flush with top of grating and surrounding construction.
F. Secure to prevent movement.

3.3 TOLERANCES
A. Conform to NAAMM MBG 531.

END OF SECTION 05 53 05

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 3|P a g e Section: 05 53 05
Amazon – TOC – Wood, Plastics, and Composites.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

TABLE OF CONTENTS

ARCHITECTURAL WORKS

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

Section No.
Descriptions

06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 42 16 WOOD VENEER PANELING

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |1 TOC
 Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 06 1000: WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

Prepared By

Year 2022
Rev. 00
Amazon – Wood, Plastics, and Composites.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTION: 06 10 00

WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

PART1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Preservative treated wood materials.
B. Fire retardant treated wood materials.
C. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing.
D. Communications and electrical room mounting boards.
E. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports.
F. Miscellaneous wood nailers, furring, and grounds.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum-based sheathing.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 2009.
B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)
on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009.
C. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene
Thermal Insulation; 2011be1.
D. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2011.
E. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials; 2012.
F. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood;
American Wood Protection Association; 2010.
G. PS 20 -American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards
and Technology (Department of Commerce); 2005.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials and
application instructions.
C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been
completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked
products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 06 10 00
Amazon – Wood, Plastics, and Composites.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

B. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during

shipping, storage, or installation.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective Work within a five-year period after Date of Substantial
Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading
agencies.
B. Species: Douglas Fir-Larch, unless otherwise indicated.
C. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no
grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting
the specified requirements.
D. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of
Review, American Lumber Standard Committee ([Link]) and who provides
grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with
grade mark unless otherwise indicated.
E. Lumber of other species or grades is acceptable provided structural and appearance
characteristics are equivalent to or better than products specified.

2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS

A Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.
B. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.
C. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring:
1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade.
2. Boards: Standard or No. 3.

2.3 CONSTRUCTION PANELS

A. Wall Sheathing: Gypsum, complying with requirements of ASTM C1396/C1396M
for gypsum sheathing, V-shaped long edges, 16 mm Type X fire-resistant.
B. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A-D plywood, or
medium density fiberboard; 19 mm thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke
developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Anchors:
• Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for
high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel
elsewhere.
• Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length
three times thickness of sheathing.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 06 10 00
Amazon – Wood, Plastics, and Composites.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

• Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry.

2.5 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT

A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use
Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected
service conditions, and specific applications.
• Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp
indicating compliance with specified requirements.
• Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped
by an ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in
accordance with AWPA standards.
B. Fire Retardant Treatment:
• Interior Type A: AWPA U1, Use Category UCFA, Commodity Specification H,
low temperature (low hygroscopic) type, chemically treated and pressure
impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread rating of 25 when
tested in accordance with ASTM E84, with no evidence of significant
combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes.
• Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for
lumber and 15 percent for plywood.
• Treat rough carpentry items as indicated.
• Do not use treated wood in applications exposed to weather or where the wood
may become wet.
C. Preservative Treatment:
• Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use
Category UC3B, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative to
4.0 kg/cu m retention.
• Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
• Preservative Pressure Treatment of Plywood Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use
Category UC2 and UC3B, Commodity Specification F using waterborne
preservative to 4.0 kg/cu m retention.
• Kiln dry plywood after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections.
3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Select material sizes to minimize waste.
B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as
accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking.
C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and
immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants.
3.3 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support
finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 06 10 00
Amazon – Wood, Plastics, and Composites.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

B. In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fire blocking as
required by applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors
and between top story and roof/attic space; other material acceptable to code
authorities may be used in lieu of solid wood blocking.
C. In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window
openings for anchorage of frames, securely attached to stud framing.
D. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-
mounted items, unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or
other method of support is explicitly indicated.
E. Specifically, provide the following non-structural framing and blocking:
• Cabinets and shelf support.
• Wall brackets.
• Handrails.
• Grab bars.
• Towel and bath accessories.
• Wall-mounted door stops.
• Chalkboards and marker boards.
• Wall paneling and trim.
• Joints of rigid wall coverings that occur between studs.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS

A. Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with
ends over firm bearing and staggered, using nails, screws, or staples.
B. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to
studs with edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 610 mm on center
on all edges and into studs in field of board.
• At fire-rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire-rated
assembly.
• Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long
edge of board parallel to studs.
• Install adjacent boards without gaps.
• Size and Location: As indicated on drawings.

3.5 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT

A Apply preservative treatment compatible with factory applied treatment at site-sawn
cuts, complying with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members.

3.6 TOLERANCES
A. Framing Members: 6 mm from true position, maximum.
B. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 2 mm/m maximum, and 7 mm in 10 m maximum.

3.7 CLEANING
A. Waste Disposal:
• Comply with applicable regulations.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 06 10 00
Amazon – Wood, Plastics, and Composites.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

• Do not burn scrap on project site.

• Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated.
• Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-
generation facilities or "waste-to-energy" facilities.
B. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill.
C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.

END OF SECTION 06 10 00

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 06 10 00
Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 06 42 16: WOOD VENEER PANELING

Prepared By

Year 2022
Rev. 00
Amazon – Wood Veneer Paneling.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTION: 06 42 16

WOOD VENEER PANELING

PART1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Custom wood veneer paneling.
B. Solid wood panel trim.
C. Shop finishing.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Grounds and concealed blocking.
B. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Site finishing of wood veneer faced paneling.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials;
2012.
B. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009.
C. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; 2010.
D. HPVA HP-1 -American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood;
Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; 2004 (ANSI/HPVA HP-1}.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on fire retardant treatment materials and application
instructions.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing
details, and accessories.
• Minimum Scale of Detail Drawings: 1:8.
• Include plan of panel number sequencing.
• Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork
Standards.
• Include certification program label.
D. Samples: Submit two samples of finished plywood, 600 x 600 mm in size,
illustrating wood grain and specified finish.
E. Samples: Submit two samples of wood trim, 1000 mm long.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products
specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 06 42 16
Amazon – Wood Veneer Paneling.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

2 Company with at least one project in the past 5 years with value of woodwork
within 20 percent of cost of woodwork for this Project.
3 Accredited participant in the specified certification program prior to the
commencement of fabrication and throughout the duration of the project.
4 Single Source Responsibility: Provide and install this work from single fabricator.

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to applicable code for fire retardant requirements.

1.7 MOCK-UP
A. Construct mock-up, illustrating full panel sheet, edge trim, joint trim, applied finish.
B. Locate where directed.
C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect work from moisture damage.
B. Do not deliver wood materials to project site until building is fully enclosed
and interior temperature and humidity are in accordance with recommendations
of AWl/! [Link] Architectural Woodwork Standards.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PANELING
1.) Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by
AWI//AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for Premium Grade.
2.) Stile and Rail Paneling:
• Species: Red oak unless noted otherwise.
• Panel Veneer Cut: Plain sliced unless noted otherwise.
• Stiles and Rails: 19 mm.
• Joints: Fastened with dowels or biscuits.
• Panels: Flat.
• Finish: Transparent, shop finished.
3.) Flat Paneling:
• Species: Red oak unless noted otherwise.
• Cut: Plain sliced unless noted otherwise.
• Panels: Veneer of full width and balanced sequence matched.
• Panels more than one leaf high: Architectural end matching.
• All panels in an single area: Full width premanufactured sets and doors and other
components.
• Visible Edges and Reveals: Filled and painted.
• Outside Corners: Mitered and splined.
• Blueprint Match: Where indicated.
• Grade: Premium.
• Provide casework, paneling, doors and wood trim by same manufacturer.
• Obtain veneer from the same flitch as selected by Architect.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 06 42 16
Amazon – Wood Veneer Paneling.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

• Faces at Cabinet Doors, Drawer Fronts, and False Fronts: Sequence matched, to
run and match vertically, and be sequence matched with adjacent wall paneling and
doors or both.
• Faces at Exposed Ends of Cabinets: Select veneer from same flitch and matching
adjacent paneling and cabinet fronts.
• Factory finish components including casework, paneling, doors, and trim at the
same time in the same facility.

2.2 WOOD-BASED MATERIALS - GENERAL

1.) Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1 Grade A; veneer core, type of glue
recommended for application; of grain quality suitable for transparent finish.
2.) Particleboard: Complying with ANSI A208.1; composed of wood chips, medium
density, made with waterproof resin binders; of grade to suit application; sanded
faces.
3.) Lumber: Maximum moisture content of 6 percent; with vertical grain, of quality
suitable for transparent finish.

2.3 ADHESIVES AND FASTENERS

1.) Adhesives: Type suitable for intended purpose, complying with applicable air quality
regulations.
2.) Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application.

2.4 ACCESSORIES
1.) Lumber for Shimming, Blocking: Softwood lumber of Douglas fir species.
2.) Primer: Alkyd primer sealer type.
3.) Wood Filler: Tinted to match surface finish color.

2.5 WOOD TREATMENT PROCESSES

1.) Fire Retardant Treatment (FR-S Type) for Lumber: Chemically treated and
pressure impregnated; capable of providing flame spread index of 25,
maximum, and smoke developed index of 450, maximum, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E84.
2.) Wood Preservative by Pressure Treatment (PT Type): AWPA U1 using
Water borne preservative to 4.0 kg/cum retention.
3.) Wood Preservative (Surface Application): O; type as suitable for the application.

2.6 SHOP TREATMENT OF WOOD MATERIALS

A. Shop pressure treat wood materials requiring UL fire rating to concealed wood
blocking.
B. Provide UL approved identification on fire retardant treated material.
C. Deliver fire retardant treated materials cut to required sizes. Minimize field cutting.

2.7 FABRICATION

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 06 42 16
Amazon – Wood Veneer Paneling.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

A. Shop prepare and identify panels for grain matching during site erection.
B. Prepare panels for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings.
C. Finish exposed edges of panels as specified by grade requirements.
D. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for
cutting and scribing.

2.8 SHOP FINISHING

1.) Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.
2.) Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations.
3.) On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler that matches surrounding
surfaces and is of type recommended for the applicable finish.
4.) Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork
Standards, Section 5
- Finishing for Grade specified and as follows:
• Transparent:
• System - 1, Lacquer, Nitrocellulose.
• Stain: As selected by Architect.
• Sheen: Flat.
• Opaque:
• System - 1, Lacquer, Nitrocellulose.
• Color: As selected by Architect.
• Sheen: Flat.
5.) Prime paint surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials.
6.) Back prime woodwork items to be field finished, prior to installation.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
C. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are
placed and ready to receive this work.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural
Woodwork Standards requirements for grade indicated.
B. Do not begin installation until wood materials have been fully acclimated to
interior conditions.
C. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level, using
concealed fasteners wherever possible.
D. Where necessary to cut and fit on site, scribe work abutting other
components. Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal gaps.
E. Coordinate the installation of firestopping behind paneling.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 06 42 16
Amazon – Wood Veneer Paneling.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

F. Set exposed fasteners, fill with wood filler, and finish to match panel finish.
G. Touch up damaged finish to match original, using materials provided by
fabricator; replace components that cannot be refinished like new.

3.3 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT

A. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Brush, apply one coats of preservative treatment on wood in contact with
cementitious materials. Treat site-sawn cuts.
C. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting paneling.

3.4 PREPARATION FOR FIELD FINISHING

A. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand
work smooth.
B. Site Finishing: Refer to Section 09 90 00.

3.5 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1.5 mm.
B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 0.7 mm.

END OF SECTION 06 42 16

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 06 42 16
Amazon – TOC – Thermal and Moisture Protection.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

TABLE OF CONTENTS

ARCHITECTURAL WORKS

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

Section No.
Descriptions

07 11 13 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
07 13 00 SHEET WATERPROOFING
07 16 13 POLYMER MODIFIED CEMENT WATERPROOFING
07 16 16 CRSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
07 18 00 TRAFFIC COATINGS
07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION
07 42 13 METAL WALL PANELS
07 81 23 INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING
07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING
07 90 05 JOINT SEALERS
07 95 13 EXPENTION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |1 TOC
 Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 07 11 13: BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

Prepared By

Year 2022
Rev. 00
Amazon – Bituminous dampproofing.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTION: 07 11 13

BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
PART1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Bituminous damp proofing.
B. Protection boards.
C. Drainage panels.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 31 23 23 - Fill.
B. Section 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation: Rigid insulation board used as protection
board.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM D449 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Damp proofing and
Waterproofing; 2003 (Reapproved 2008).
B. ASTM D1187/D1187M - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Base
Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal; 1997 (Reapproved
2011).
C. ASTM D1227 - Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Used as a
Protective Coating for Roofing; 1995 (Reapproved 2007}.
D. NRCA ML104 - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing; National
Roofing Contractors Association; Fifth Edition, with interim updates.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
E. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
F. Product Data: Provide properties of primer, bitumen, and mastics.
G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and
perimeter conditions requiring special attention.

1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS

H. Maintain ambient temperatures above 5 degrees C for 24 hours before and
during application until damp proofing has cured.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 07 11 13
Amazon – Bituminous dampproofing.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 DAMPPROOFING PRODUCTS

A. Bituminous Damp proofing: Cold-applied water-based emulsion; asphalt with
mineral colloid or chemical emulsifying agent; with or without fiber
reinforcement; asbestos-free; suitable for application on vertical and horizontal
surfaces.
• Composition -Vertical Application: ASTM D1227 Type Ill or ASTM D1187
Type I.
• Composition - Horizontal and Low-Slope Application: ASTM D1227 Type II
or Ill.
• VOC Content: Not more than permitted by local, State, and federal
regulations.
• Applied Thickness: 1.5 mm, minimum, wet film.
B. Primers, Mastics, and Related Materials: Type as recommended by
damp proofing manufacturer.

2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Drainage Panel: 6 mm thick formed plastic, hollowed sandwich.
B. Protection Board: 3 mm thick biodegradable hardboard.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
1.) Verify existing conditions before starting work.
2.) Verify substrate surfaces are durable, free of matter detrimental to adhesion or
application of damp proofing system.
3.) Verify that items that penetrate surfaces to receive damp proofing are securely installed.

3.2 PREPARATION
4.) Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive damp proofing.
5.) Clean and prepare surfaces to receive damp proofing in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
6.) Do not apply damp proofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer.
7.) Apply mastic to seal penetrations, small cracks, or minor honeycomb in substrate.

3.3 APPLICATION
8.) Foundation Walls: Apply two coats of asphalt damp proofing.
9.) Perform work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.
10.) Prime surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
11.) Apply bitumen with mop.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 07 11 13
Amazon – Bituminous dampproofing.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

12.) Apply bitumen at a temperature limited by Damp proofing temperature (EVT) plus
or minus 14 C; do not exceed finish blowing temperature for four hours.
13.) Seal items projecting through damp proofing surface with mastic. Seal watertight.
14.) Immediately backfill against damp proofing to protect from damage.
15.) Place protection board directly over damp proofing, butt joints, and
adhere to tacky damp proofing.
16.) Scribe and cut boards around projections, penetrations, and interruptions.

END OF SECTION 07 11 13

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 07 11 13
Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 07 11 13: SHEET WATERPROOFING

Prepared By

Year 2022
Rev. 00
Amazon - Sheet waterproofing.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTION: 07 11 13

SHEET WATERPROOFING
PART1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Sheet membrane waterproofing.
B. Accessories.
C. Protection boards.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete substrate.
B. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Sealant for joints in substrates.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic
Elastomers­ Tension; 2006a.
B. ASTM D570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics; 1998
(Reapproved 2010).
C. ASTM D624 - Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional
Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers; 2000 (Reapproved 2012).
D. ASTM D746 - Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and
Elastomers by Impact; 2007.
E. ASTM D1876 - Standard Test Method for Peel Resistance of Adhesives (T-Peel
Test); 2008,
F. ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property--Durometer Hardness;
2005 (Reapproved 2010).
G. ASTM D4551 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
Flexible Concealed Water-Containment Membrane; 1996 (Reapproved 2008).
H. ASTM D5295 - Standard Guide for Preparation of Concrete Surfaces for Adhered
(Bonded) Membrane Waterproofing Systems; 2000 (Reapproved 2006).
I. ASTM D6506 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Based Protection for Below-
Grade Waterproofing; 2001 (Reapproved 2009).
J. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of
Materials; 2010.
K. ASTM E154 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact
with Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover; 2008a.
L. NRCA ML104 - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National
Roofing Contractors Association; Fifth Edition, with interim updates.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 07 13 00
Amazon - Sheet waterproofing.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

1.4 SUBMITTAL$

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data for membrane.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate special joint or termination conditions and conditions of
interface with other materials.
D. Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.
F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed
in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing
Manual for sheet waterproofing system.
B. Membrane Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in
waterproofing sheet membranes with five years’ experience.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of
this section with minimum 10 years’ experience.

1.6 MOCK-UP
A. Construct mockup 10 sq m of horizontal waterproofed panel; to represent
finished work including internal and external corners.
B. Locate where directed.
C. Mockup may remain as part of the Work.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

Maintain ambient temperatures above 5 degrees C for 24 hours before and
during application and until liquid or mastic accessories have cured.

1.8 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Contractor shall correct defective Work within a five-year period after Date of
Substantial Completion; remove and replace materials concealing waterproofing at
no extra cost to Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WATERPROOFING APPLICATIONS
A. PVC Membrane Waterproofing: Use at below grade areas.
• Vertical Surfaces: Adhesive bonded to substrate.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 07 13 00
Amazon - Sheet waterproofing.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

• Horizontal Surfaces: Adhesive bonded to substrate.

B. Modified Bituminous Membrane Waterproofing: Use at below grade areas.
• Vertical Surfaces: Mechanically attached.
• Horizontal Surfaces: Torch applied to substrate.
• Cover with protection board.

2.2 MEMBRANE MATERIALS

A. Plastic Membrane: PVC conforming to ASTM D 4551.
• Formulated for seaming by solvent welding.
• Thickness: 2.4 mm, minimum.
• Sheet Width: (Manufacturer's standard selected by Architect) mm, mime.
• Tensile Strength: 11 MPa, measured in accordance with ASTM 0 412.
• Ultimate Elongation: 250 percent, machine direction in accordance with ASTM
D412.
• Tear Strength: 102 N, measured in accordance with ASTM 0 624.
• Water Absorption: 2 percent percent increase in weight, maximum,
measured in accordance with ASTM D570, 24-hour immersion.
B. Modified Bituminous Membrane: Asphalt and polymer modifiers of bitumen
type, reinforced with non-woven polyester; smooth surfaced.
• Formulated for seaming by heat welding.
• Thickness: 4 mm.
• Sheet Width: (Manufacturer's standard selected by Architect. mm.
• Tensile Strength: N/50mm MPa, measured in accordance with ASTM 0412.
• Ultimate Elongation: more than 40 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM
D412.
• Brittleness Temperature: 120 degrees C, measured in accordance with ASTM
0746.

2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Sealant for Substrate Surfaces: Type as specified in Section 07 90 05.
B. Protection Board: Rigid insulation specified in Section 07 21 00.
C. Protection Board: Type capable of preventing damage to waterproofing due to
backfilling and construction traffic.
• Use one of the following:
• Hardboard, 3 mm thick.
• Polystyrene foam board, 25 mm thick.
D. Drainage Panel: Drainage layer with geotextile filter fabric on earth side.
• Composition: Dimpled polystyrene core; polypropylene filter fabric.
• Products:
• Mar-flex Waterproofing & Building Products; Geo-Mat Plus: [Link]. Or
equal.
• Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
E. Flexible Flashings: Type recommended by membrane manufacturer.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 07 13 00
Amazon - Sheet waterproofing.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
1.) Verify existing conditions before starting work.
2.) Verify substrate surfaces are durable; free of matter detrimental to adhesion or
application of waterproofing system.
3.) Verify that items that penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely installed.
3.2 PREPARATION
4.) Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive waterproofing.
5.) Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. Vacuum substrate clean.
6.) Do not apply waterproofing to surfaces unacceptable to membrane manufacturer.
7.) Seal cracks and joints with sealant using depth to width ratio as recommended by
sealant manufacturer.
8.) Surfaces for Adhesive Bonding: Apply surface conditioner at a rate of (As
recommended by manufacturer) Us m. Protect conditioner from rain or frost until dry.
9.) Concrete Surfaces for Adhesive Bonding: Prepare concrete substrate according to
ASTM D5295.
• Remove substances that inhibit adhesion including form release agents,
curing compounds admixtures, laitance, moisture, dust, dirt, grease and
oil.
• Repair surface defects including honeycombs, fins, tie holes, bug holes, sharp
offsets, rutted cracks, ragged corners, deviations in surface plane, spalling and
delamination, as described in the reference standard.
• Remove and replace areas of defective concrete as specified in Section 03 30 00.
• Prepare concrete for adhesive bonded waterproofing using mechanical or
chemical methods described in the referenced standard.
• Test concrete surfaces as described in the referenced standards. Verify surfaces
are ready to receive adhesive bonded waterproofing membrane system.

3.3 INSTALLATION - MEMBRANE

A. Install membrane waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Roll out membrane. Minimize wrinkles and bubbles.
B. Torch Applied Membrane: Apply membrane by torch application, coated side down.
C. Mechanically Fastened Membrane: Install mechanical fasteners in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. Bond sheet to membrane discs.
D. Overlap edges and ends and seal by method recommended by manufacturer, minimum
75 mm. Seal permanently waterproof. Apply uniform bead of sealant to joint edge.
E. Reinforce membrane with multiple thickness of membrane material over joints, whether
joints are static or dynamic.
F. Weather lap joints on sloped substrate in direction of drainage. Seal joints and seams.
G. Install flexible flashings. Seal items penetrating through membrane with flexible
flashings. Seal watertight to membrane.
H. Seal membrane and flashings to adjoining surfaces. Install termination bar at all edges.
Install counterflashing over all exposed edges.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 07 13 00
Amazon - Sheet waterproofing.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

3.4 INSTALLATION - DRAINAGE PANEL AND PROTECTION BOARD

1.) Place drainage panel directly against membrane,butt joints, place to encourage
drainage downward. Scribe and cut boards around projections, penetrations,
and interruptions.
2.) Place protection board directly against drainage panel; butt joints. Scribe and
cut boards around projections, penetrations, and interruptions.
3.) Adhere protection board to substrate with compatible adhesive.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

1.) Owner will provide inspection services in accordance with Section 01 40 00 - Quality
Requirements. Contractor shall provide temporary construction and materials for
testing.
2.) On completion of horizontal membrane installation, dam installation area in
preparation for flood testing.
3.) Flood to minimum depth of 25 mm with clean water. After 48 hours, inspect for leaks.
4.) If leaking is found, remove water, repair leaking areas with new waterproofing
materials as directed by Architect; repeat flood test. Repair damage to building.
5.) When area is proven watertight, drain water and remove dam.

3.6 PROTECTION
6.) Do not permit traffic over unprotected or uncovered membrane.

END OF SECTION 07 13 00

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 07 13 00
Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 07 16 13: POLYMER MODIFIED

CEMENT WATERPROOFING

Prepared By

Year 2022
Rev. 00
Amazon – Polymer modified cement waterproofing.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTION: 07 11 13

POLYMER MODIFIED CEMENT WATERPROOFING

PART1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

Polymer modified cement waterproofing.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete to be waterproofed.
B. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Masonry to be waterproofed.
C. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Sealing of moving joints in waterproofed surfaces.
D. Section 09 24 00 - Portland Cement Plastering: Plaster to be installed over
waterproofing.
E. Section 09 30 00 - Tiling: Mortar setting bed to be installed over waterproofing.
F. Section 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping: Sleeves and seals for piping that penetrates
below-grade walls and foundations.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM C109/C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic
Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or (50-mm) Cube Specimens}; 2011b.
B. ASTM C666/C666M - Standard Test Method for Resistance of Concrete to Rapid
Freezing and Thawing; 2003 (Reapproved 2008).
C. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and
Thermoplastic Elastomers--Tension; 2006a.
D. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of
Materials; 2010.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
4. Details of joints and intersections.
C. Test Reports: Where testing is explicitly called for, submit reports showing tests
to pressure equal to or higher than that specified, with satisfactory lack of leakage.
D. Certification: For potable water contact, submit evidence of current NSF certification.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 07 16 13
Amazon – Polymer modified cement waterproofing.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

A Deliver product to project site in manufacturer's original packaging,

marked with manufacturer's product identification.
B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
C. Keep stored products dry; store under cover and elevated above grade.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS

A Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommende
not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Polymer-Modified Cement Waterproofing for Under Cementitious Mortar:
Manufactured slurry coating of Portland or hydraulic cement, aggregates, polymer
admixtures, and water; no solvents; for application directly to cementitious
substrate, with re-coat time of less than 24 hours.
1. Explicitly recommended by manufacturer as waterproofing, not simply as damp
proofing.
2. Provide finished product capable of bridging cracks up to 1 mm in width without
failure.
3. Water Vapor Transmission: MINIMUM permeance of finished coating of 150
ng/Pa s m"2, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.
4. Freeze-Thaw Durability: No change when tested in accordance with ASTM
C666 for 300 cycles.
5. Compressive Strength: 34 MPa, minimum, at 28 days, when tested in
accordance with ASTM C109/C109M.
6. Finished Coating Thickness: As recommended by manufacturer for the
specific application but not less than 1.6 mm.
B. Polymer-Modified Cement Waterproofing for Potable Water Contact:
Manufactured slurry coating of Portland or hydraulic cement, aggregates, polymer
admixtures, and water; no solvents; NSF International certification for potable water
contact; for application directly to cementitious substrate.
1. Explicitly recommended by manufacturer as waterproofing, not simply as damp
proofing.
2. Requiring green concrete cure time of not more than 28 days.
3. Elongation at Failure: 20 percent, minimum, when tested in accordance with
ASTM 0 412.
4. Water Vapor Transmission: MINIMUM permeance of finished coating of 150
ng/Pa s m"2, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.
5. Freeze-Thaw Durability: No change when tested in accordance with ASTM
C666 for 300 cycles.
6. Compressive Strength: 34 MPa, minimum, at 28 days, when tested in
accordance with ASTM C109/C109M.
7. Finished Coating Thickness: As recommended by manufacturer but not less than
1.6 mm.
C. Polymer-Modified Cement Waterproofing for Negative Side Hydrostatic Pressure:
Manufactured slurry coating of Portland or hydraulic cement, aggregates, polymer

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 07 16 13
Amazon – Polymer modified cement waterproofing.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

admixtures, and water; no solvents; for application directly to concrete substrate.

1. Explicitly recommended by manufacturer as waterproofing, not simply as damp
proofing.
2. Explicitly approved and tested by manufacturer for negative side
application under hydrostatic pressure of at least 30 kPa.
3. Requiring green concrete cure time of not more than 28 days.
4. Elongation at Failure: 20 percent, minimum, when tested in accordance with
ASTM 0412.
5. Crack Bridging Capability: Able to bridge new cracks of up to 0.5 mm,
unreinforced.
6. Water Vapor Transmission: MINIMUM permeance of finished coating of 50
ng/Pa s m"2, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.
7. Freeze-Thaw Durability: No change when tested in accordance with ASTM
C666 for 300 cycles.
8. Compressive Strength: 34 MPa, minimum, at 28 days, when tested in accordance
with
ASTM C109/C109M .
9. Finished Coating Thickness: As recommended by manufacturer for the
specific application but not less than 1.6 mm.
D. Polymer-Modified Cement Waterproofing for Positive Side Hydrostatic Pressure:
Manufactured slurry coating of Portland or hydraulic cement, aggregates, polymer
admixtures, and water; no solvents; for application directly to cementitious
substrate.
0. Explicitly recommended by manufacturer as waterproofing, not simply as damp
proofing.
1. Explicitly approved and tested by manufacturer for positive side
application under hydrostatic pressure of at least 30 kPa.
2. Suitable for use below grade.
3. Requiring green concrete cure time of not more than 28 days.
4. Elongation at Failure: 20 percent, minimum, when tested in accordance with
ASTM D412.
5. Crack Bridging Capability: Able to bridge new cracks of up to 0.5 mm,
unreinforced.
6. Water Vapor Transmission: MINIMUM permeance of finished coating of
50 ng/Pa s m"2, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.
7. Freeze-Thaw Durability: No change when tested in accordance with ASTM
C666 for 300 cycles.
8. Compressive Strength: 34 MPa, minimum, at 28 days, when tested in
accordance with
ASTM C109/C109M.
9. Finished Coating Thickness: As recommended by manufacturer for
the specific application but not less than 1.6 mm.
E. Polymer-Modified Cement Waterproofing for Traffic Surfaces: Manufactured
slurry coating of Portland or hydraulic cement, aggregates, polymer admixtures
, and water; no solvents; for application directly to cementitious substrate.
1. Explicitly recommended by manufacturer as waterproofing, not simply as
darn proofing.
2. Explicitly approved by manufacturer for light pedestrian traffic.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 07 16 13
Amazon – Polymer modified cement waterproofing.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

3. Requiring green concrete cure time of not more than 28 days.

4. Elongation at Failure: 20 percent, minimum, when tested in accordance with
ASTM D412.
5. Water Vapor Transmission: MINIMUM permeance of finished coating of
50 ng/Pa s m" 2, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.
6. Freeze-Thaw Durability: No change when tested in accordance with ASTM
C666 for 300 cycles.
7. Compressive Strength: 34 MPa, minimum, at 28 days, when tested in
accordance with ASTM C109/C109M.
8. Finished Coating Thickness: As recommended by manufacturer for
the specific application but not less than 1.6 mm.
F. Polymer-Modified Cement Waterproofing for Surfaces Exposed to View and
Surfaces Concealed but Not Subject to Hydrostatic Pressure: Manufactured
slurry coating of Portland or hydraulic cement, aggregates, polymer admixtures,
and water; no solvents; for application directly to cementitious substrate.
1. Explicitly recommended by manufacturer as waterproofing, not simply as
damp proofing.
2. Approved by manufacturer for use below grade.
3. Requiring green concrete cure time of not more than 28 days.
4. Elongation at Failure: 20 percent, minimum, when tested in accordance with
ASTM D412.
5. Water Vapor Transmission: MINIMUM permeance of finished coating of
50 ng/Pa s m"2, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.
6. Freeze-Thaw Durability: No change when tested in accordance with ASTM
C666 for 300 cycles.
7. Compressive Strength: 34 MPa, minimum, at 28 days, when tested in
accordance with ASTM C109/C109M.
8. Finished Coating Thickness: As recommended by manufacturer for
the specific application but not less than 1.6 mm.
G. Crack Repair Material, Joint Tape, and Reinforcing: Type and application as
recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
H. Water: Clean, clear, non-alkaline potable water , free of salts and other harmful
elements.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces where waterproofing is to be applied for conditions
detrimental to satisfactory performance.
B. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect
of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove defective concrete and rebuild to original profiles.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 07 16 13
Amazon – Polymer modified cement waterproofing.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

B. Plug active leaks according to waterproofing manufacturer's instructions.

C. Patch holes and non-moving cracks and joints.
D. Clean and prepare surfaces thoroughly prior to installation; schedule cleaning
and preparation so that residue will not fall on newly coated, uncured surfaces.
E. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for
achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. Use
sandblasting, water blasting, or acid etching as recommended.
F. Application of waterproofing constitutes acceptance of substrates.
G. Protect other work from fallout, overspray, and spatter from waterproofing
application; provide temporary enclosures and covers as necessary to do so.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
B. Perform installation only during ambient and substrate conditions
recommended by manufacturer; provide temporary enclosures and/or
temporary heating as necessary to do so.
C. Fill voids and holes prior to application of first coat.
D. Apply the number of coats and at the rates recommended by manufacturer for
the specific application but not less than specified minimum thickness; apply at
least two coats unless one coat is specifically indicated.
E. At surfaces exposed to view, apply a uniformly textured finish without
major variations in appearance.
F. Extend waterproofing to all surfaces in areas indicated to form continuous
waterproofed surfaces.
1. At horizontal surfaces, extend waterproofing down and into pits, sumps,
trenches, and similar features and up and onto curbs, bases, stair risers,
and similar features.
2. At floors where walls are not treated, extend waterproofing a minimum of
300 mm up walls and columns.
3. At vertical surfaces, extend waterproofing into and over integral columns,
pilasters, pipe chases, and similar features.
4. At intersecting masonry walls, extend waterproofing onto untreated walls a
minimum of
1220 mm.
5. At intersecting concrete walls, extend waterproofing onto untreated walls
a minimum of 610 mm.
6. At floor and roof drains, extend waterproofing into drain clamp flange.
G. Cure waterproofing by recommended methods for recommended period prior to
making waterproofed area available for use or occupancy; protect from too rapid
drying, severe weather exposure, and water accumulation.
1. . Hot, Dry Weather: Use wet-cure methods regardless of manufacturer's
instructions.
1. Do not use covers that could stain waterproofing surfaces.
2. Do not use chemical curing agents unless explicitly approved by

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 07 16 13
Amazon – Polymer modified cement waterproofing.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

waterproofing manufacturer.
3. Do not expose waterproofing to sunlight for minimum of 72 hours after placement.
B. Do not backfill, fill water or liquid holding structures, or apply finish coatings until
time period recommended by manufacturer has passed.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL - WATER HOLDING STRUCTURES

A. Flood test waterproofing application by filling to capacity and allowing to stand for not
less than 24 hours.
B. If any leaks appear, notify Architect and drain.
1. Repair leaks at no additional cost to Owner.
2. Repeat flood test until all leakage is eliminated.

3.03 PROTECTION
A Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 07 16 13

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 07 16 13
 Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 07 16 16: CRSTALLINE WATERPROOFING

Prepared By

Year 2022

Rev. 00
Amazon – Crystalline waterproofing.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTION: 07 11 16

CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
PART1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Crystalline waterproofing.
B. Preparation of surfaces to be waterproofed, including plugging active water leaks.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

C. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete work to be waterproofed.
D. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Concrete masonry work to be waterproofed.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A COE CRD-C 48 - Standard Test Method for Water Permeability of Concrete; 1992.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
B. Test data showing hydraulic permeability.
C. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
D. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
E. Installation methods.
F. Details for waterproofing at joints, intersections, and other special conditions.
B. Specimen warranty.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture of products
of the type specified and providing technical representatives to visit project site.
B. Installer Qualifications: Acceptable to manufacturer, with documented experience
on at least 5 projects of similar nature within the last 5 years.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Take necessary precautions to keep cementitious materials dry.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation)
within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not
install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's
absolute limits.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 07 16 16
Amazon – Crystalline waterproofing.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

1.8 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Provide installer's warranty agreeing to correct leaking waterproofing for 2 years
from the Date of Substantial Completion, unless leakage is caused by structural
failure, movement of the structure, or other causes beyond the installer's control.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Waterproofing for building surfaces:
• Inside of elevator pits.
• Inside of footings and foundation walls.
• Surfaces indicated on drawings.
B. Waterproofing for water holding structures:
• Inside of swimming pools.
• Inside of potable water storage tank(s).
• Inside of waste water tank(s) and flumes.
• Surfaces indicated on drawings.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Crystalline Waterproofing: Portland cement and chemical compound that when
applied to the surface of concrete forms insoluble crystals in the capillary pores
preventing the passage of liquids, while having no adverse effect on the normal
properties of concrete.
• Hydraulic Permeability: No measurable leakage or water flow at 1.38 MPa
pressure when tested in accordance with COE CRD-C 48, using minimum 50
mm thick sample and 20 days duration.
• Toxicity: Non-toxic.
• NSF-approved for use with potable water.
• USDA-approved for use in food plants.
• Color: Gray.
B. Plugging Compound: Cementitious compound meeting requirements specified for
waterproofing, with additional characteristic of rapid set under water, recommended or
approved by waterproofing manufacturer.
C. Patching Compound: Ready-mixed cementitious mortar recommended or
approved by waterproofing manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
1.) Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
2.) If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION
1.) Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 07 16 16
Amazon – Crystalline waterproofing.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

2.) Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving
the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. Use sand blasting,
water blasting, or acid etching as recommended.
3.) Plug water leaks.
4.) Patch holes, construction joints, and cracks. Remove defective concrete.
5.) Obtain approval of manufacturer's field representative before beginning installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION
1.) Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Maintain environmental
conditions required and recommended by manufacturer. Keep a copy of manufacturer's
instructions on site.
2.) Coordinate installation with installation of products that must penetrate waterproofed
surfaces.
3.) Prevent excessive drying of surface.
• Cure waterproofing for at least 3 days, or length of time required by
manufacturer, with water spray and adequate air circulation.
• Do not use chemical curing agents unless explicitly approved by
waterproofing manufacturer.
4.) Do not backfill, fill water or liquid holding structures, or apply finish coatings
until time period recommended by manufacturer has passed.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

1.) Flood test waterproofing application by filling water holding structures to capacity and
allowing to stand for not less than 24 hours.
2.) If any leaks appear, notify Architect and drain.
• Repair leaks at no additional cost to Owner.
• Repeat flood test until all leakage is eliminated.

3.5 PROTECTION
3.) Protect from damage by weather. Do not cover with impermeable (plastic) sheeting
unless air circulation is provided.
4.) Touch-up, repair or replace damaged waterproofing after Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 07 16 16

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 07 16 16
Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 07 18 00: TRAFFIC COATINGS

Prepared By

Year 2022
Rev. 00
Amazon – Traffic coatings.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTION: 07 18 00

TRAFFIC COATINGS
PART1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Coating for waterproofing and traffic surface
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic
Elastomers­ Tension; 2006a.
B. ASTM D903 - Standard Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive
Bonds; 1998 (Reapproved 2010).
C. ASTM D4060 - Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings
by the Taber Abraser; 2010.
D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; 2012.
E. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials;
2010.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Include product characteristics and limitations. Identify dissolving
solvents, fuels, and potential destructive compounds.
C. Samples: Submit two samples of cured membrane, 1200 X 1200 mm in size, illustrating
color, surface texture, and variations.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include special environmental conditions
required to install traffic membrane and potential incompatibilities with adjacent
materials.
E. Maintenance Data: Include procedures for stain removal, repairing surface, and cleaning.
F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been
completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of
the type specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented
experience.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Correct defective Work within a five-year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TRAFFIC COATINGS
A. Pedestrian Coating: Fluid-applied polyurethane with slip-reducing aggregate surface.
• Finished Coating Thickness: 1.3 mm, minimum.
B. Vehicular Coating: Fluid-applied polyurethane with slip-reducing aggregate surface.
• Finished Coating Thickness: 1.3 mm, minimum.

2.2 MATERIALS

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 07 16 16
Amazon – Traffic coatings.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

A. Membrane: Fluid applied polyurethane; waterproof; color as selected; conforming

to the following:
• Tensile Strength (ASTM 0412): 320 psi MPa.
• Moisture Vapor Permeability (ASTM E96/E96M): 2.0 perms ng/Pa/sec/sq m.
• Surface Burning Characteristics (ASTM E84): Class A Flame Spread Rating.
• Adhesive Bond Peel Strength (ASTM 0903): 100 % cohesion Kg/25 mm width
maximum.
• Tabar/Abrasion Resistance Index, 1000 cycles (ASTM D4060}: 0.57.
• Hardness, Shore A (ASTM 02240): 85-95
• Weathering Resistance (ASTM D822}: No effect.
B. Topping: Polyurethane compound, conforming to the following:
• Impact Resistance: Gardner Impact Tester, delamination.
C. Filler and Primer: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
• Sealant: type, as recommended by membrane manufacturer, and compatible
with system and adjacent materials

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
1.) Verify that substrate is ready to receive work, surface is clean, dry and free of
substances that could adversely affect bond.
2.) Do not begin work until concrete substrate has cured at least 28 days and moisture
content is 16 percent or less.
3.2 PREPARATION
A Clean substrate surface free of foreign matter.
B. Protect adjacent surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A Apply system materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Apply primer to prepared substrate to a dry film thickness recommended by
traffic coating manufacturer.
C. When primer is tack free, apply one base coat of membrane to a total
minimum dry film thickness recommended by traffic coating manufacturer.
D. When base coat is tack free, apply U of top coating to a minimum dry film
thickness recommended by coating manufacturer.
E. Extend primer, base and top coats up intersecting and perimeter vertical surfaces,
150 mm. Terminate top edge in a straight line.
F. Finish to smooth surface sloped to drains. Cove at vertical surfaces.
G. Apply surfacing to top coat before set.
H. Apply sealant to junction of horizontal and intersecting surfaces to achieve watertight
seal.
3.4 PROTECTION
1.) Do not permit traffic over unprotected surfaces.

END OF SECTION 07 18 00

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 07 16 16
Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 07 21 00: THERMAL INSULATION

Prepared By

Year 2022
Rev. 00
Amazon – Thermal insulation.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTION: 07 21 00

THERMAL INSULATION
PART1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Board insulation at underside of floor slabs.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal
Insulation; 2011be1.
B. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal
Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012.
C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials; 2012.
D. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006.
E. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.

1.3 SUBMITTAL$
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria,
and product limitations.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include information on special
environmental conditions required for installation and installation techniques.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are
detrimental to successful installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Insulation Under Concrete Slabs: Extruded polystyrene board.

2.2 FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C578, Type X; Extruded polystyrene
board with either natural skin or cut cell surfaces; with the following characteristics:
• Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
• Flame Spread Index: 75 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
• Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 07 21 00
Amazon – Thermal insulation.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

• Board Size: 1220 x 2440 mm.

• Board Thickness: 37.5 mm.
• Board Edges: Square.
• Thermal Conductivity (k factor) at -3.9 degrees C: 0.31.
• Compressive Resistance: 104 kPa.
• Board Density: 21 kg/cu m.
• Water Absorption, maximum: 0.3 percent, volume.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
1.) Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that
substrates are ready to receive insulation and adhesive.
2.) Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or
materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond.

3.2 BOARD INSTALLATION UNDER CONCRETE SLABS

1.) Place insulation under slabs on grade after base for slab has been compacted.
2.) Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.
3.) Prevent insulation from being displaced or damaged while placing vapor retarder
and placing slab.

3.3 PROTECTION
1.) Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment.

END OF SECTION 07 21 00

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 07 21 00
Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 07 42 13: METAL WALL PANELS

Prepared By

Year 2022
Rev. 00
Amazon – Metal wall panels.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTION: 07 42 13

METAL WALL PANELS

PART1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Manufactured metal panels for walls and soffits, with insulation, liners, related
flashings, and accessory components.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

B. Section 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

C. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet
and Plate; 2010.
D. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2010.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
E. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
F. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, layout, joints, construction details, methods
of anchorage.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

G. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the
products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented
experience.

1.6 MOCK-UP
H. Construct mock-up, 2000 m long by 1200 m wide; indude panel and soffit
system, glazing, attachments to building frame, associated vapor retarder and air
seal materials, weep drainage system, sealants and seals, related insulation in
mock-up.
I. Locate where directed.

1.7 WARRANTY
J. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
K. Correct defective work within a five year period after Substantial Completion
for degradation of panel finish, including color fading caused by exposure to
weather.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 07 42 13
Amazon – Metal wall panels.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED METAL PANELS

A. Wall Panel System: Factory fabricated prefinished metal panel system; site
assembled.
• Provide exterior panels, interior liner panels, soffit panels, and sub girt framing
assembly.
• Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by
positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall.
• Design Pressure: In accordance with applicable codes.
• Maximum Allowable Deflection of Panel: 1/90 of span.
• Movement: Accommodate movement within system without damage to
components or deterioration of seals, movement within system; movement
between system and perimeter components when subject to seasonal
temperature cycling; dynamic loading and release of loads; and deflection of
structural support framing .
• Drainage: Provide positive drainage to exterior for moisture entering or
condensation occurring within panel system.
• Fabrication: Formed true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from
distortion or defects; pieces of longest practical lengths.
• Comers: Factory-fabricated in one continuous piece with minimum 450 mm
returns.
• Exterior Finish: Panel manufacturer's standard polyvinylidene fluoride
(PVDF) coating, top coat over epoxy primer unless noted otherwise.
• Exterior Panel Back Coating: Panel manufacturer's standard polyester wash
coat.
• Interior Panel Finish: Panel manufacturer's standard polyester coating,
top coat over recommended primer.
B. Exterior Panels:
• Profile : Vertical ; style as indicated.
• Side Seams: Double-interlocked, tight-fitting, sealed with continuous
gaskets.
• Material: Precoated aluminum sheet, minimum 0.8 mm thick.
• Panel Width: (As indicated on the drawings) mm.
• Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard line.
C. Liner Panels:
• Profile: Vertical; style as indicated.
• Side Seams: Interlocking, sealed with continuous bead of sealant.
• Material: Precoated aluminum sheet, minimum 0.8 mm thick.
• Panel Width: (As indicated on the drawings) mm.
D. Soffit Panels:
• Profile: Style as indicated.
• Material: Precoated aluminum sheet, minimum 0.8 mm thick.
E. Sub girts

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 07 42 13
Amazon – Metal wall panels.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

F. formed aluminum sheet; thickness as indicated.

G. Internal and External Corners: Same material, thickness, and finish as exterior
sheets; refile
to suit system; shop cut and factory mitered to required angles. 0itered corners to be
braced
with precoated sheet stock to maintain continuity of profile; thickness as
indicated on the drawings.
H. Expansion Joints: Same material, thickness and finish as exterior sheets;
manufacturer's standard brake formed type, of profile to suit system; thickness
as indicated on the drawings.
I. Trim: Same material, thickness and finish as exterior sheets; brake formed to
required profiles.
J. Anchors: Galvanized steel.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Precoated Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), 3105 alloy, 0 temper,
smooth surface texture; continuous-coil-coated on exposed surfaces with specified
finish coating and on panel back with specified panel back coating.
B. Non-precoated Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), 3105 alloy, 0
temper, smooth surface, mill finish.
C. Insulation: Glass fiber type specified in Section 07 21 OD.
1. (As indicated on Drawings) mm thick.
2. Thermal resistance RSI of (As indicated on Drawings).

2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard type suitable for use with system,
permanently resilient; ultraviolet and ozone resistant.
B. Sealants: Manufacturer's standard type suitable for use with installation of
system; non-staining.
• Color: To be selected by Architect.
C. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard type to suit application; with soft neoprene
washers, steel, hot dip galvanized. Fastener cap same color as exterior panel.
D. Field Touch-up Paint: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
• Verify that building framing members are ready to receive panels.

3.2 PREPARATION

3.3 INSTALLATION
• Install panels on walls and soffits in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
• Protect surfaces in contact with cementitious materials and dissimilar metals with
bituminous paint. Allow to dry prior to installation.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 07 42 13
Amazon – Metal wall panels.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

• Fasten panels to structural supports; aligned, level, and plumb.

• Locate joints over supports. Lap panel ends minimum 50 mm.
• Provide expansion joints where indicated.
• Use concealed fasteners unless otherwise approved by Architect.
• Seal and place gaskets to prevent weather penetration. Maintain neat appearance.

3.4 TOLERANCES
• Maximum Offset from True Alignment Between Adjacent Members Butting or In Line:
1.6 mm.
• Maximum Variation from Plane or Location Indicated on Drawings: 6 mm.

3.5 CLEANING
• Remove site cuttings from finish surfaces.
• Clean and wash prefinished surfaces with mild soap and water; rinse with clean water.

END OF SECTION 07 42 13

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 07 42 13
 Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 07 81 23: INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING

Prepared By

Year 2022
Rev. 00
Amazon – Intumescent mastic fireproofing.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTION: 07 81 23

INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING

PART1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Thin-film intumescent fire-resistive coatings for exposed structural steel.
B. Protective and/or decorative topcoats.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing.
B. Section 07 81 00 - Applied Fireproofing: Conventional cementitious and
mineral fiber fireproofing.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM 02240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property -- Durometer
Hardness; 2005 (Reapproved 2010).
B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials; 2012.
C. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and
Materials; 2012.
D. SSPC-PA 2 - Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with Magnetic Gages; 2009.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Performance characteristics and test results.
2. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
4. Installation methods.
C. Test Reports: Published fire-resistive designs for structural elements of the types
required for the project, indicating hourly ratings of each assembly.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company that specializes in manufacturing the type
of products specified, with minimum of 10 years of documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Approved, certified, or supervised by manufacturer of
intumescent fireproofing, with not less than 5 years of documented experience.
C. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and
application workmanship. Approved mock-up will serve as a standard of
comparison for subsequent work of this section.
2.1 Finish at least 10 sq m of steel in areas designated by Architect.
2.2 Evaluate mock-up for compliance with specified requirements, including

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 07 81 23
Amazon – Intumescent mastic fireproofing.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

thickness and finish texture.

2.3 Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are
approved by Architect.
2.4 Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.
2.5 Approved mock-up may remain as part of the project.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened containers with identification
labels and testing agency markings intact and legible.
B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
1. Store at temperatures not less than 10 degrees C in dry, protected area.
2. Protect from freezing, and do not store in direct sunlight.
3. Dispose of any materials that have come into contact with contaminants of
any kind prior to application.
C. Dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based
materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having
jurisdiction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

1.) Fireproofing: Provide intumescent thin-film fire-resistive coating systems
tested by an independent testing agency in accordance with ASTM E119
and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 MATERIALS
1.) Fire-Resistive Coating System: Thin film intumescent coating system for
the fire protection of structural steel.
A. Surface Burning Characteristics, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84:
• Flame Spread Index: 25, maximum.
• Smoke Developed Index: 50, maximum.
B. For Interior Use:
• Use only water-based products.
• Hardness: 65, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM
D2240, Type D durometer.
C. For Exterior Use:
• Use only epoxy-based products.
• Hardness: 65, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM
D2240, Type D durometer.
2.) Protective and Decorative Top Coating: As recommended by fireproofing
manufacturer for exposure conditions.
A. Coordinate with paint specified in Section 09 90 00 for color and sheen
match between steel coated with intumescent coating and adjacent
painted surfaces.
3.) Sealers and Primer: As required by tested and listed assemblies, and as
recommended by fireproofing manufacturer to suit specific substrate
conditions.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 07 81 23
Amazon – Intumescent mastic fireproofing.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
• Examine substrates to determine if they are in satisfactory condition to
receive intumescent fireproofing. Verify that they are clean and free of oil,
grease, incompatible primers, or other foreign substances capable of
impairing bond to fireproofing system.
• Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. If
substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect
of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION
A Thoroughly clean surfaces to receive fireproofing.
B. Repair substrates to remove surface imperfections that could affect uniformity
of texture and thickness of fireproofing system. Remove minor projections and
fill voids that could telegraph through the finished work.
C. Cover or otherwise protect other work that might be damaged by fallout or
overspray of fireproofing system. Provide temporary enclosures as necessary
to confine operations and maintain required environmental conditions.

3.3 INSTALLATION
• Comply with manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions of installation in each
case.
• Apply manufacturer's recommended primer to required coating thickness.
• Apply fireproofing to full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be
protected. Apply coats at manufacturer's recommended rate to achieve dry film
thickness required for fire resistance ratings designated for each condition.
• Apply intumescent fireproofing by spraying to maximum extent possible. If
necessary, complete coverage by roller application or other method acceptable to
manufacturer.
• Achieve uniform finished appearance complying with approved mock-up.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

• Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 40 00.
• Arrange for testing of installed intumescent fireproofing by an
independent testing laboratory using magnetic thickness gage, in
accordance with SSPC-PA 2.
• Submit test reports promptly to Contractor and Architect.
• Repair or replace fireproofing at locations where test results indicate fireproofing
does not meet specified requirements.

3.5 CLEANING
• Immediately after installation of fireproofing in each area, remove overspray and

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 07 81 23
Amazon – Intumescent mastic fireproofing.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

fallout from other surfaces and clean soiled areas.

3.6 PROTECTION
• Protect installed intumescent fireproofing from damage due to subsequent
construction activities, so fireproofing is without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
• Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 07 81 23

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 07 81 23
Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 07 84 00: FIRESTOPPING

Prepared By

Year 2022
Rev. 00
Amazon – firestopping.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTION: 07 84 00

FIRESTOPPING
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Firestopping systems
B. Firestopping of all joints and penetrations in fire-resistance rated and smoke-
resistant assemblies, whether indicated on drawings or not. and other
openings indicated.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Cutting and patching.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and
Materials; 2012.
B. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops;
2011a.
C. ITS {DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current
edition.
D. FM 4991 - Approval of Firestop Contractors; Factory Mutual Research Corporation;
2001.
E. FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition.
F. UL (FRO) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.

1.4 SUBMITTAL$
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the penetrated
assembly, and firestopping test or design number.
C. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings, and
limitations.
D. Manufacturer is Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation
instructions.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the scheduled
fire ratings when tested in accordance with methods indicated.
1. Listing in the current-year classification or certification books of UL, FM, or
ITS (Warnock Hersey) will be considered as constituting an acceptable test
report.
2. Valid evaluation report published by ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.
(ICC-ES) at [Link] will be considered as constituting an

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 1|P a g e Section: 07 84 00
Amazon – firestopping.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

acceptable test report.

3. Submission of actual test reports is required for assemblies for which none of
the above substantiation exists.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and
conditions during and after installation. Maintain minimum temperature before,
during, and for 3 days after installation of materials.
B. Provide ventilation in areas where solvent-cured materials are being installed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRESTOPPING - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements.
B. Materials: Use any material meeting requirements.
C. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type
required for tested assembly design.
D. Fire Ratings: See Drawings for required systems and ratings.

2.2 FIRESTOPPING ASSEMBLY REQUIREMENTS

A. Perimeter Fire Containment Firestopping: Use any system that has been tested
according to ASTM E2307 to have fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire
rating of the floor assembly.
1. Movement: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show
movement capability as indicated.
2. Temperature Rise: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show
T Rating as indicated.
3. Air Leakage: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show L
Rating as indicated.
4. Where floor assembly is not required to have a fire rating, provide systems that
have been tested to show L Rating as indicated.
B. Head-of-Wall Firestopping at Joints Between Non-Rated Floor and Fire-Rated Wall:
Use any system that has been tested according to ASTM E2837 to have fire resistance
F Rating equal to required fire rating of floor or wall, whichever is greater.
1. Movement: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show
movement capability as indicated.
C. Floor-to-Floor, Wall-to-Wall, and Wall-to-Floor Joints, Except Perimeter, Where
Both Are Fire-Rated: Use any system that has been tested according to ASTM
E1966 or UL 2079 to have fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of
the assembly in which the joint occurs.
1. Movement: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show
movement capability as indicated.
2. Air Leakage: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show L
Rating as indicated.
3. Watertightness: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show W
Rating as indicated.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 2|P a g e Section: 07 84 00
Amazon – firestopping.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

4. Listing by UL, FM, or Intertek in their certification directory will be considered

evidence of successful testing.
D. Through Penetration Firestopping: Use any system that has been tested according
to ASTM E814 to have fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of
penetrated assembly.
1. Temperature Rise: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show
T Rating as indicated.
2. Air Leakage: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show L
Rating as indicated.
3. Watertightness: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show W
Rating as indicated.
4. Listing by UL, FM, or Intertek in their certification directory will be considered
evidence of successful testing.
2.3 FIRESTOPPING FOR FLOOR-TO-FLOOR, WALL-TO-FLOOR, AND WALL-TO-
WALL JOINTS
A. Concrete and Concrete Masonry Walls and Floors:
1. Floor to Floor Joints:
a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System FF-O-1013; Hilli CFS-SP WB
Firestop Joint Spray and CP 672.
2. Top of Wall Joints at Concrete/Concrete Masonry Wall to Concrete Over
Metal Deck Floor:
a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System HW-D-0181; Hilti CFS-SP WB
Firestop Joint Spray and CP 672.
b. 2 Hour Construction: UL System HW-D-1037; Hilti CFS-SP WB
Firestop Joint Spray and CP 672.
3. Top of Wall Joints at Concrete/Concrete Masonry Wall to Concrete floor:
a. 3 Hour Construction: UL System HW-D-1058; Hilti CFS-SP WB
Firestop Joint Spray and CP 672.
b. 2 Hour Construction: UL System HW-D-0268; Hilti CP 606 Flexible
Firestop Sealant.
4. Concrete/Concrete Masonry Wall to Wall Joints:
a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System WW-D-0017; Hilti CFS-SP WB
Firestop Joint Spray and CP 672.
b. 2 Hour Construction: UL System WW-D-0032; Hilti CP 606 Flexible
Firestop Sealant.
B. Gypsum Board Walls:
1. Wall to Wall Joints:
a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System WW-D-0067; Hilti CP 606 Flexible
Firestop Sealant.
b. 1 Hour Construction: UL System WW-D-0067; Hilti CP 606 Flexible
Firestop Sealant.
2. Top of Wall Joints at Underside of Steel Beam and Concrete Over Metal Deck
Floor with Sprayed on Fireproofing:
a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System HW-D-0259; Hilti CFS-SP WB
Firestop Joint Spray and CP 672.
b. 1 Hour Construction: UL System HW-D-0259; Hilti CFS-SP WB

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 3|P a g e Section: 07 84 00
Amazon – firestopping.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

Firestop Joint Spray and CP 672.

3. Top of Wall Joints at Underside of Flat Concrete:
a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System HW-D-1068; Hilti CFS-SP WB
Firestop Joint Spray and CP 672.
b. 1 Hour Construction: UL System HW-D-1068; Hilti CFS-SP WB
Firestop Joint Spray and CP 672.
4. Top of Wall Joints at Concrete Over Metal Deck, Wall Parallel to Ribs:
a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System HW-D-0049; Hi/ti CFS-SP WB
Firestop Joint Spray and CP 672.
b. 2 Hour Construction: UL System HW-D-0184; Hilti CP 606 Flexible
Firestop Sealant.
c. 1 Hour Construction: UL System HW-D-0049; Hilti CFS-SP WB
Firestop Joint Spray and CP 672.
d. 1 Hour Construction: UL System HW-D-0184; Hilti CP 606 Flexible
Firestop Sealant.

2.4 FIRESTOPPING PENETRATIONS THROUGH CONCRETE AND CONCRETE

MASONRY CONSTRUCTION
A. Blank Openings:
B. Penetrations Through Floors or Walls By:
1. Multiple Penetrations in Large Openings:
a. 3 Hour Construction: UL System C-AJ-1140; Hilti CP 637 Firestop
Mortar.
b. 3 Hour Construction: UL System C-AJ-811O; Hilti FS 657 Fire Block.
c. 2 Hour Construction: UL System C-AJ-8143; Hilti FS-ONE
intumescent Firestop Sealant.
2. Uninsulated Metallic Pipe, Conduit, and Tubing:
a. 3 Hour Construction: UL System C-AJ-1184; Hilti FS-ONE
intumescent Firestop Sealant.
b. 2 Hour Construction: UL System C-AJ-1421; Hilti FS-ONE
intumescent Firestop Sealant or CP 604 Self-Leveling Firestop Sealant.
3. Uninsulated Non-Metallic Pipe, Conduit, and Tubing:
a. 3 Hour Construction: UL System C-AJ-2109; Hilti CP 643N/644
Firestop Collar.
b. 2 Hour Construction: UL System C-AJ-2109; Hilti CP 643N/644
Firestop Collar.
4. Cable Trays with Electrical Cables:
a. 3 Hour Construction: UL System C-AJ-4035; Hilti FS-ONE
intumescent Firestop Sealant.
5. Electrical Busways:
a. 3Hour Construction: UL System C-AJ-6017; Hilti FS-ONE intumescent
Firestop Sealant.
6. Insulated Pipes:
a. 3 Hour Construction: UL System C-AJ-5090; Hilti FS-ONE
intumescent Firestop Sealant.
b. 2 Hour Construction: UL System C-AJ-5091; Hilti FS-ONE

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 4|P a g e Section: 07 84 00
Amazon – firestopping.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

intumescent Firestop
i. Sealant.
7. HVAC Ducts, Uninsulated:
a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System C-AJ-7084; Hilti FS-ONE
intumescent Firestop Sealant, CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant, CP
601S Elastomeric Firestop Sealant, or CP 604 Self-Leveling Firestop
Sealant.
C. Penetrations Through Floors By:
1. Multiple Penetrations in Large Openings:
a. 3 Hour Construction: UL System F-A-1023; Hilti CP 680-P/M Cast-In
Device.
b. 2 Hour Construction: UL System F-A-8012; Hilti CP 604 Self-Leveling
Firestop Sealant.
2. Uninsulated Metallic Pipe, Conduit, and Tubing:
a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System F-A-1016; Hilti CP 680-P/M Cast-In
Device.
3. Uninsulated Non-Metallic Pipe, Conduit, and Tubing:
D. Penetrations Through Walls By:
1. Uninsulated Metallic Pipe, Conduit, and Tubing:
a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System W-J-1067; Hilti FS-ONE intumescent
Firestop Sealant.
2. Electrical Cables Not in Conduit:
a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System W-J-3060; Hilti FS-ONE intumescent
Firestop Sealant, CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant, CD 601S
Elastomeric Firestop Sealant, or CP 618 Firestop Putty Stick.
3. Insulated Pipes:
a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System W-J-5041; Hilti FS-ONE intumescent
Firestop Sealant.
b. 1 Hour Construction: UL System W-J-5041; Hilti FS-ONE intumescent
Firestop Sealant.
4. HVAC Ducts, Uninsulated:
5. HVAC Ducts, Insulated:

2.5 FIRESTOPPING PENETRATIONS THROUGH GYPSUM BOARD WALLS

A. Blank Openings:
1. 2 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-3334; Hilti CP 653 Speed Sleeve.
2. 1 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-3334; Hilti CP 653 Speed Sleeve.
B. Penetrations By:
1. Multiple Penetrations in Large Openings:
a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-1389; Hilti FS-ONE intumescent
Firestop Sealant.
b. 2 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-1408; Hilti FS-ONE intumescent
Firestop Sealant.
c. 1 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-8071; Hilti FS-ONE intumescent

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 5|P a g e Section: 07 84 00
Amazon – firestopping.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

Firestop Sealant.
2. Uninsulated Metallic Pipe, Conduit, and Tubing:
a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-1054; Hilti FS-ONE intumescent
Firestop Sealant.
b. 1 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-1054; Hilti FS-ONE intumescent
Firestop Sealant.
3. Uninsulated Non-Metallic Pipe, Conduit, and Tubing:
a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-2078; Hilti CP 643N/644 Firestop
Collar.
b. 1 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-2078; Hilti CP 643N/644 Firestop
Collar.
4. Cable Trays with Electrical Cables:
a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-4011; Hilti FS 657 Fire Block.
b. 1 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-4011; Hilti FS 657 Fire Block.
5. Insulated Pipes:
a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-5028; Hilti FS-ONE intumescent
Firestop Sealant.
b. 1 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-5028; Hilti FS-ONE intumescent
Firestop Sealant.
6. HVAC Ducts, Insulated:
a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-7156; Hilti FS-ONE intumescent
Firestop Sealant.
b. 1 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-7156; Hilti FS-ONE intumescent
Firestop Sealant.

2.6 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS

A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements.
1. Fire Ratings: Use any system listed by UL or tested in accordance with ASTM
E814 that has F Rating equal to fire rating of penetrated assembly and T Rating
Equal to F Rating and that meets all other specified requirements.
B. Firestopping Between Edge of Floor Slab and Curtain Wall (without
Penetrations): Fiber firestopping with smoke seal coating; UL Design No. -, F
Rating_ hour.
C. Firestopping Between Top of Partition Wall and Roof Slab: Fiber firestopping
with smoke seal coating; UL Design No., F Rating, provide at locations
indicated on drawings.
D. Temporary Firestopping: Reusable intumescent shapes; UL Design No. ----, F
Rating 1-1/2 hour; provide at locations indicated on drawings.

2.7 MATERIALS:

A. Firestopping Sealants: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound
(VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule
No.1168.
B. Elastomeric Silicone Firestopping: Single component silicone elastomeric compound
and compatible silicone sealant; conforming to the following:
C. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 6|P a g e Section: 07 84 00
Amazon – firestopping.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

for tested assembly design.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease. oil, loose material, or other matter that
could adversely affect bond of firestopping material.
B. Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond.
C. Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions, completely closing openings.
B. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authority having jurisdiction.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.

END OF SECTION 07 84 00

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 7|P a g e Section: 07 84 00
Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 07 90 05: JOINT SEALERS

Prepared By

Year 2022
Rev. 00
Amazon – Joint Sealers.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTION: 07 90 05

JOINT SEALERS
PART1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Sealants and joint backing
B. Recompressed foam sealers.
C. Hollow gaskets.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Firestopping sealants.
B. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glazing sealants and accessories.
C. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic sealant.
D. Section 09 30 00 - Tiling: Sealant used as tile grout.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2010.
B. ASTM C919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 2012.
C. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2011.
D. ASTM C1193- Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2011a.
E. ASTM D1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Sponge or
Expanded Rubber; 2007.
F. ASTM D1667 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) Foam (Closed-Cell); 2005 (Reapproved 2011).
G. ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property--Durometer
Hardness; 2005 (Reapproved 2010).
H. ASTM D2628 - Standard Specification for Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric
Joint Seals for concrete Pavements; 1991 (Reapproved 2011).
I. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168;
current edition; [Link].

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate the work with other sections referencing this section.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics.
C. Samples: Submit two samples, x mm in size illustrating sealant colors for
selection.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 1|P a g e Section: 07 90 05
Amazon – Joint Sealers.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Maintain one copy of each referenced document covering installation requirements on
site.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products
specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section
with minimum 5 years’ experience

1.7 MOCK-UP
A. Provide mock-up of sealant joints in conjunction with window under provisions of
Section 01 40 00.
B. Construct mock-up with specified sealant types and with other components noted.
C. Locate where directed.
D. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during
and after installation.

1.9 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective work within a five-year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve
airtight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SEALANTS
A. Sealants and Primers - General: Provide only products having lower volatile organic
compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management
District Rule No.1168.
B. General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25,
Uses M, G, and A; single component.
C. Exterior Expansion Joint Sealer: Recompressed foam sealer; urethane with water-
repellent;
D. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Locations:
E. Concrete Floor Joint Filler: Self-leveling, pourable, semi-rigid sealant intended for
filling cracks and control joints not subject to significant movement; rigid enough to
support concrete edges under traffic.

1. Composition: Polyurea or epoxy, single or multi-part,100 percent solids by weight.

2. Hardness: 75 to 80 after 7 days, when tested in accordance with ASTM D2240
Shore A.
3. Joint Width: 3 to 6 mm.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 2|P a g e Section: 07 90 05
Amazon – Joint Sealers.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

4. Applications: Use for:

a. Control joints in concrete slabs and floors not filled with filler placed in form.
b. joints in concrete slabs and floors.
F. Interior Floor Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C920, Grade P, Class
25, Uses T, M and A; single component.
5. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
G. Sealant for Continuous Water Immersion: Polysulfide; ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class
25, Uses I, M, and A; approved by manufacturer for continuous water immersion;
single component.
1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
H. Concrete Paving Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C920, Class 25,
Uses T, I, M and A; single component.
I. Type_ - Acrylic Emulsion Latex: ASTM C834, single component, non-staining, non-
bleeding, non-sagging.
1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
J. Type_ - Nonsag Polysulfide Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, I,
M, A, G, O; two component, chemical curing, non-staining, non-bleeding, capable of
continuous water immersion, non-sagging type.
1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
K. Nonsag Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, I, M, A, G,
O; single component, chemical curing, non-staining, non-bleeding, capable of
continuous water immersion, non-sagging type.
1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
L. Type_ - Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, A, G, M, O; single
component, solvent curing, non-sagging, non-staining, fungus resistant, non-bleeding.
1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.

2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant
manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.
C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed
cell PVC; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.
D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer
to suit application.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.
B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.
B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 3|P a g e Section: 07 90 05
Amazon – Joint Sealers.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for
preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions.
B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.
C. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
D. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
E. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult
manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
F. Tool joints concave.
G. recompressed Foam Sealant: Do not stretch; avoid joints except at corners,
ends, and intersections; install with face 3 to 6 mm below adjoining surface.
H. Compression Gaskets: Avoid joints except at ends, corners, and intersections: seal
all joints with adhesive; install with face 3 to 6 mm below adjoining surface.

3.4 CLEANING
A Clean adjacent soiled surface.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect sealants until cured.

END OF SECTION 07 90 05

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 4|P a g e Section: 07 90 05
 Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 07 95 13: EXPENTION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES

Prepared By

Year 2022
Rev. 00
Amazon – Expention joint cover Assemblies.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTION: 07 95 13

EXPENTION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES

PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Expansion joint cover assemblies for floor, wall, ceiling and soffit surfaces.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: Placement of joint assembly
frames in formwork.
B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Expansion and contraction joints
in exterior concrete joints.
C. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Placement of joint assembly frames in masonry.
D. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Custom fabricated steel expansion and
control joint devices.
E. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Expansion and control joint finishing utilizing a
sealant and bond breaker.
F. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Control joints in gypsum board
walls and ceilings.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded
Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2012.
B. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2012.
C. ASTM B308/B308M - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6
Standard Structural Profiles; 2010.
D. ASTM 8455 - Standard Specification for Copper-Zinc-Lead Alloy (Leaded-
Brass) Extruded Shapes; 2010.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide joint assembly profiles, profile dimensions, anchorage devices,
available colors and finish.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate joint and splice locations, miters, layout of the work,
affected adjacent construction, and anchorage locations.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate rough-in sizes; provide templates
for cast-in or placed frames or anchors; required tolerances for item placement.
PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLY APPLICATIONS

A. Interior Floor Joints Subject to Thermal Movement.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 1|P a g e Section: 07 95 13
Amazon – Expention joint cover Assemblies.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

B. Interior Floor Joints Subject to Seismic Movement.

C. Interior Wall/Ceiling Joints Subject to Thermal Movement.
D. Interior Non-Fire-Rated Wall/Ceiling Joints Subject to Seismic Movement.
E. Interior Fire-Rated Wall/Ceiling Joints Subject to Seismic Movement.
F. Exterior Wall Joints Subject to Thermal Movement.
G. Exterior Wall Joints Subject to Seismic Movement.
H. Parking/Bridge Deck Joints.

2.2 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES

A. Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies - General: Factory-fabricated and assembled;
designed to completely fill joint openings, sealed to prevent passage of air, dust, water,
smoke; suitable for traffic expected.
1. Joint Dimensions and Configurations: As indicated on drawings.
2. Joint Cover Sizes: Selected to suit joint width and configuration, based on
manufacturer's published recommendations and limitations.
3. Joint Cover Styles: As indicated on drawings.
4. Joint Movement Capability: If not indicated, provide minimum plus/minus 25
percent joint movement capability.
5. Lengths: Provide covers in full lengths required; avoid splicing wherever possible.
6. Anchors, Fasteners, and Fittings: Provided by cover manufacturer.
B. Floor Joint Covers: Coordinate with indicated floor coverings.
1. If floor covering is not indicated, obtain instructions from Architect before
proceeding.
2. If style is not indicated, provide extruded aluminum frame both sides, resilient
seals, and minimize exposed metal.
C. Resilient Seal Type Covers: Having flat exposed surface without crevices that could
collect dirt; designed to withstand expected movement without extrusion of seal from
joint assembly; for floors, provide style that is flush with top of floor covering; for
exterior joints, weathertight.
D. Sliding Cover Plate Type Covers: Provide plate with beveled edges and neat fit that
does not collect dirt.
E. Covers In Gypsum Board Assemblies: Provide style with anchoring wings that can be
completely covered by joint compound.
F. Covers In Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide cover assembly having fire rating equivalent
to that of assembly into which it is installed.
1. Acceptable Evaluation Agencies: UL, ULC, and Intertek.

2.3 MATERIALS
A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM 8221 (ASTM B221M), 6063 alloy, T6
temper; or ASTM 8308/B308M, 6061 allow, T6 temper.
1. Exposed Finish Outdoors: Natural anodized.
2. Exposed Finish at Floors: Mill finish or natural anodized.
3. Exposed Finish at Walls and Ceilings: Natural anodized.
B. Resilient Seals:

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 2|P a g e Section: 07 95 13
Amazon – Expention joint cover Assemblies.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

1. For Ceilings: Any resilient material, flush, pleated, or hollow gasket.

2. For Pedestrian Traffic Applications: EPDM rubber, Neoprene, or Santorini;
no PVC; Shore A hardness of 40 to 50 Durometer.
3. For Vehicular Traffic Applications: EPDM rubber, Neoprene, or Santorini;
no PVC; Shore A hardness of 40 to 50 Durometer.
4. Color: Gray.
C. Anchors and Fasteners: As recommended by cover manufacturer.
D. Ferrous Metal Anchors: Galvanized were embedded in concrete or in contact with
cementitious materials.
E. Threaded Fasteners: Aluminum.
F. Backing Paint for Aluminum Components in Contact with Cementitious Materials:
Asphaltic type.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that joint preparation and dimensions are acceptable and in
accordance with manufacturer's requirements.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide anchoring devices for installation and embedding under Section 03 10 00.
1. Provide templates and rough-in measurements.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install components and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Align work plumb and level, flush with adjacent surfaces.
C. Rigidly anchor to substrate to prevent misalignment.

3.4 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor joint surfaces.
B. Provide strippable coating to protect finish surface.

END OF SECTION 07 95 13

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 3|P a g e Section: 07 95 13
Amazon - Table of Contents – Openings.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

TABLE OF CONTENTS

ARCHITECTURAL WORKS

DIVISION 08 - OPENING

Section No.
Descriptions

08 11 13 HOLLOW DOORS AND FRAMES

08 11 16 ALUMINUM DOOR AND FRAME
08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08 41 26 ALL GLASS ENTRANCES AND SHOPFRONTS
08 42 29 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES
08 42 33 REVOLVING DOOR ENTRANCES
08 43 13 ALUMINUM FRAME SHOPFRONTS
08 44 13 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE
08 80 00 GLAZING
08 83 00 MIRRORS

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |1 TOC
 Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 08 11 13: HOLLOW DOORS AND FRAMES

Prepared By

Year 2022
Rev. 00
Amazon – Hollow doors and frames.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTION: 08 11 13

HOLLOW DOORS AND FRAMES

PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Non-fire-rated steel doors and frames.
B. Steel frames for wood doors.
C. Fire-rated steel doors and frames.
D. Thermally insulated steel doors.
E. Sound-rated steel doors and frames.
F. Steel glazing frames.
G. Accessories, including glazing, louvers, and matching panels.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.
B. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites.
C. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field painting.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings
and Facilities; International Code Council; 2009.
B. ANSI A250.3 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory-Applied Finish
Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 2007.
C. ANSI A250.8 - SDl-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and
Frames; 2003.
D. ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel
Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 1998 (R2004}.
E. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed} by the Hot-Dip Process;
2011.
F. ASTM C1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building
Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus; 2011.
G. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009.
H. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2010.
I. ASTM E1408 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of the Sound
Transmission Loss of Door Panels and Door Systems; 1991 (Reapproved 2000}.
J. BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2006.
K. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow
Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal
Manufacturers; 2007.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 1|P a g e Section: 08 11 13
Amazon – Hollow doors and frames.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

L. NAAMM HMMA 861 - Guide Specifications for Commercial Hollow Metal Doors
and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2006.
M. NFPA80- Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2010.
N. UL (BMD} - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current
edition.
O. UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
P. UL 1784 - Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware
locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods,
and finishes; and one copy of referenced grade standard.
C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame
profiles, and identifying location of different finishes, if any.
D. Samples: Submit two samples of metal, 50 x 50 mm in size showing factory
finishes, colors, and surface texture.
E. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special
installation instructions relating to this project.
F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products meet or exceed specified
requirements.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store in accordance with NMMM HMMA 840.
B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent
corrosion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Requirements for All Doors and Frames:
1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSI/ICC A117.1.
2. Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges.
3. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges.
4. Door Texture: Smooth faces.
5. Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and
configurations as indicated on drawings.
6. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA A156.115, with
reinforcement welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in
door grade standard.
7. Galvanizing for Units in Wet Areas: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron
alloy-coated (galvannealed), manufacturer's standard coating thickness.
8. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.
B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 2|P a g e Section: 08 11 13
Amazon – Hollow doors and frames.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified
requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as
being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors
and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most
stringent.
2.2 STEEL DOORS
A. Exterior Doors:
1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 2, seamless.
2. Core: Polystyrene foam.
3. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated
(galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with
manufacturer's standard coating thickness.
4. Texture: Smooth faces.
5. Insulating Value: U-value of 0.50, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1363.
6. Weatherstripping: Integral, recessed into door edge or frame.
7. Finish: Completely factory finished.
B. Interior Doors, Non-Fire-Rated:
1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 1, physical performance Level C, Model 1, full flush.
2. Core: Cardboard honeycomb.
3. Thickness: 44 mm.
C. Interior Doors, Fire-Rated:
1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 1, full flush.
2. Fire Rating: As indicated on Door and Frame Schedule, tested in accordance with
UL 10C ("positive pressure").
a. Provide units listed and labeled by UL.
b. Attach fire rating label to each fire rated unit.
3. Core: Mineral fiberboard.
D. Interior Smoke and Draft Control Doors (Indicated as "S" on Drawings): Same
construction as fire-rated doors with indicated fire rating, plus:
1. Maximum Air Leakage: 0.01524cu m/s/sq m of door opening at 24.9 Pa pressure,
when tested in accordance with UL 1784 at both ambient and elevated
temperatures.
2. Gasketing: No added gasketing or seals allowed.
3. Label: UL "S" label.
E. Interior Doors, Sound-Rated:
1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 2, seamless.
2. STC Rating of Assembled Door, Frame, and Seals: 35, calculated in accordance
with ASTM E413, tested in accordance with ASTM E90 or ASTM E1408.
3. Core: Polyurethane.
4. Sound Seals: Integral, concealed in door or frame.
5. Force to Open and Close and Latch: Not more than 22.2 N.
F. Panels: Same construction, performance, and finish as doors.

2.3 STEEL FRAMES

A. General:
1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door.
a. ANSI A250.8 Level 1 Doors: 16 gage frames.
b. ANSI A250.8 Level 3 Doors: 14 gage frames.
c. ANSI A250.8 Level 4 Doors: 12 gage frames.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 3|P a g e Section: 08 11 13
Amazon – Hollow doors and frames.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

d. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI
A250.8 for Level 1, 18 gage
e. Frames for Sound-Rated Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements
specified in ANSI A250.8 for Level 1, 16 gage
2. Finish: Same as for door.
3. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in
masonry or to be grouted.
4. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member 100
mm high to fill opening without cutting masonry units.
5. Frames Wider than 1200 mm: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into
frame head, flush with top.
B. Exterior Door Frames: Face welded, seamless with joints filled.
1. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed)
in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating
thickness.
2. Weatherstripping: Integral, recessed into door edge or frame.
C. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire-Rated: Knock-down type.
1. Terminated Stops: Provide at all interior doors; closed end stop terminated 150 mm
above floor at 45-degree angle.
2. Finish: Completely factory finished.
D. Interior Door Frames, Fire-Rated: Knock-down type.
1. Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled.
2. Finish: Completely factory finished.
E. Sound-Rated Door Frames: Knock-down type.
F. Frames for Interior Glazing or Borrowed Lights: Construction and face
dimensions to match door frames, and as indicated on drawings.

2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Louvers: Roll formed steel with overlapping frame; factory-installed.
1. In Fire-Rated Doors: UL-listed fusible link louver, same rating as door.
2. Style: Standard straight slat blade.
B. Glazing: Clear sheet glass, 6 mm thick, factory installed.
C. Removable Stops: Formed sheet steel, shape as indicated on drawings, mitered
or butted corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws.
D. Astragals for Double Doors: Specified in Section 08 71 00.
1. Exterior Doors: Steel, Z-shaped.
2. Fire-Rated Doors: Steel, shape as required to accomplish fire rating.
E. Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout of maximum 4-inch slump for hand
troweling; thinner pumpable grout is prohibited.
F. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door,
3 on center mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions.

2.5 FINISH MATERIALS

A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.
B. Factory Finish: Complying with ANSI A 250.3, manufacturer's standard coating.
1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 4|P a g e Section: 08 11 13
Amazon – Hollow doors and frames.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

C. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high-build, water-resistant, resilient coating.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous
coating, prior to installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and
NMMM HMMA840.
B. In addition, install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80.
C. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.
D. Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace
frames so that pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames.
E. Coordinate installation of hardware.
F. Coordinate installation of glazing.
G. Touch up damaged factory finishes.

3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8.
B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1.5 mm measured with straight edge, corner to corner.

3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.
B. Adjust sound control doors so that seals are fully engaged when door is closed.
C. Test sound control doors for force to close, latch, and unlatch in accordance with
ASTM E1408; adjust as required to comply.

END OF SECTION 08 11 13

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 5|P a g e Section: 08 11 13
 Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 08 11 16: ALUMINUM DOOR AND FRAME

Prepared By

Year 2022
Rev. 00
Amazon Aluminum Door and Frame.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTION: 08 11 16

ALUMINUM DOOR AND FRAME

PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Tubular aluminum doors.
B. Aluminum door frames.
C. Accessories, including louvers, fasteners, and brackets.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry.
B. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers.
C. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.
D. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. MMA 609 - Voluntary Guide Specification for Cleaning and Maintenance of
Architectural Anodized Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers
Association; 2009.
B. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum;
American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012.
C. MMA 701/702 - Voluntary Specifications for Pile Weatherstripping and
Replaceable Fenestration Weather seals; American Architectural
Manufacturers Association; 2011.
D. MMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test
Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and
Panels; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2010
E. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings
on Iron and Steel Products; 2012.
F. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and
Plate; 2010.
G. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet
and Plate [Metric]; 2010.
H. ASTM 8221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded
Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2012.
I. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded
Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2012.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 1|P a g e Section: 08 11 16
Amazon Aluminum Door and Frame.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

1.4 SUBMITTAL$
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature for each type of door; include
information on fabrication methods.
B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations of each opening type.
C. Selection Samples: Complete set of color and finish options, using actual
materials, for Architect's selection.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A Manufacturer Qualifications: Not less than 5 years of experience in manufacturing
components of the types specified.
8. Installer Qualifications: Firm with documented experience in installing components of the
types specified

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver aluminum components in manufacturer's standard protective
packaging, palleted, crated, or banded together.
B. Inspect delivered components for damage and replace. Repaired
components will not be accepted.
C. Store components under cover in manufacturer 's packaging until installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), alloy 5005-H14, stretcher leveled.
B. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), alloy 6063-TS or alloy 6463-
T5.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Tubular Aluminum Doors: Provide 44 mm thick glazed doors using materials as

follows:
1. Framing: Extruded aluminum tubing, 3.17 mm minimum thickness, with
heavy-duty plated steel through bolts in rails.
2. Glazing: 25 mm thick insulating units made up of clear, 6 mm tempered glass.
B. Aluminum Door Frames: Provide frames sized to fit wall thicknesses indicated
on the drawings, in profiles indicated, and constructed from materials as follows:
1. Frame Members: Extruded aluminum shapes, not less than 1.6 mm thick,
reinforced at
hinge and strike locations.
2. Corner Brackets: Extruded aluminum, fastened with stainless steel screws.
3. Trim: Extruded aluminum, not less than 1.6 mm thick, removable snap-
in type without exposed fasteners.
4. Replaceable Weatherstripping: AAMA 701/702 wool pile.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 2|P a g e Section: 08 11 16
Amazon Aluminum Door and Frame.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

2.3 FINISHES
A. Finish: High Performance Organic Coating: Kynar/Polyvinylidene Fluoride
(PVDF) complying with requirements of AAMA 2604; color as selected from
manufacturer's full range by Architect.

2.4 FABRICATION
A. Door sizes shown are nominal; provide standard clearances as follows:
1. Hinge and Lock Stiles: 3.17 mm.
2. Between Meeting Stiles: 6.34 mm.
3. At Top Rail and Bottom Rail: 3.17 mm.
B. Sizes and locations of louvers and lights: As indicated on drawings.
C. Aluminum frames: Sizes and contours as indicated on drawings.

2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel, or other material
warranted by manufacturer as non-corrosive and compatible with
aluminum components.
B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's high-strength aluminum units
where feasible, otherwise, non-magnetic stainless steel or steel hot-dip
galvanized in compliance with ASTM A123/A123M.
C. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphaltic mastic, compounded for 0.76 mm
thickness per coat.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A Verify that wall surfaces and openings are ready to receive frames and are within
tolerances specified in manufacturer's instructions
Verify that frames installed by other trades for installation of doors of this section are in
strict accordance with recommendations and approved shop drawings and within
tolerances specified in manufacturer's instructions.

3.2 PREPARATION
a. Perform cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and grinding of frames as required
for project conditions.
b. Replace components with damage to exposed finishes.
c. Separate dissimilar metals to prevent electrolytic action between metals.

3.3 INSTALLATION
a. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
approved shop drawings.
b. Set frames plumb, square, level, and aligned to receive doors. Anchor frames to

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 3|P a g e Section: 08 11 16
Amazon Aluminum Door and Frame.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

adjacent construction in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations

and within specified tolerances.
c. Where aluminum surfaces contact metals other than stainless steel, zinc, or small
areas of white bronze, protect from direct contact by painting dissimilar metal
with heavy coating of bituminous paint.
d. Hang doors and adjust hardware to achieve specified clearances and proper door
operation.
e. Install door hardware as specified in Section 08 71 00.
f. Install glazing in glazing frames; set glazing stops and glazing gaskets flush with frame.
g. Install glass in frames as specified in Section 08 80 00.

3.4 CLEANING
a. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean door and frame surfaces in
accordance with AAMA609.
b. Do not use abrasive, caustic, or acid cleaning agents.

3.5 PROTECTION
a. Protect products of this section from damage caused by subsequent
construction until substantial completion.
b. Replace damaged or defective components that cannot be repaired to a
condition indistinguishable from undamaged components.

END OF SECTION 08 11 16

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 4|P a g e Section: 08 11 16
 Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 08 14 16: FLUSH WOOD DOORS

Prepared By

Year 2022
Rev. 00
Amazon – Flush Wood Doors.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTION: 08 14 16

FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Flush wood doors; flush configuration; fire rated, non-rated, and acoustical.
B. Transom panels, where indicated.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
B. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.
C. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Site finishing of doors.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

D. ANSI A135.4 -American National Standard for Basic Hardboard; 2004.
E. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2010.
F. ASTM E1408 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of the Sound
Transmission Loss of Door Panels and Door Systems; 1991 (Reapproved 2000).
G. AWl (QCP) - Quality Certification Program, [Link]; current edition at
[Link].
H. AWI/AWMACfWI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009.
I. AWMAC (GIS) - Guarantee and Inspection Services Program; current
edition at [Link]/[Link].
J. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2012.
K. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 2005.
L. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2010.
M. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire
Protection Association; 2012.
N. UBC Std 7-2, Part II - Test Standard for Smoke- and Draft-control Assemblies;
International Conference of Building Officials; 1997.
O. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current
edition.
P. UL 108 - Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
Q. UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies;
Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
0. UL 1784 - Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
P. WDMA I.S.1-A-Architectural Wood Flush Doors; Window and Door
Manufacturers Association; 2011.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 1|P a g e Section: 08 14 16
Amazon – Flush Wood Doors.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and
characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: Show doors and frames, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts,
beveling, blocking for hardware, factory machining, factory finishing, cutouts for
glazing and other details.
1. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMACfWI Architectural Woodwork
Standards.
C. Specimen warranty.
D. Test Reports: Show compliance with specified requirements for the following:
1. Sound-retardant doors and frames; sealed panel tests are not acceptable.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions.
F. Warranty, executed in Owner's name.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Maintain one copy of the specified door quality standard on site for review during
installation and finishing.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the
products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented
experience.
1. Company with at least one project in the past 5 years with value of
woodwork within 20 percent of cost of woodwork for this Project.
2. Accredited participant in the specified certification program prior to the
commencement of
fabrication and throughout the duration of the project.
C. Quality Certification: Provide AWl Quality Certification Program inspection
report and quality certification of completed work.
1. Provide labels or certificates indicating that the work complies with
requirements of AWS
Grade or Grades specified.
2. Prior to delivery to the site provide shop drawings with certification labels.
3. Provide labels on each product when required by certification program.
4. Upon completion of installation provide certificate certifying that the
installation and products meet the specified requirements.
5. Arrange and pay for inspections required for certification.
6. Replace, repair, or rework all work for which certification is refused.
D. Installed Fire Rated Door and Transom Panel Assembly: Conform to NFPA
80 for fire rated class as indicated.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard.
B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.
C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not
store in damp or wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal
top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal
on site to permit ventilation.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 2|P a g e Section: 08 14 16
Amazon – Flush Wood Doors.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

1.7 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements.
B. Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation.
C. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified
installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 DOORS AND PANELS

A. All Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements.
1. Quality Level: Premium Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMACN.
/1 Architectural Woodwork Standards.
2. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated.
3. High Pressure Decorative Laminate Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Interior Doors: 44 mm thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction.
1. Provide solid core doors at all locations.
2. Fire Rated Doors: Tested to ratings indicated on drawings in accordance with
International Building Code ("positive pressure"); UL or WH (ITS) labeled
without any visible seals when door is open.
[Link] Retardant Doors: Minimum STC as indicated on drawings,
calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, tested in accordance with
ASTM E1408.
4. High pressure decorative laminate finish was indicated on drawings.
C. Transom Panels: Same construction and finish as door; same performance rating as door.

2.2 DOOR AND PANEL CORES

A. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core (PC),
plies and faces as indicated above.
B. Fire Rated Doors: Mineral core, Type FD, plies and faces as indicated above; with
core blocking as required to provide adequate anchorage of hardware without
through-bolting.
C. Sound Retardant Doors: Equivalent to Type PC construction with core as required to
achieve rating specified; plies and faces as indicated above.
D. Hollow Core Doors: Type Standard (SHC/FSHC); plies and faces as indicated above.

2.3 DOOR FACINGS

A. Wood Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: Species as specified above, veneer grade as
specified by quality standard, plain sliced, book veneer match, running assembly match;
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Vertical Edges: Any option allowed by quality standard for grade.
2. Pairs: Pair match each pair; set match pairs within 3 m of each other when doors
are closed.
3. Transoms: Continuous match to doors.
B. Veneer Facing for Opaque Finish: Medium density overlaid plywood.
C. Hardboard Facing for Opaque Finish: AHA A135.4, Class 1 - Tempered, S2S

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 3|P a g e Section: 08 14 16
Amazon – Flush Wood Doors.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

(smooth two sides) hardboard, composition face, 3 mm thick.

D. High Pressure Decorative Laminate Facing for Fire Doors: NEMA LO 3, SGF;
color as selected; textured, low gloss finish.
E. High Pressure Decorative Laminate Facing for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: NEMA LD 3,
HGS; color as selected; textured, low gloss finish.
F. Facing Adhesive: Type I -waterproof.

2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Wood Louvers:
1. Material and Finish: Teak species.
2. Louver Blade: Flush louver.
B. Glazing Stops: Wood, of same species as door facing, butted corners; prepared for
countersink style tamper proof screws.
C. Astragals for Non-Rated Double Doors: Steel, T shaped, overlapping and recessed at
face edge.

2.5 DOOR CONSTRUCTION

A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified.
B. Cores Constructed with stiles and rails:
C. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with
edge clearances in accordance with specified quality standard.
D. Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified.

2.6 FACTORY FINISHING - WOOD VENEER DOORS

A. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards,
Section 5
- Finishing for Grade specified and as follows:
1. Transparent:
a. System - 1, Lacquer, Nitrocellulose.
b. Stain: As selected by Architect.
c. Sheen: Flat.
2. Opaque:
a. System - 1, Lacquer, Nitrocellulose.
b. Color: As selected by Architect.
c. Sheen: Flat.
B. Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample.
C. Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance
for size or alignment.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 4|P a g e Section: 08 14 16
Amazon – Flush Wood Doors.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality
standard.
1. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 requirements.
B. Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct,
replace door.
C. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware.
D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.
E. Coordinate installation of glazing.
F. Install door louvers plumb and level.

3.3 TOLERANCES
A. Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances.
B. Conform to specified quality standard for telegraphing, warp, and squareness.

3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.
B. Adjust closers for full closure.

3.5 SCHEDULE - SEE DRAWINGS

END OF SECTION 08 14 16

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 5|P a g e Section: 08 14 16
 Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 08 41 26: ALL GLASS ENTRANCES AND SHOPFRONTS

Prepared By

Year 2022
Rev. 00
Amazon - All glass entrances and shopfronts.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTION: 08 41 26

ALL GLASS ENTRANCES AND SHOPFRONTS

PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. All-glass entrances.
B. All-glass shopfronts.
C. Swinging doors.
D. Sliding doors.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless-
Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.
B. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,
Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2012.
C. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,
Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2012.
D. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2011.
E. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011e1.
F. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat
Glass; 2012.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature for each component in all-glass
entrance assembly.
C. Shop Drawings: Drawings showing layout, dimensions, identification of components,
and interface with adjacent construction.
D. Selection Samples: Two sets, representing manufacturer's full range of available
metal materials and finishes.
E. Verification Samples: Two samples, minimum size 50 by 75 mm, representing actual
material and finish of exposed metal.
F. Design Data: Design calculations, bearing seal and signature of structural engineer licensed
to practice in the State in which the Project is located, documenting compliance of exterior
assemblies with wind pressure criteria.
G. Certificates: Contractor's certification that installer of entrance assemblies meets
specified qualifications.
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For manufacturer-supplied operating hardware.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 1|P a g e Section: 08 41 26
Amazon - All glass entrances and shopfronts.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Designer Qualifications: Design under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer
experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State in which the Project
is located.
B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum three years of experience installing entrance
assemblies similar to those specified in this section.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ASSEMBLIES
A. Entrances and Shopfronts: Factory fabricated assemblies consisting of frameless glass
panels fastened with metal structural fittings in configuration indicated on the
drawings.
1. Operational Loads: Designed to withstand door operation under normal
traffic without damage, racking, sagging, or deflection.
2. Prepared for all specified hardware whether specified in this section or not.
3. Finished metal surfaces protected with strippable film.
4. Factory assembled to greatest extent practicable; may be disassembled to
accommodate shipping constraints.

2.2 FITTINGS
1. Exposed Fittings: Stainless steel, Number 4, satin polish finish.
2. Fixed Glazed Panel Fittings: Sufficient to structurally support glazing and doors under
specified loads; including but not limited to cover caps for door hardware, glazing
mullions, clamp fittings, and panel corner patches.
3. Sidelight Fittings: No rails; provide extruded aluminum channels, for recessed
installation in construction above and below glazing panels for frameless appearance.
4. Swinging Door Fittings: Continuous rail at top and bottom of door.
1. Rail Cross-Section: 44.4 mm wide by 88.9 mm high.
2. Rail Profile: Tapered.
5. Sliding Door Fittings: Continuous rail at top and bottom of door:
1. Rail Cross-Section: 44.4 mm wide by 101 mm high.
2. Rail Profile: Tapered.

2.3 DOOR HARDWARE

1. Finish of Exposed Metals: Match finish of fittings.
2. Swinging Door Hardware: Provided by shopfront manufacturer:
1. Hinges: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
3. Sliding Door Hardware:
1. Overhead Mounted Roller Assembly: Twin roller assembly, concealed within
top track, with adjustable connector to draught strip, which connects to top rail
using concealed fasteners.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 2|P a g e Section: 08 41 26
Amazon - All glass entrances and shopfronts.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

a. Top Track: Box channel, designed for support of sliding

doors with overhead-mounted roller assemblies.
b. Track Cross-Section: 85.7 mm wide by 84 mm height.
2. Latching Hardware: Manufacturer's standard flush bolt assemblies, concealed
within bottom rail of indicated panels, prepared for lock cylinders specified in
Section 08 71 00.
4. All Other Door Hardware: Specified in Section 08 71 00.

2.4 MATERIALS
A Glass: Tempered float glass meeting requirements of ASTM C1036, Type I, Quality
Q3, fully tempered in accordance with ASTM C1048, Kind FT, and as follows:
1. Thickness: 10 mm unless indicated on the Drawings.
2. Color: Clear, Class 1.
3. Prepare glazing panels for indicated fittings and hardware before tempering.
4. Polish edges that will be exposed in finished work to bright flat polish.
5. Temper glass materials horizontally; visible tong marks or tong mark
distortions are not permitted.
B. Aluminum Components: Conforming to ASTM 8221 {ASTM 8221M), Alloy 6063,
Temper T5.
C. Stainless Steel Components: Conforming to ASTM A666, Type 304.
D. Sealant: One-part silicone sealant, conforming to ASTM C920, clear.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A Verify that openings are acceptable.
C. Do not begin installation until substrates and openings have been properly prepared.
D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION
a. Clean substrates thoroughly prior to installation.
b. Prepare substrates using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for
achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 INSTALLATION
a. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
b. Tolerances:
• Horizontal Components and Sight Lines: Not more than 1:1000 variation
from level, non-cumulative.
• Vertical Components and Sight Lines: Not more than 1:1000 variation
from plumb, non-cumulative.
• Variation from Plane or Indicated Location: Not more than 1.5 mm.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 3|P a g e Section: 08 41 26
Amazon - All glass entrances and shopfronts.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

c. Installation of door hardware not supplied by entrance/shopfront manufacturer is

specified in Section 08 71 00.

3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust doors to operate correctly, without binding to frame, sill, or adjacent doors.
B. Adjust door hardware for smooth operation.

3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean installed work to like-new condition.

3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 08 41 26

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 4|P a g e Section: 08 41 26
 Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 08 42 29: AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES

Prepared By

Year 2022
Rev. 00
Amazon – Automatic Entrances.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTION: 08 42 29

AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Automatic sliding doors, with frames.
B. Actuators and safety devices.
C. Maintenance.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 08 42 33 - Revolving Door Entrances: Automatic revolving doors.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. BHMA A156.10 - American National Standard for Power Operated Pedestrian
Doors; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2005 (ANSI/BHMA
A156.10).
B. BHMA A156.19 - American National Standard for Power Assist and Low Energy
Power Operated Doors: Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2007
(ANSI/BHMA A156.19).
C. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;
2011.
D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code: National Fire Protection Association; Most
Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable
Amendments and Supplements.
E. UL (ECMD) - Electrical Construction Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories
Inc.; current edition.
F. UL 325 - Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and
Systems; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate layout and dimensions; head, jamb, and sill conditions; elevations:
components, anchorage, recesses, materials, and finishes, electrical
characteristics and connection requirements.
2. Identify installation tolerances required, assembly conditions, routing of service
lines and conduit, and locations of operating components and boxes.
C. Product Data: Provide data on system components, sizes, features, and finishes.
D. Samples: Submit two samples of exposed to view hardware, and attachment hardware.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter
conditions requiring special attention, and manufacturer's hardware and

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 1|P a g e Section: 08 42 29
Amazon – Automatic Entrances.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

component templates.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters
Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
A. Automatic Sliding Door: Bi-parting double leaf track-mounted, electric
operation, extruded aluminum glazed door, with frame, and operator concealed
overhead.
1. Operation: Power open, spring close operation.
2. Actuator(s): As indicated on drawings.
3. Hold Open: Toggle switch at inside head of doors.
4. Door and Frame Finish: Same as adjacent framing system.

2.2 DOOR OPERATORS

A. Door Operators - General Requirements: Comply with BHMA A156.10, BHMA
A156.19, and UL
325, as applicable.
1. Operating Temperature Range: Minus 7 to plus 60 degrees C ambient.
2. Provide operators that are fully adjustable for opening and closing speeds,
checking speeds, and hold-open time.
3. Sliding Door Operators: Provide for manual open, close, and break-away
operation of door leaves in the event of power failure. Maximum Force for
Break-Away Function: N.
4. Conform to applicable code for automatic release of control drive unit to
permit manual opening of doors.

2.3 ACTUATORS
A. Proximity Detector Actuator: Microwave; distance of control sensitivity adjustable.
B. Pull Chain Actuator: Standard overhead, surface-mounted momentary contact type.
C. Push Plate Actuator: Standard wall mounted, surface mounted momentary contact
type; satin stainless-steel plate; (As indicated on Drawings) mm diameter; labeled
PUSH.
D. Push Button Actuator: Standard momentary contact type, wall mounted, surface;
stainless steel escutcheon plate.
E. Touch Bar Actuator: Vertical control device mounted on door stiles;
manufacturer's standard type.

2.4 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS

A. Electrical Characteristics: As per approved shop drawings.
B. Motors: NEMA MG 1.
C. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor
quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized
to NFPA 70.
D. Disconnect Switch: Factory mount disconnect switch in control panel.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 2|P a g e Section: 08 42 29
Amazon – Automatic Entrances.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Steel Clips, Supports, and Steel Anchors: Galvanized to 380 g/sq m.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated
on shop drawings.
B. Verify that electric power is available and is of the correct characteristics.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust door equipment for correct function and smooth operation.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove temporary protection, clean exposed surfaces.

3.5 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. Demonstrate operation, operating components, adjustment features, and
lubrication requirements.

3.6 MAINTENANCE
A. Provide service and maintenance of operating equipment for one year from Date of
Substantial Completion, at no extra charge to Owner.

END OF SECTION 08 42 29

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 3|P a g e Section: 08 42 29
 Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 08 42 33: REVOLVING DOOR ENTRANCES

Prepared By

Year 2022

Rev. 00
Amazon – Revolving Door Entrances.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTION: 08 42 33

REVOLVING DOOR ENTRENCES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section.
B. SUMMARY
1. Section Includes:
a. Automatic revolving door entrances.
b. Access-control revolving door entrances.
2. RELATED SECTIONS:
a. Division 08 Section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Shopfronts"
for adjacent aluminum entrance doors and shopfront framing.

C. SUBMITTAL$
1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction
details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and
profiles, and finishes for revolving door entrances.
2. Shop Drawings: For revolving door entrances. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work. Indicate enclosures, speed-
control units, and other components not in manufacturer's product data.
a. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
3. Samples for Verification:
a. Finishes: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples
of not less than 3 by 5 inches (76 by 127 mm).
b. Glass Samples: For each type of tinted glass; 12 inches (300 mm) square.
4. Qualification Data: For qualified manufacturer.
5. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests
performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency,
for revolving door entrances.
6. Operation and Maintenance Data: For revolving door entrances to include
in operation and maintenance manuals.
7. Warranties: Samples of special warranties.

D. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who
is trained and approved for installation of units required for this
Project.
2. Regulatory Requirements: Wings shall be capable of collapsing into a book-
fold position to provide minimum aggregate parallel width of 36 inches (914
mm) when breakaway force of no more than 180 lbf (801N) is applied within

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 1|P a g e Section: 08 42 33
Amazon – Revolving Door Entrances.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

3 inches (76 mm) of outer edges. Set maximum turning speed to comply with
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16
CFR 1201.
a. Safety-Glass Labeling: Where safety-glass labeling is indicated,
permanently mark glass with certification label of the SGCC, another
certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, or the
manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass,
thickness, and safety-glass standard with which glass complies.
4. Revolving Door Entrance Standard: BHMA A156.27.
5. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

E. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

1. Deliver revolving door entrance glass, decorative metalwork, and other
exposed elements in padded blankets or other approved protective
wrapping.
2. Protect finish surfaces from damage during handling and installation.

F. COORDINATION
1. Recesses: Coordinate size and location of recesses in floor construction for
recessed, floor-mounted speed-control units and recessed mats including
anchorages for frames and supports. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages
that are to be embedded into concrete. Deliver these items to Project site in time
for installation. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are
specified in Division 03 Sections.

G. WARRANTY
1. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components of revolving door entrances that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
a. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Lateral deflection of glass lite edges in excess of 1/175 of their length or
3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less.
2. Excessive air leakage.
3. Faulty operation of speed-control unit and hardware.
4. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond
normal weathering.
b. Warranty Period for Revolving Door Entrances: Three years from date of
Substantial Completion.
c. Warranty Period for Speed-Control Units: Five years from date of
Substantial Completion.
d. Warranty Period for Finishes: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

H. MAINTENANCE SERVICE
1. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six
months' full maintenance by skilled employees of revolving door entrance
Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 2|P a g e Section: 08 42 33
Amazon – Revolving Door Entrances.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required

for proper revolving door entrance operation at rated speed and capacity.
Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and
installation of original equipment.
2. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: From Installer to Owner, in the form of a
standard yearly maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance
service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for
agreement period and for future renewal options.
a. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal
working hours.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 REVOLVING DOOR ENTRANCES

A. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage of 1.25 cfm/sq. ft. (6.4 Us x sq. m) of wing
area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure
difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).
B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C},
material surfaces.
C. Windborne-Debris-lmpact Resistance: Provide exterior glazing that passes
enhanced-protection testing requirements in ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 1 when
tested using the large-missile test according to ASTM E 1886. Test specimens shall
be no smaller in width and length than glazing indicated for use on the Project and
shall be installed in same manner as glazing indicated for use on the Project.

2.2 AUTOMATIC REVOLVING DOOR ENTRANCES

A. Description: Provide manufacturer's standard four-wing automatic revolving door
entrance, complete with core, speed-control unit, wings, enclosure walls, canopy,
hardware, glass and glazing, activation devices, safety devices, and accessories as
indicated.
1. Powered Speed-Control Unit: Provide an electric or electrohydraulic speed
regulator to permit automatic rotation of wings. Unit shall allow for manual
operation when power is off. Furnish power-operation equipment to suit current
characteristics of building electrical service.
a. Location: Recessed, floor mounted.
b. Fold-to-Side Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard overhead carriage, guide
support track, pivot mechanism, and other components necessary to permit
folded wings to be moved to one side of revolving door entrance enclosure.
2. Manual-Push Activation: Pushing wing activates unit and maintains rotation of
wings for manufacturer's standard preset time.
a. Combination Motion-Presence Detectors: Self-contained, one-piece units
consisting of both motion and presence detectors in a single metal or plastic
housing adjustable to provide detection-field sizes, patterns, and functions
required by BHMA A156.10. Mount on both sides of canopy fascia.
b. Photoelectric Beams: Pulsed infrared, sender-receiver assembly recessed in
canopy ceiling.
c. Control Mats: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick, synthetic-rubber or flexible-plastic

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 3|P a g e Section: 08 42 33
Amazon – Revolving Door Entrances.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

mat in safety-ribbed surface pattern, with extruded-aluminum frame; with

pressure switches for low-voltage control wiring; and complying with
performance requirements in BHMA A156.10 including Appendix A.
1. Color: Match Architect's sample.
2. Frame: Recessed to fit flush with floor; with concealed anchors
d. Push-Plate Switch: Momentary-contact control switch with flat stainless-
steel push plate engraved with message "Push to Open."
1. Mounting: Recess mounted, semi flush in wall on right-hand side of
opening.
e. Push-Button Switch: Momentary-contact control switch with one red-button
actuator. Provide blue plastic cover engraved with message "Press to Open"
in white letters.
1. Mounting: Recess mounted, semi flush in wall on right-hand side of
opening.
f. Key Switch: Recess-mounted control switch with key-controlled actuator
and enclosed in 2-by-4-inch (50-by-100-mm) junction box. Provide
faceplate engraved with letters indicating switch functions.
1. Functions: On-off, momentary contact.
2. Mounting: Recess mounted, semi flush in wall on right-hand side of
opening.
3. Stile-and-Rail Wings: Manufacturer's standard with 1-3/4-inch- (45-mm-)
thick tubular stile-and-rail members.
a. Stile Design: Medium stile, 3-1/2-inch (89-mm) nominal width.
b. Rail Design: 4-inch (102-mm) nominal height.
c. Glass: Clear, fully tempered float glass.
1. Thickness: 8 mm.
4. Push Bars: Manufacturer's standard push bars, finished to match wings.
a. Shape: Manufacturer's standard.
5. Locks: Manufacturer's standard deadbolt locks to receive cylinders; minimum
of two for each revolving door entrance.
a. Cylinders: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Door
Hardware."
b. Mounting: Mortised.
c. Location: Extend bolt from bottom of wing into base of wall enclosure.
6. Enclosure Walls: Manufacturer's standard, with 1-3/4-inch- (45-mm-) thick
tubular framing members.
a. Configuration: Curved.
b. Glass: Clear, fully tempered float glass.
1. Thickness: 8 mm.
7. Canopy: Manufacturer's standard ceiling, fascia, roof, and framing with
size, layout, materials, and exposed finishes matching enclosure walls unless
otherwise indicated.
a. Metal: Fabricate from minimum 0.125-inch- (3.18-mm-) thick, aluminum
sheet. Provide ceiling access panels for repairs to or maintenance of
speed-control units.
b. Glass: Clear laminated glass ceiling with two plies of float glass
separated by an interlayer.
1. Thickness: Two 6-mm-thicklites.
c. Ceiling lights: Manufacturer's standard, consisting of two recessed light
fixtures within the ceiling of the revolving door entrance enclosure,

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 4|P a g e Section: 08 42 33
Amazon – Revolving Door Entrances.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

complete with lamps and translucent lenses.

d. Canopy Roof: Manufacturer's standard, of material and finish matching
enclosure walls where visible.
8. Floors: Extend adjacent flooring material specified in Division 09 into
enclosure as indicated on Drawings.
a. Recessed Grilles: Provide grille at entry quadrant only. Fabricate, using
welded joints, from minimum 1/4-inch-wide by 1-inch-tall (6-mm-wide by
25-mm-tall), concentrically curved metal bar stock with 1/4-inch (6-mm)
spacing. Finish to match wings.
9. Safety Devices: Manufacturer's standard safety devices as required to stop
or slow rotation. Provide the following:
a. Emergency Stop Button: Momentary contact, red push-button switch to
immediately stop wing rotation and reverse direction to entry position].
Provide sign indicating
"Emergency Stop."
1. Mounting: Recess mounted, semi flush in wall on right-hand side of
opening.
B. Materials: Stainless-steel-clad, extruded aluminum.
1. Main Extrusions and Tubing: Minimum wall thickness of 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
2. Cladding: Minimum 0.04 inch (1.0 mm) thick.
C. Fabrication: Fabricate revolving door entrance components to designs, sizes,
thicknesses, and configurations indicated with profiles that are sharp, straight, and
free of defects or deformations. Accurately fit joints with ends coped or mitered to
produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Pre-fit all hardware at the factory.
Provide anchorage and alignment brackets for concealed support of assembly from
the building structure.
1. Wings: Factory fabricated and assembled in profiles indicated. Reinforce as
required to support imposed loads and for installing hardware.
a. Glaze wings at the factory. Comply with glazing requirements specified in
this Section and in Division 08 Section "Glazing." Provide minimum
clearances for thickness and type of glass indicated according to GANA's
"Glazing Manual."
b. Provide sliding weather stripping, mortised into stiles and rails of
wings, to be adjustable and replaceable without dismantling wings.
c. Welded Construction: Weld reinforcement firmly in place. Weld corners.
Grind and polish welds to produce an invisible joint. Mechanically finish
exposed surfaces after fabrication to eliminate surface blemishes caused by
welding, rolling, bending, and forming.
2. Enclosure Walls and Ceilings: Fabricate tubular and channel frame
assemblies in configuration indicated, with welded or mechanical joints,
according to manufacturer's standards and as specified. Provide subframes
as required for a complete system to support required loads.
a. Exterior Framing: Fabricate components to drain water passing joints and
condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the
exterior.
Provide anchorage and alignment brackets for concealed support of
assembly from the building structure. Allow for thermal expansion of
exterior units.
D. Aluminum Finishes: Clear anodic.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 5|P a g e Section: 08 42 33
Amazon – Revolving Door Entrances.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

E. Stainless-Steel Finishes: No. 4.

2.3 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use
and finish indicated.
1. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
2. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, austenitic stainless steel, [Type 304]
[Type 316].
C. Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Bars; Bronze: ASTM B 36/B 36M, alloy UNS No. C28000
metal, 60 percent copper).
D. Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M plate, shapes, and bars; or ASTM A 1008/A 1008M sheet.
E. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, of same basic metal as fastened metal, unless
otherwise indicated.
F. Glazing Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
G. Weather Stripping: Heavy-duty, single-piece rubber or combination of rubber and felt.
H. Non shrink, Nonmetallic Grout Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, no
staining grout; complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M; of consistency
suitable for application.
I. Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil
(0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound
free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
J. Lacquer for Copper Alloys: Clear, acrylic lacquer specially developed for coating
copper-alloy products.

2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Finish revolving door entrance components to match adjacent curtain wall or shopfront.

2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Clear Anodic Finish: MMA 611, M-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

2.6 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES

A. General: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. Grind
and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish
indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.
B. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
C. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded
foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 6|P a g e Section: 08 42 33
Amazon – Revolving Door Entrances.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline
joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints
watertight.
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action
by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape
recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion
by painting contact surfaces with corrosion-resistant coatings.
B. Recessed, Floor-Mounted Speed-Control Unit: Insert control unit in rough-in floor
opening set on level bed of non-shrink, nonmetallic grout. Fill annular space
between control unit and sides of recess with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout. Mix and
place grout to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Connect speed-control unit to electrical power distribution system as specified
in Division 26 Sections.
C. Install revolving door entrances according to manufacturer's written instructions,
plumb and true, without warp or rack of framing members and wings. Anchor
securely in place.
1. Install surface-mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent
possible.
2. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring
within framing members, and moisture migrating within the assembly to
exterior.
3. Cut and trim framing during installation only with approval of manufacturer.
• Restore finish and remove and replace members, as directed, where
cutting and trimming have impaired strength or appearance.
• Do not install members that are warped, bowed, deformed, or otherwise
damaged or defaced to such an extent as to impair strength or appearance.
Remove and replace members that have been damaged during installation.
D. Activation and Safety Devices: Adjust devices to provide detection field and functions
indicated.
E. Sealants: Comply with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants"
to provide weathertight installation.
1. Set continuous sill members and flashings in full sealant bed.
2. Seal perimeter of framing members with sealant.

3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust wings to provide an even, tight fit at contact points and weather stripping

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 7|P a g e Section: 08 42 33
Amazon – Revolving Door Entrances.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Adjust wings to operate smoothly
and rotate evenly, with hardware and operators functioning properly.
1. Lubricate operating hardware and other moving parts.
2. Adjust speed-control unit for specified rpm.
3. Adjust pressure for collapse of wings for specified breakaway force.
B. Readjust wings and speed-control units after repeated operation of completed
installation equivalent to three days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles).
Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean glass and aluminum surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess
glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Repair damaged finish to
match original finish.
B. Limit construction traffic during remainder of construction period.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain revolving door entrances. Refer to
Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

END OF SECTION 08 42 33

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 8|P a g e Section: 08 42 33
 Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 08 42 33: REVOLVING DOOR ENTRANCES

Prepared By

Year 2022

Rev. 00
Amazon – Revolving Door Entrances.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTION: 08 42 33

REVOLVING DOOR ENTRENCES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section.
B. SUMMARY
1. Section Includes:
a. Automatic revolving door entrances.
b. Access-control revolving door entrances.
2. RELATED SECTIONS:
a. Division 08 Section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Shopfronts"
for adjacent aluminum entrance doors and shopfront framing.

C. SUBMITTAL$
1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction
details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and
profiles, and finishes for revolving door entrances.
2. Shop Drawings: For revolving door entrances. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work. Indicate enclosures, speed-
control units, and other components not in manufacturer's product data.
a. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
3. Samples for Verification:
a. Finishes: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples
of not less than 3 by 5 inches (76 by 127 mm).
b. Glass Samples: For each type of tinted glass; 12 inches (300 mm) square.
4. Qualification Data: For qualified manufacturer.
5. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests
performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency,
for revolving door entrances.
6. Operation and Maintenance Data: For revolving door entrances to include
in operation and maintenance manuals.
7. Warranties: Samples of special warranties.

D. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who
is trained and approved for installation of units required for this
Project.
2. Regulatory Requirements: Wings shall be capable of collapsing into a book-
fold position to provide minimum aggregate parallel width of 36 inches (914
mm) when breakaway force of no more than 180 lbf (801N) is applied within

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 1|P a g e Section: 08 42 33
Amazon – Revolving Door Entrances.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

3 inches (76 mm) of outer edges. Set maximum turning speed to comply with
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16
CFR 1201.
a. Safety-Glass Labeling: Where safety-glass labeling is indicated,
permanently mark glass with certification label of the SGCC, another
certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, or the
manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass,
thickness, and safety-glass standard with which glass complies.
4. Revolving Door Entrance Standard: BHMA A156.27.
5. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

E. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

1. Deliver revolving door entrance glass, decorative metalwork, and other
exposed elements in padded blankets or other approved protective
wrapping.
2. Protect finish surfaces from damage during handling and installation.

F. COORDINATION
1. Recesses: Coordinate size and location of recesses in floor construction for
recessed, floor-mounted speed-control units and recessed mats including
anchorages for frames and supports. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages
that are to be embedded into concrete. Deliver these items to Project site in time
for installation. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are
specified in Division 03 Sections.

G. WARRANTY
1. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components of revolving door entrances that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
a. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Lateral deflection of glass lite edges in excess of 1/175 of their length or
3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less.
2. Excessive air leakage.
3. Faulty operation of speed-control unit and hardware.
4. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond
normal weathering.
b. Warranty Period for Revolving Door Entrances: Three years from date of
Substantial Completion.
c. Warranty Period for Speed-Control Units: Five years from date of
Substantial Completion.
d. Warranty Period for Finishes: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

H. MAINTENANCE SERVICE
1. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six
months' full maintenance by skilled employees of revolving door entrance
Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 2|P a g e Section: 08 42 33
Amazon – Revolving Door Entrances.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required

for proper revolving door entrance operation at rated speed and capacity.
Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and
installation of original equipment.
2. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: From Installer to Owner, in the form of a
standard yearly maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance
service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for
agreement period and for future renewal options.
a. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal
working hours.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 REVOLVING DOOR ENTRANCES

A. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage of 1.25 cfm/sq. ft. (6.4 Us x sq. m) of wing
area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure
difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).
B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C},
material surfaces.
C. Windborne-Debris-lmpact Resistance: Provide exterior glazing that passes
enhanced-protection testing requirements in ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 1 when
tested using the large-missile test according to ASTM E 1886. Test specimens shall
be no smaller in width and length than glazing indicated for use on the Project and
shall be installed in same manner as glazing indicated for use on the Project.

2.2 AUTOMATIC REVOLVING DOOR ENTRANCES

A. Description: Provide manufacturer's standard four-wing automatic revolving door
entrance, complete with core, speed-control unit, wings, enclosure walls, canopy,
hardware, glass and glazing, activation devices, safety devices, and accessories as
indicated.
1. Powered Speed-Control Unit: Provide an electric or electrohydraulic speed
regulator to permit automatic rotation of wings. Unit shall allow for manual
operation when power is off. Furnish power-operation equipment to suit current
characteristics of building electrical service.
a. Location: Recessed, floor mounted.
b. Fold-to-Side Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard overhead carriage, guide
support track, pivot mechanism, and other components necessary to permit
folded wings to be moved to one side of revolving door entrance enclosure.
2. Manual-Push Activation: Pushing wing activates unit and maintains rotation of
wings for manufacturer's standard preset time.
a. Combination Motion-Presence Detectors: Self-contained, one-piece units
consisting of both motion and presence detectors in a single metal or plastic
housing adjustable to provide detection-field sizes, patterns, and functions
required by BHMA A156.10. Mount on both sides of canopy fascia.
b. Photoelectric Beams: Pulsed infrared, sender-receiver assembly recessed in
canopy ceiling.
c. Control Mats: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick, synthetic-rubber or flexible-plastic

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 3|P a g e Section: 08 42 33
Amazon – Revolving Door Entrances.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

mat in safety-ribbed surface pattern, with extruded-aluminum frame; with

pressure switches for low-voltage control wiring; and complying with
performance requirements in BHMA A156.10 including Appendix A.
1. Color: Match Architect's sample.
2. Frame: Recessed to fit flush with floor; with concealed anchors
d. Push-Plate Switch: Momentary-contact control switch with flat stainless-
steel push plate engraved with message "Push to Open."
1. Mounting: Recess mounted, semi flush in wall on right-hand side of
opening.
e. Push-Button Switch: Momentary-contact control switch with one red-button
actuator. Provide blue plastic cover engraved with message "Press to Open"
in white letters.
1. Mounting: Recess mounted, semi flush in wall on right-hand side of
opening.
f. Key Switch: Recess-mounted control switch with key-controlled actuator
and enclosed in 2-by-4-inch (50-by-100-mm) junction box. Provide
faceplate engraved with letters indicating switch functions.
1. Functions: On-off, momentary contact.
2. Mounting: Recess mounted, semi flush in wall on right-hand side of
opening.
3. Stile-and-Rail Wings: Manufacturer's standard with 1-3/4-inch- (45-mm-)
thick tubular stile-and-rail members.
a. Stile Design: Medium stile, 3-1/2-inch (89-mm) nominal width.
b. Rail Design: 4-inch (102-mm) nominal height.
c. Glass: Clear, fully tempered float glass.
1. Thickness: 8 mm.
4. Push Bars: Manufacturer's standard push bars, finished to match wings.
a. Shape: Manufacturer's standard.
5. Locks: Manufacturer's standard deadbolt locks to receive cylinders; minimum
of two for each revolving door entrance.
a. Cylinders: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Door
Hardware."
b. Mounting: Mortised.
c. Location: Extend bolt from bottom of wing into base of wall enclosure.
6. Enclosure Walls: Manufacturer's standard, with 1-3/4-inch- (45-mm-) thick
tubular framing members.
a. Configuration: Curved.
b. Glass: Clear, fully tempered float glass.
1. Thickness: 8 mm.
7. Canopy: Manufacturer's standard ceiling, fascia, roof, and framing with
size, layout, materials, and exposed finishes matching enclosure walls unless
otherwise indicated.
a. Metal: Fabricate from minimum 0.125-inch- (3.18-mm-) thick, aluminum
sheet. Provide ceiling access panels for repairs to or maintenance of
speed-control units.
b. Glass: Clear laminated glass ceiling with two plies of float glass
separated by an interlayer.
1. Thickness: Two 6-mm-thicklites.
c. Ceiling lights: Manufacturer's standard, consisting of two recessed light
fixtures within the ceiling of the revolving door entrance enclosure,

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 4|P a g e Section: 08 42 33
Amazon – Revolving Door Entrances.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

complete with lamps and translucent lenses.

d. Canopy Roof: Manufacturer's standard, of material and finish matching
enclosure walls where visible.
8. Floors: Extend adjacent flooring material specified in Division 09 into
enclosure as indicated on Drawings.
a. Recessed Grilles: Provide grille at entry quadrant only. Fabricate, using
welded joints, from minimum 1/4-inch-wide by 1-inch-tall (6-mm-wide by
25-mm-tall), concentrically curved metal bar stock with 1/4-inch (6-mm)
spacing. Finish to match wings.
9. Safety Devices: Manufacturer's standard safety devices as required to stop
or slow rotation. Provide the following:
a. Emergency Stop Button: Momentary contact, red push-button switch to
immediately stop wing rotation and reverse direction to entry position].
Provide sign indicating
"Emergency Stop."
1. Mounting: Recess mounted, semi flush in wall on right-hand side of
opening.
B. Materials: Stainless-steel-clad, extruded aluminum.
1. Main Extrusions and Tubing: Minimum wall thickness of 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
2. Cladding: Minimum 0.04 inch (1.0 mm) thick.
C. Fabrication: Fabricate revolving door entrance components to designs, sizes,
thicknesses, and configurations indicated with profiles that are sharp, straight, and
free of defects or deformations. Accurately fit joints with ends coped or mitered to
produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Pre-fit all hardware at the factory.
Provide anchorage and alignment brackets for concealed support of assembly from
the building structure.
1. Wings: Factory fabricated and assembled in profiles indicated. Reinforce as
required to support imposed loads and for installing hardware.
a. Glaze wings at the factory. Comply with glazing requirements specified in
this Section and in Division 08 Section "Glazing." Provide minimum
clearances for thickness and type of glass indicated according to GANA's
"Glazing Manual."
b. Provide sliding weather stripping, mortised into stiles and rails of
wings, to be adjustable and replaceable without dismantling wings.
c. Welded Construction: Weld reinforcement firmly in place. Weld corners.
Grind and polish welds to produce an invisible joint. Mechanically finish
exposed surfaces after fabrication to eliminate surface blemishes caused by
welding, rolling, bending, and forming.
2. Enclosure Walls and Ceilings: Fabricate tubular and channel frame
assemblies in configuration indicated, with welded or mechanical joints,
according to manufacturer's standards and as specified. Provide subframes
as required for a complete system to support required loads.
a. Exterior Framing: Fabricate components to drain water passing joints and
condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the
exterior.
Provide anchorage and alignment brackets for concealed support of
assembly from the building structure. Allow for thermal expansion of
exterior units.
D. Aluminum Finishes: Clear anodic.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 5|P a g e Section: 08 42 33
Amazon – Revolving Door Entrances.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

E. Stainless-Steel Finishes: No. 4.

2.3 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use
and finish indicated.
1. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
2. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, austenitic stainless steel, [Type 304]
[Type 316].
C. Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Bars; Bronze: ASTM B 36/B 36M, alloy UNS No. C28000
metal, 60 percent copper).
D. Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M plate, shapes, and bars; or ASTM A 1008/A 1008M sheet.
E. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, of same basic metal as fastened metal, unless
otherwise indicated.
F. Glazing Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
G. Weather Stripping: Heavy-duty, single-piece rubber or combination of rubber and felt.
H. Non shrink, Nonmetallic Grout Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, no
staining grout; complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M; of consistency
suitable for application.
I. Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil
(0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound
free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
J. Lacquer for Copper Alloys: Clear, acrylic lacquer specially developed for coating
copper-alloy products.

2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Finish revolving door entrance components to match adjacent curtain wall or shopfront.

2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Clear Anodic Finish: MMA 611, M-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

2.6 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES

A. General: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. Grind
and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish
indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.
B. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
C. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded
foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 6|P a g e Section: 08 42 33
Amazon – Revolving Door Entrances.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline
joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints
watertight.
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action
by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape
recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion
by painting contact surfaces with corrosion-resistant coatings.
B. Recessed, Floor-Mounted Speed-Control Unit: Insert control unit in rough-in floor
opening set on level bed of non-shrink, nonmetallic grout. Fill annular space
between control unit and sides of recess with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout. Mix and
place grout to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Connect speed-control unit to electrical power distribution system as specified
in Division 26 Sections.
C. Install revolving door entrances according to manufacturer's written instructions,
plumb and true, without warp or rack of framing members and wings. Anchor
securely in place.
1. Install surface-mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent
possible.
2. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring
within framing members, and moisture migrating within the assembly to
exterior.
3. Cut and trim framing during installation only with approval of manufacturer.
• Restore finish and remove and replace members, as directed, where
cutting and trimming have impaired strength or appearance.
• Do not install members that are warped, bowed, deformed, or otherwise
damaged or defaced to such an extent as to impair strength or appearance.
Remove and replace members that have been damaged during installation.
D. Activation and Safety Devices: Adjust devices to provide detection field and functions
indicated.
E. Sealants: Comply with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants"
to provide weathertight installation.
1. Set continuous sill members and flashings in full sealant bed.
2. Seal perimeter of framing members with sealant.

3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust wings to provide an even, tight fit at contact points and weather stripping

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 7|P a g e Section: 08 42 33
Amazon – Revolving Door Entrances.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Adjust wings to operate smoothly
and rotate evenly, with hardware and operators functioning properly.
1. Lubricate operating hardware and other moving parts.
2. Adjust speed-control unit for specified rpm.
3. Adjust pressure for collapse of wings for specified breakaway force.
B. Readjust wings and speed-control units after repeated operation of completed
installation equivalent to three days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles).
Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean glass and aluminum surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess
glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Repair damaged finish to
match original finish.
B. Limit construction traffic during remainder of construction period.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain revolving door entrances. Refer to
Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

END OF SECTION 08 42 33

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 8|P a g e Section: 08 42 33
 Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 08 43 13: ALUMINUM FRAME SHOPFRONTS

Prepared By

Year 2022

Rev. 00
Amazon – Aluminum frame shopfronts.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTION: 08 43 13

ALUMINUM FRAME SHOPFRONTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDS

A. Aluminum-framed shopfront, with vision glass.
B. Aluminum doors and frames.
C. Weatherstripping.
D. Door hardware.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AAMA 501.2 - Field Check of Metal Shopfronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing
Systems for Water Leakage; American Architectural Manufacturers Association;
2009 (part of MMA 501).
B. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural
Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012.
C. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test
Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions
and Panels; 2011.
D. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008.
E. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings
on Iron and Steel Products; 2012.
F. ASTM 8209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and
Plate; 2010.
G. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2010.
H. ASTM 8221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded
Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2012.
I. ASTM 8221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded
Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2012.
J. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage
Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure
Differences Across the Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012).
K. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior
Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure
Difference; 2002 (Reapproved 2010).
L. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,
Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000
(Reapproved 2009).

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 1|P a g e Section: 08 43 13
Amazon – Aluminum frame shopfronts.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

M. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic");

Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004).

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SHOPFRONT
A. Aluminum-Framed Shopfront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum
framing members with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment
devices.
1. Glazing Position: Centered (front to back).
2. Vertical Mullion Dimensions: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Water Leakage Test Pressure Differential: 575 Pa.
4. Air Infiltration Test Pressure Differential: 300 Pa.
5. Finish: High performance organic coating.
6. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standards.

B. Performance Requirements:
1. Design and size components to withstand the specified toad requirements without
damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330, using
loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load.
a. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in
any direction, with full recovery of glazing materials.
2. Movement: Accommodate movement between shopfront and perimeter
framing and deflection of lintel, without damage to components or
deterioration of seals.
3. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.3 Us/sq m of wall
area, measured at specified differential pressure across assembly in accordance
with ASTM E283.
4. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage
network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel,
and migrating moisture occurring within system.
5. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system
components caused by cycling temperature range of 95 degrees Cover a 12 hour
period without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages,
and other building elements.

2.2 COMPONENTS
A. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with
interior section insulated from exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage
system.
1. Glazing stops: Applied.
2. Structurally Reinforced Members: Extruded aluminum with internal
reinforcement of structural steel member.
B. Infill Panels: Insulated, aluminum sheet face and back, with edges formed to fit
glazing channel and sealed.
1. Finish: Same as shopfront.
C. Doors: Glazed aluminum.
1. Thickness: 43 mm.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 2|P a g e Section: 08 43 13
Amazon – Aluminum frame shopfronts.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

2. Top Rail: 100 mm wide.

3. Vertical Stiles: 115 mm wide.
4. Bottom Rail: 152 mm wide.
5. Glazing Stops: Square.
6. Finish: Same as shopfront.

2.3 MATERIALS
A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).
B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M).
C. Structural Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M; galvanized in accordance with
requirements of ASTM A123/A123M.
D. Fasteners: Stainless steel.
E. Glass: As specified in Section 08 80 00.
F. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air
infiltration requirements.
G. Glazing Accessories: As specified in Section 08 80 00.
H. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, zinc rich.

2.4 FINISHES
A. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic
coating or AAMA 612 clear anodic coating with electrolytically deposited organic
seal; not less than 0.018 mm thick.
B. Superior Performance Organic Coating System: AAMA 2605 multiple coat,
thermally cured polyvinylidene fluoride system .
C. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
D. Touch-Up Materials: As recommended by coating manufacturer for field application.

2.5 HARDWARE
A. Weatherstripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable; provide on all doors.
B. Sill Sweep Strips: Resilient seal type, retracting, of neoprene; provide on all doors.
C. Threshold: Extruded aluminum, one piece per door opening, ribbed surface;
provide on all doors.

2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around
perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of
perimeter seal.
B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and
weatherproof.
C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors.
D. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or
dissimilar metals with bituminous paint.
E. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 3|P a g e Section: 08 43 13
Amazon – Aluminum frame shopfronts.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

F. Reinforce components internally for door hardware.

G. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads.
H. Finishing: Apply factory finish to all surfaces that will be exposed in completed
assemblies.
1. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is
visible in
completed assemblies, including joint edges.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction
tolerances and other irregularities.
C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building
structure.
D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly
dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work.
E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.
F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight
dam.
G. Where fasteners penetrate sill flashings, make watertight by seating and sealing
fastener heads to sill flashing.
H. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials.
I. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain
continuity of thermal barrier.
J. Install hardware using templates provided.
K. Install glass and infill panels in accordance with Section 08 80 00, using
glazing method required to achieve performance criteria.
L. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that
cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

3.2 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1.5 mm/m non-cumulative or 1.5 mm/3 m,
whichever is less.
B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 0.8 mm.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for independent testing and
inspection requirements. Inspection will monitor quality of installation and
glazing.
B. Test installed shopfront for water leakage in accordance with AAMA 501.2.

3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating hardware and sash for smooth operation.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 4|P a g e Section: 08 43 13
Amazon – Aluminum frame shopfronts.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

3.5 CLEANING
A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.
B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with
soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces
clean.
C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer.

3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction.

END OF SECTION 08 43 13

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 5|P a g e Section: 08 43 13
 Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 08 44 13: GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS

Prepared By

Year 2022

Rev. 00
Amazon – Glazed aluminum curtain walls.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTION: 08 44 13

GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDS

A. Aluminum-framed curtain wall, with vision glazing and glass and metal infill panels.
B. Associated louvers.
C. Perimeter sealant.
D. Firestopping between curtain wall and edge of floor slab.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

E. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Weld plates embedded in concrete for
attachment of anchors.
F. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing: Steel attachment members.
G. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Steel attachment devices.
H. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Firestop at system junction with structure.
I. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials.
J. Section 08 42 29 - Automatic Entrances.
K. Section 08 42 33 - Revolving Door Entrances.
L. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum from Shop to
Site; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012.
B. AAMA 501.1 - Standard Test Method for Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and
Doors for Water Penetration Using Dynamic Pressure; American Architectural
Manufacturers Association; 2005.
C. AAMA 501.2 - Field Check of Metal Shopfronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped
Glazing Systems for Water Leakage; American Architectural Manufacturers
Association; 2009 (part of AAMA 501).
D. AAMA 501.4 - Recommended Static Test Method for Evaluating Curtain Wall
and Shopfront Systems Subjected to Seismic and Wind Induced lnterstory Drifts;
2009.
E. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum;
American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012.
F. AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and
Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections;
American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2009.
G. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test
Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and
Panels; 2010.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 1|P a g e Section: 08 44 13
Amazon – Glazed aluminum curtain walls.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

H. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American
Society of Civil Engineers; 2011.
I. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)
Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2012.
J. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet
and Plate; 2010.
K. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2010.
L. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2012.
M. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2012.
N. ASTM C794 - Standard Test Method for Adhesion-in-Peel of Elastomeric Joint
Sealants; 2010.
O. 0. ASTM C1184 - Standard Specification for Structural Silicone Sealants;
2005.
P. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne
Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009.
Q. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage
Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure
Differences Across the Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012).
R. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior
Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure
Difference; 2002 (Reapproved 2010).
S. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,
Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference;
2000 (Reapproved 2009).
T. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2010.
U. ASTM E547 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,
Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential;
2000 (Reapproved 2009).
V. ASTM E1105 - Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water
Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls,
by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2008)
W. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II,
"Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004).
X. SSPC-Paint 25 - Zinc Oxide, Alkyd, Linseed Oil Primer for Use Over Hand
Cleaned Steel, Type I and Type II; Society for Protective Coatings; 1997 (Ed.
2004).

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate with installation of other components that comprise the exterior
enclosure.
B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week before
starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 2|P a g e Section: 08 44 13
Amazon – Glazed aluminum curtain walls.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components
within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glazing and infill, internal
drainage details.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements
and tolerances, affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location
and details, and field welding required.
D. Samples: Submit two samples 300 by 300 mm in size illustrating finished
aluminum surface, glazing, infill panels, glazing materials.
E. Test Reports: Submit results of full-size mock-up testing. Reports of
tests previously performed on the same design are acceptable.
F. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics
and engineering calculations, and identify dimensional limitations.
G. Structural Glazing Adhesive: Submit product data and calculations showing
compliance with performance requirements.
H. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the products supplied meet or exceed
the specified requirements.
Report of field testing for water leakage.
I. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Designer Qualifications: Design structural support framing components under
direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design
of this Work and licensed at the State in which the Project is located.
B. Full-Size Mock-up Testing: Have a specimen representative of project conditions
tested by an independent testing agency for compliance with specified structural
criteria.
C. Manufacturer and Installer: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum
glazing systems with minimum three years of documented experience.

1.7 MOCK-UP
A. Provide 3500 x 5000 mm mock-up including all components occurring on project.
Assemble to illustrate component assembly including glazing materials, weep
drainage system, attachments, anchors, and perimeter sealant.
B. Locate on-site where directed. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
C. Locate off-site where directed. Remove when directed.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10.
B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or
sprayed coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather.
1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 3|P a g e Section: 08 44 13
Amazon – Glazed aluminum curtain walls.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 5 degrees C.

Maintain this minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation.

1.10 WARRANTY
C. Correct defective Work within a five-year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
D. Provide five-year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating
glass units, including inter-pane dusting or misting. Include provision for
replacement of failed units.
E. Provide five-year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of
exterior finish. Include provision for replacement of units with excessive
fading, chalking, or flaking.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CURTAIN WALL
A. Aluminum-Framed Curtain Wall: Factory fabricated, factory finished
aluminum framing members with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and
attachment devices.
1. Outside glazed, with pressure plate and mullion cover, where indicated.
2. Unitized, shop assembly.
3. Vertical Mullion Dimensions: [As indicated on Drawings].
4. Finish: Class I natural anodized.
a. Factory finish all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies.
b. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious
materials or dissimilar metals with bituminous paint.
5. Fabrication: Joints and corners flush, hairline, and weatherproof, accurately
fitted and secured; prepared to receive anchors; fasteners and attachments
concealed from view; reinforced as required for imposed loads.
6. Construction: Eliminate noises caused by wind and thermal movement, prevent
vibration harmonics, and prevent "stack effect" in internal spaces.
7. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage
network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel,
and migrating moisture occurring within system.
B. Structural Performance Requirements: Design and size components to
withstand the following load requirements without damage or permanent set.
1. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of the requirements of ASCE 7.
a. Member Deflection: For spans less than 4115 mm, limit member deflection
to flexure limit of glass in any direction, and maximum of 1/175 of span or
19 mm, whichever is less and with full recovery of glazing materials.
b. Member Deflection: For spans over 4115 mm and less than 12.2 m, limit
member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, and maximum of
1/240 of span plus
6.4 mm, with full recovery of glazing materials.
2. Seismic Loads: Design and size components to withstand seismic loads
and sway displacement in accordance with the requirements of ASCE 7.
3. lnterstory Differential Lateral Movement: Meeting pass/fail criteria of AAMA
501.4, when tested at design displacement of 0.010 times greater adjacent story
height, maximum, and
1.5 times design displacement, through three complete cycles.
4. Movement: Accommodate the following movement without damage to

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 4|P a g e Section: 08 44 13
Amazon – Glazed aluminum curtain walls.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

components or deterioration of seals:

a. Expansion and contraction caused by 82 degrees C surface temperature.
b. Expansion and contraction caused by cycling temperature range of 95
degrees Cover a 12 hour period.
c. Movement of curtain wall relative to perimeter framing.
d. Deflection of structural support framing, under permanent and dynamic loads.
e. Shortening of structural concrete columns.
f. Creep of structural concrete members.
g. lnterstory drift of (To be determined).
h. Mid-span slab edge deflection of (To be determined) mm.
5. Structural Glazing Adhesive: Limit working stress to 138 kPa.
C. Water Penetration Performance Requirements: No uncontrolled water on
indoor face when tested as follows:
1. Test Method: ASTM E331.
2. Test Pressure Differential: 290 Pa.
D. Air Infiltration Performance Requirements:
1. Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.3 Us/sq m of wall area or less,
measured in accordance with ASTM E283.
2. Air Infiltration Test Pressure Differential: 6.24 pounds per square inch.
E. Thermal Performance Requirements:
1. Condensation Resistance Factor: 70, minimum, measured in accordance
with AAMA 1503, using clear 25 mm thick sealed insulating glass.

2.2 COMPONENTS
A. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with
interior section insulated from exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage
system.
B. Infill Panels: 4 mm thick aluminum sheet.
1. Exterior Finish: Class I natural anodized.
C. Operable Sash: Aluminum project-in hopper; finished to match curtain wall; turn
handle latch.
D. Louvers: Extruded aluminum blades and frame, 100 mm deep; fabricated to
eliminate blade flutter.
1. Blades: 45-degree slope with stormproof shape.
2. Finish: Same as curtain wall mullion sections.
1. Aluminum blank-off panel, black color, at rear for field cutting and sizing to suit
mechanical duct attachment.
B. Sun Screens: Shop fabricated, shop finished, extruded aluminum outriggers,
louvers, and fascia, free of defects impairing strength, durability or appearance.
1. Configuration: As indicated on drawings.
2. Louver Type: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Sun Screen Angle: 45 degrees from horizontal.
4. Outrigger Shape: As indicated on Drawings.
5. Design Criteria: Design and fabricate to resist the same loads as curtain wall
system as well as the following loads without failure, damage, or permanent
deflection:
a. Thermal Movement: Plus/minus 3.175 mm, maximum.
6. Sizes: As indicated on drawings.
7. Shop fabricates to the greatest extent possible; disassemble if necessary for

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 5|P a g e Section: 08 44 13
Amazon – Glazed aluminum curtain walls.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

shipping.

2.3 MATERIALS
A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM 8221 (ASTM 8221M).
1. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM 8209 (ASTM B209M).
C. Fasteners: Stainless steel.
D. Firestopping: As specified in Section 07 84 00.
E. Structural Glazing Adhesive: Silicone, neutral cure; formulated specifically for
structural sealant glazing and complying with ASTM C1184.
1. Ultraviolet radiation resistant for 2000 to 4000 micro-watts minimum for 21 days.
2. Adhesion when subjected to ultraviolet radiation through glass in accordance
with ASTM C794 without failure.
3. Minimum adhesion tensile strength of 690 kPa.
4. Tested for compatibility with glazing accessories and weather seal sealant.
F. Weather seal Sealant: Silicone, same type as glazing adhesive.
G. Perimeter Sealant: □As specified in Section 07 90 05.
H. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00.
1. Glass in Exterior Framing: Type insulated glass units.
2. Glass in Interior Framing: Type insulated glass units.
I. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air
infiltration requirements.
J. Glazing Accessories: As specified in Section 08 80 00.
K. Shop and Touch-Up Primer for Steel Components: SSPC-Paint 25, zinc oxide,
alkyd, linseed oil primer.
L. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, zinc rich.

2.4 FINISHES
A. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic
coating or AAMA 612 clear anodic coating with electrolytically deposited organic
seal; not less than 0.018 mm thick.
B. High Performance Organic Finish: AAMA 2604; multiple coats, thermally cured
fluoropolymer system.
C. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work.
B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to
receive work of this section.
C. Verify that anchorage devices have been properly installed and located.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 6|P a g e Section: 08 44 13
Amazon – Glazed aluminum curtain walls.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

tolerances and other irregularities.

C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building
structure.
D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain
assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work.
E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building
insulation.
F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water
tight dam.
G. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials.
H. Install firestopping at each floor slab edge.
I. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain
continuity of thermal barrier.
J. Install louvers and associated flashings.
K. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07 90 05.
L. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components
that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

3.3 TOLERANCES
A Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1.5 mm/m non-cumulative or 12 mm/30 m,
whichever is less.
B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 0.8 mm.
C. Sealant Space Between Curtain Wall Mullions and Adjacent Construction:
Maximum of 19 mm and minimum of 6 mm.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Provide the services of the manufacturer's field representative to observe
installation and make report.
B. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for independent testing
and inspection requirements. Inspection will monitor quality of
installation and glazing.
C. Test installed curtain wall for water leakage in accordance with AAMA 501.2.
D. Replace curtain wall components that have failed field testing and retest until
performance is satisfactory.

3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating sash for smooth operation.

3.6 CLEANING
A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.
B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 7|P a g e Section: 08 44 13
Amazon – Glazed aluminum curtain walls.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe
surfaces clean.
C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer.

3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction.

END OF SECTION 08 44 13

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 8|P a g e Section: 08 44 13
 Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 08 51 13: ALUMINUM WINDOWS

Prepared By

Year 2022

Rev. 00
Amazon – Aluminum windows.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTION: 08 51 13

ALUMINUM WINDOWS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDS

A. Extruded aluminum windows with fixed sash, operating sash, and infill panels.
B. Factory glazing.
C. Operating hardware.
D. Insect screens.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials.
B. Section 08 44 13 - Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls: Operable sash within framing
system.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. MMNWDMNCSA 101/I.S.2/A440 - Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum,
Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors; American Architectural
Manufacturers Association; 2011.
B. MMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation
Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; American Architectural
Manufacturers Association; 2009.
C. MMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum from Shop to Site;
American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012.
D. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings
on Iron and Steel Products; 2012.
E. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and
Plate; 2010.
F. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2010.
G. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded
Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2012.
H. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded
Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2012.
I. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of
Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements;
2009.
J. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage
Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure
Differences Across the Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012).
K. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 1|P a g e Section: 08 51 13
Amazon – Aluminum windows.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure
Difference; 2002 (Reapproved 201O}.
L. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,
Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000
(Reapproved 2009).
M. ASTM E1105 - Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration
of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform or
Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2008)
N. ASTM E1332 - Standard Classification for Rating Outdoor-Indoor Sound Attenuation;
2010a.
O. ASTM F588 - Standard Test Methods for Measuring the Forced Entry Resistance of
Window Assemblies, Excluding Glazing Impact; 2007.
P. FS L-S-125 - Screening, Insect, Nonmetallic; Federal Specifications and Standards;
Revision B, 1972.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in fabrication of
commercial aluminum windows of types required, with not fewer than three years
of experience.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with requirements of MMA CW-10.
B. Protect finished surfaces with wrapping paper or strippable coating during
installation. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to substrate
when exposed to sunlight or weather.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective Work within a five-year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Provide five-year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass
units, including inter-pane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of
failed units.
D. Provide five-year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish.
Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WINDOWS
A. Windows: Tubular aluminum sections, factory fabricated, factory finished,
thermally broken, vision glass, infill panels, related flashings, anchorage and
attachment devices.
A. Frame Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
B. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.5 Us/sq m of wall
area, measured at a specified differential pressure across assembly in accordance

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 2|P a g e Section: 08 51 13
Amazon – Aluminum windows.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

with ASTM E283.

C. Water Infiltration Test Pressure Differential: 718 Pa.
D. Thermal Movement: Resists thermal movement caused by 82.2 degrees C
surface temperature without buckling stress on glass, joint seal failure,
damaging loads on structural elements, damaging loads on fasteners,
reduction in performance or other detrimental effects .
E. Condensation Resistance Factor: 63 minimum.
F. Overall U-value, Including Glazing: 0.45, maximum.
G. Acoustical Performance: ASTM E90 and E1332; STC 31 and OITC 31 (fixed).
H. Life Cycle Requirements: No damage to fasteners, hardware parts or other
components that would render operable windows in operable and not reduction
in air and water infiltration resistance when tested according to MMA 910.
B. Performance Requirements:

1. Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/1.S.2/A440 AW100.

2. Movement Accommodate movement between window and perimeter
framing and deflection of lintel, without damage to components or
deterioration of seals.
3. Condensation Resistance Factor: Measured in accordance with MMA 1503.
4. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 and E 547.
5. Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder
throughout assembly.
6. Forced Entry Resistance: Conform to ASTM F588 requirements for
performance level 10 for window type A.

C. Fixed, Non-Operable Type:

1. Construction: Thermally broken.
Glazing: Single; clear; transparent

D. Out swinging Casement Type:

1. Construction: Thermally broken.
2. Provide screens.
3. Glazing: Single; clear; transparent.
4. Exterior Finish: Superior performance organic coating.
5. Interior Finish: Class I natural anodized.
E. Horizontal Sliding Type:
1. Construction: Thermally broken.
2. Provide screens.
3. Glazing: Single; clear; transparent
4. Exterior Finish: Superior performance organic coating.
5. Interior Finish: Class I natural anodized.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Frames: ------ mm Wide X ----- mm deep profile, of ------- mm thick section, thermally
broken with interior portion of frame insulated from exterior, portion, Flush glass stops of
snap- on type.
B. Sills: 4 mm thick, extruded aluminum; sloped for positive wash; fit under sash leg to 12 mm
beyond wall face; one-piece full width of opening jamb angles to terminate sill end.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 3|P a g e Section: 08 51 13
Amazon – Aluminum windows.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

C. Infill Panel: 4 mm thick aluminum.

D. Insect Screen Frame: Rolled aluminum frame of rectangular sections; fit with adjustable
hardware; nominal size similar to operable glazed unit.
E. Insect Screens: FS L-S-125, woven plastic mesh; 14/18 mesh size.
F. Operable Sash Weatherstripping: Wool pile; permanently resilient, profiled to achieve
effective weather seal.
G. Fasteners: Stainless steel.
H. Glass and Glazing Materials: As specified in Section 08 80 00.
I. Sealant and Backing Materials: As specified in Section 07 90 05.

2.3 MATERIALS
A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper.
B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), 5005 alloy, H12 or H14 temper.
C. Concealed Steel Items: Profiled to suit mullion sections; galvanized in accordance with
ASTM A123/A123M.

2.4 HARDWARE
A. Sash lock: Lever handle with cam lock ; provide pole handle mm long.
B. Operator: Lever action handle fitted to projecting sash arms with limit stops.
C. Projecting Sash Arms: Cadmium plated steel, friction pivot joints with nylon
bearings, removable pivot clips for cleaning.
D. Pulls: Manufacturer's standard type.
E. Bottom Rollers: Stainless steel, adjustable.
F. Limit Stops: Resilient rubber.

2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate components with smallest possible clearances and shim spacing around
perimeter of assembly that will enable window installation and dynamic movement of
perimeter seal.
B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and
weatherproof.
C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices.
D. Arrange fasteners and attachments to ensure concealment from view.
E. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for operating hardware.
F. Provide steel internal reinforcement in mullions as required to meet loading requirements.
G. Provide internal drainage of glazing spaces to exterior through weep holes.
H. Assemble insect screen frames with mitered and reinforced corners. Secure wire mesh
tautly in frame. Fit frame with four, spring loaded steel pin retainers.
I. Double weatherstrip operable units.
J. Factory glaze window units.

2.6 FINISHES
A. Powder-Coated Finish: 60 - 80 micron thick; color and gloss as selected by
Architect from manufacturers' full range of colors.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 4|P a g e Section: 08 51 13
Amazon – Aluminum windows.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready
to receive aluminum windows.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install windows in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install window assembly in accordance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/1.S.2/A440.
C. Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction
tolerances and other irregularities.
D. Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional
tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.
E. Install sill and sill end angles.
F. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building
insulation. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to
maintain continuity of thermal barrier.
G. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air barrier and vapor retarder materials.
H. Install operating hardware not pre-installed by manufacturer.
I. Install glass and infill panels in accordance with requirements specified in Section 08 80
00.
J. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with requirements specified in Section 07 90 05.

3.3 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 1.5 mm/m non-cumulative or 3 mm/3 m,
whichever is less.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test installed windows for compliance with performance requirements for water
penetration, in accordance with ASTM E1105 using uniform pressure and the same
pressure difference as specified for laboratory testing.
1. If any window fails, test additional windows at Contractor's expense.
B. Replace windows that have failed field testing and retest until performance is
satisfactory.

3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and secure weathertight closure.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 5|P a g e Section: 08 51 13
Amazon – Aluminum windows.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

3.6 CLEANING
A. Remove protective material from factory finished aluminum surfaces.
B. Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to sealant and window
manufacturer; rinse and wipe surfaces clean.
C. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to
sealant and window manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 08 51 13

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 6|P a g e Section: 08 51 13
Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 08 71 00: DOOR HARDWARE

Prepared By

Year 2022

Rev. 00
Amazon – Door hardware.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTION: 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDS

A. Hardware for wood, hollow steel, aluminum, and glass doors.
B. Hardware for fire-rated doors.
C. Electrically operated and controlled hardware.
D. Lock cylinders for doors for which hardware is specified in other sections.
E. Thresholds.
F. Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
B. Section 08 42 29 -Automatic Entrances: Power operators.
C. Section 28 13 00 - Access Control: Electronic access control devices.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for
Buildings and Facilities; Final Rule; current edition; (ADA Standards for
Accessible Design).
B. BHMA A156.3 -American National Standard for [Link] Devices; Builders Hardware
Manufacturers Association; 2001 (ANSI/BHMA A156.3).
C. BHMA A156.4 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Closers;
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2000 (ANSI/BHMA
A156.4).
D. BHMA A156.6 -American National Standard for Architectural Door Trim;
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2005 (ANSI/BHMA A156.6).
E. BHMA A156.8 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Overhead Stops
and Holders; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2005
(ANSI/BHMA A156.8).
F. BHMA A156.15 - American National Standard for Release Devices - Closer
Holder, Electromagnetic and Electromechanical; Builders Hardware
Manufacturers Association; 2006 (ANSI/BHMA A156.15).
G. BHMA A156.18 -American National Standard for Materials and Finishes;
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2006 (ANSI/BHMA
A156.18).
H. BHMA A156.31 - Electric Strikes and Frame Mounted Actuators; 2001 (ANSI/BHMA
A156.31).
I. OHi (LOGS) - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel
Doors and Frames; Door and Hardware Institute; 2004.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 1|P a g e Section: 08 71 00
Amazon – Door hardware.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

J. DHI WDHS.3 - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Flush Wood
Doors; Door and Hardware Institute; 1993; also in WDHS-1/WDHS-5 Series, 1996.
K. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2010.
L. LUL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current
edition.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of products onto which door
hardware will be installed
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 DOOR HARDWARE - GENERAL

A. Provide all hardware specified or required to make doors fully functional,
compliant with applicable codes, and secure to the extent indicated.
B. Provide all items of a single type of the same model by the same
manufacturer.
C. Provide products that comply with the following:
1. Applicable provisions of federal, state, and local codes.
2. ADA Standards for Accessible Design.
3. Fire-Rated Doors: NFPA 80.
4. All Hardware on Fire-Rated Doors: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for
the purpose specified and indicated.
5. Hardware for Smoke and Draft Control Doors (Indicated as "S" on
Drawings): Provide hardware that enables door assembly to comply with air
leakage requirements of the applicable code.
6. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as
suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
D. Electrically Operated and/or Controlled Hardware: Provide all power
supplies, power transfer hinges, relays, and interfaces required for proper
operation; provide wiring between hardware and control components and to
building power connection.
E. Finishes: All door hardware the same finish unless otherwise indicated.
1. Primary Finish: Satin chrome plated over nickel on brass or bronze, 626 (approx.
US26D).
2. Secondary Finish: Satin chrome plated over nickel on brass or bronze, 626
(approx. US26D).
a. Use secondary finish in kitchens, bathrooms, and other spaces containing
chrome or stainless-steel finished appliances, fittings, and equipment;
provide primary finish on one side of door and secondary finish on other
side if necessary.
3. Finish Definitions: BHMAA156.18.
4. Exceptions:
a. Where base metal specified to be different, provide finish that is an
appearance equivalent according to BHMA A156.18.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 2|P a g e Section: 08 71 00
Amazon – Door hardware.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

b. Hinges for Fire-Rated Doors: Steel base metal with painted finish.
2.2 HINGES
A. Hinges: Provide hinges on every swinging door.
1. Provide five-knuckle full mortise butt hinges unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide ball-bearing hinges at all doors having closers.
3. Provide hinges in the quantities indicated.
4. Provide non-removable pins on exterior out swinging doors.
5. Where electrified hardware mounted in door leaf, provide power transfer hinges.

2.3 PUSH/PULLS
A. Push/Pulls: Comply with BHMA A156.6.
1. Provide push and pull-on doors not specified to have lockset, latch set, exit
device, or auxiliary lock.
2. On solid doors, provide matching push plate and pull plate on opposite faces.
3. On glazed shopfront doors, provide matching push/pull bars on both faces.

2.4 LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Locks: Provide a lock for every door, unless specifically indicated as not requiring
locking.
1. Hardware Sets indicate locking functions required for each door.
[Link] no hardware set is indicated for a swinging door provide an office lockset.
[Link]: Provide lever handle or pull trim on outside of all locks unless
specifically stated to have no outside trim.
4. Lock Cylinders: Provide key access on outside of all locks unless
specifically stated to have no locking or no outside trim.
5. In door sections, where a lock cylinder referenced to Section 08 71 00 is
specified, furnish and install a mortise lock cylinder keyed to the building
keying system.
B. Lock Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, six-pin standard core.
1. Provide cams and/or tailpieces as required for locking devices required.
C. Keying: Grand master keyed.
D. Latches: Provide a latch for every door that is not required to lock, unless
specifically indicated "push/pull" or "not required to latch".
1. Roller Latches:

2.5 INTERCONNECTED LOCKSETS

2.6 NARROW STILE LOCKS
2.7 FLUSHBOL TS
A. Flush bolts: Lever extension bolts in leading edge of door, one bolt into floor,
one bolt into top of frame.
1. Pairs of Swing Doors: At inactive leaves, provide flush bolts of type as
required to comply with code.
2. Floor Bolts: Provide dustproof strike except at metal thresholds.
B. Manual Flush bolts: Provide lever extensions for top bolt at over-size doors.
C. Self-Latching Flush bolts: Automatically latch upon closing of door; manually
retracted.
D. Automatic Flush bolts: Automatically latch upon closing of door; automatic

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 3|P a g e Section: 08 71 00
Amazon – Door hardware.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

retraction of bolts when active leaf is opened.

2.8 ELECTRIC STRIKES
A. Electric Strikes: Complying with BHMA A156.31 and UL listed as a Burglary-
Resistant Electric Door Strike; style to suit locks.
2.9 EXIT DEVICES
A. Locking Functions: Functions as defined in BHMA A156.3, and as follows:
1. Entry/Exit, Always-Unlocked: Outside lever unlocked, no outside key
access, no latch holdback.
2. Entry/Exit, Free Swing: Key outside retracts latch, latch holdback (dogging)
for free swing
during occupied hours, not fire-rated; outside trim must be specified as lever
or pull.
3. Entry/Exit, Always-Latched: Key outside locks and unlocks lever, no
latch holdback (dogging).
4. Entry/Exit, Always-Locked: Key outside retracts latch bolt but does not
unlock lever, no latch holdback.
5. Exit Only, Secure: No outside trim, no key entry, no latch holdback,
deadlocking latch bolt.
2.1 CLOSERS
A Closers: Complying with BHMA A156.4.
C. Provide surface-mounted, door-mounted closers unless otherwise indicated.
D. Provide a door closer on every exterior door.
E. Provide a door closer on every fire- and smoke-rated door. Spring
hinges are not an acceptable self-closing device unless specifically so
indicated.
F. On pairs of swinging doors, if an overlapping astragal is present, provide
coordinator to ensure the leaves close in proper order.

2.10 STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Stops: Complying with BHMA A156.8; provide a stop for every swinging door,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide wall stops, unless otherwise indicated.
2. If wall stops are not practical, due to configuration of room or
furnishings, provide overhead stop.
3. Stop is not required if positive stop feature is specified for door closer; positive
stop feature of door closer is not an acceptable substitute for a stop unless
specifically so stated.
B. Magnetic Holder/Releases: Complying with BHMA A156.15; fail safe; doors
release to close automatically when electrical current is interrupted; holding force:
111 to 177 N.

2.11 SLIDING AND BIFOLDING DOOR HARDWARE

C. Bifolding Door Hardware: Track, hanger fasteners, guides, and pulls; size track
and hangers according to manufacturer's recommendations for weight of doors.
1. Provide one pull for each pair of panels hinged together.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 4|P a g e Section: 08 71 00
Amazon – Door hardware.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

Bypassing Door Hardware: Track, hanger fasteners, guides, and pulls; size track
D.
and hangers according to manufacturer's recommendations for weight of doors.
1. Provide flush cup pull on each sliding panel.
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work; labeled, fire-rated doors and
frames are present and properly installed, and dimensions are as indicated on shop
drawings.
B. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of
the correct characteristics.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes.
B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.
C. Install hardware on fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with code and NFPA 80.
D. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item:
As listed in Schedule, unless otherwise noted:
1. For steel doors and frames: Comply with OHi "Recommended Locations for
Architectural Hardware for Steel Doors and Frames."
2. For steel doors and frames: See Section 08 11 13.
3. For wood doors: Comply with OHi "Recommended Locations for
Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01 40 00.
B. Provide an Architectural Hardware Consultant to inspect installation and certify that
hardware and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and as specified.

3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 70 00.
B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation.

3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. Clean finished hardware
per manufacturer's instructions after final adjustments has been made. Replace
items that cannot be cleaned to manufacturer's level of finish quality at no
additional cost.

3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01 70 00.
B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 5|P a g e Section: 08 71 00
Amazon – Door hardware.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

PART 4 HARDWARE SETS

4.1 GENERAL
A. These Hardware Sets indicate requirements for single doors of that type, with
conditional requirements for pairs and other situations.
B. Pairs of Swinging Doors: Provide one of each specified item on each leaf unless
specifically stated otherwise. Treat pairs as two active leaves unless otherwise
indicated.
C. HW-CYL: Doors Whose Hardware is Specified in Other Sections But Which Must
Be Keyed To Building System:
1. Lock Cylinder, Mortise, keyed to building system.

4.2 SWING DOORS -- NOT REQUIRING KEY LOCKING

A. HW-1: Push/Pull, Non-Fire-Rated:
1. Closer.
2. Push/Pull.
B. HW-1-Auto: Push/Pull, Automatic, No Locking, Non-Fire-Rated:
1. Power Operator, Power-Assist.
2. Push/Pulls.
3. Actuators, Wall-Mounted, both sides, location as indicated on drawings.
C. HW-2: Latch set, Non-Fire-Rated.
1. Latch set, Passage.
2. Pair: One leaf inactive, with manual flush bolts.
D. HW-2F: Latch set, Fire-Rated (and not fire-rated if closer required):
1. Closer.
2. Latch set, Passage.
3. Pair: One leaf inactive; automatic or self-closing flush bolts as required to
comply with code.
E. HW-3: Roller Latch, Non-Fire-Rated:
1. Dummy Lock Trim, Lever.
2. Roller Latch.
3. Pair: Both leaves active; locate latches at top of frame.
F. HW-6: Exit Device, Always-Unlocked, Normally-Closed, Fire-Rated or Non-Fire-
Rated:
1. Closer.
2. Exit Device, Rim, Entry/Exit, Always-Unlocked.
3. Pair: Removable Mullion, removable only by key.
G. HW-7F: Double-Egress Pair, Fire-Rated, Normally Open:
1. Closer, each leaf.
2. Exit Device, Vertical Rod, Always-Unlocked, each leaf.
3. Holder/Release, Fail-Closed, Magnetic, each leaf, with power supply and
fire alarm interface.
H. HW-8F: Double-Egress Pair, Normally Closed, Fire-Rated:
1. Closer, each leaf.
2. Exit Device, Vertical Rod, Always-Unlocked, each leaf.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 6|P a g e Section: 08 71 00
Amazon – Door hardware.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

I. HW-8F-Auto: Double-Egress Pair, Normally Closed, Automatic, Fire-Rated:

1. Closer, each leaf.
2. Exit Device, Vertical Rod, Always-Unlocked, each leaf.
3. Power Operator, each leaf.
4. Actuators, Wall-Mounted, both sides.

4.3 SLIDING DOORS ·• NO LOCKING

A. HW-SL-1: By-Passing Doors, Non-Fire-Rated:
1. By-Passing Door Track Kit.
2. Flush Cup Pull on each leaf.
B. HW-SL-2: Bi-Folding Doors, Non-Fire-Rated:
1. Bi-Fold Door Track Kit.
2. Pulls on each leading leaf.

4.4 SWING DOORS -- "STORE DOOR" LOCKING FUNCTION

A. Doors with these sets must remain unlocked during business hours and do not
qualify as emergency exits during fully occupied hours.
B. HW-9: Push/Pull, Store Door Locking, To be Unlocked During Business Hours:
1. Closer.
2. Narrow Stile Lock, Entry Deadlatch.
3. Push/Pull.
4. Pair: Specified Narrow Stile Lock on one leaf, manual flush bolts on another leaf.
5.
4.5 SWING DOORS -- LOCKABLE, MAY BE LEFT UNLOCKED, KEY NOT
REQUIRED TO LOCK
A. HW-10: Office, Non-Fire-Rated:
1. Lockset, Office.
2. Pair: One leaf inactive, with manual flush bolts.
B. HW-10F: Office, Fire-Rated or Exterior:
1. Closer.
2. Lockset, Office.
3. Pair: One leaf inactive; automatic or self-closing flush bolts as required to
comply with code. If door fire rating requires astragal, provide coordinator.
C. HW-11: Entrance, Non-Fire-Rated:
1. Lockset.
D. HW-11F: Entrance, Fire-Rated or Exterior.
1. Closer.
2. Lockset.
E. HW-12F: Residential Entry, Interconnected Lock, Fire-Rated, Typically Interior:
1. Closer.
2. Lockset, Interconnected Entrance.
3. Door Viewer, 2 at ADA units.
F. HW-13: Public Entrance, Exit Device, Lockable, Non-Fire-Rated:
1. Closer.
2. Exit Device, Rim, Entry/Exit, Free Swing, lever outside trim.
3. Pair: Surface vertical rod type devices.
G. HW-13-Auto: Public Entrance, Automatic, Exit Device, Lockable, Non-Fire-Rated:

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 7|P a g e Section: 08 71 00
Amazon – Door hardware.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

1. Power Operator.
2. Exit Device, Rim, Entry/Exit, Free Swing, lever outside trim.
3. Actuators, Wall-Mounted, quantity and location as indicated on drawings.
4. Pair: Surface vertical rod type devices.
H. HW-13F: Public Entrance, Exit Device, Lockable, Fire-Rated:
1. Closer.
2. Exit Device, Rim, Entry/Exit, Always-Latched, Lever Outside.

4.6 SWING DOORS -- KEY REQUIRED TO LOCK, MAY BE LEFT UNLOCKED

A. HW-21: Two-Key Entry Lock, Non-Fire-Rated:
1. Lockset, Two-Key Entry.
B. HW-21F: Two-Key Entry Lock, -Fire-Rated:
1. Closer.
2. Lockset, Two-Key Entry.

4.7 SWING DOORS -- MAY NOT BE LEFT UNLOCKED

A. HW-30: Always-Locked, Non-Fire-Rated:
1. Lockset, Always-Locked.
2. Exterior Outswing Doors: Lock Guard.
3. Pair: One leaf inactive, with manual flush bolts.
B. HW-30F: Always-Locked, Fire-Rated and Non-Fire-Rated where Closer is Desired:
1. Closer.
2. Lockset, Always-Locked.
3. Pair: One leaf inactive; automatic or self-closing flush bolts as required to
comply with code. If door fire rating requires astragal, provide coordinator.
C. HW-31: Exit Device, Always-Locked:
1. Closer.
2. Exit Device, Rim, Always-Locked.
3. Pair: Both leaves active; Removable Mullion, removal by key only.

4.8 SWING DOORS -- EXIT ONLY, MAY NOT BE LEFT UNLOCKED

A. HW-40: Exit Only, Self-Closing, Fire-Rated and Non-Fire-Rated:
1. Closer.
2. Lockset, Exit Only.
B. HW-41: Exit Only, Exit Device, Self-Closing, Fire-Rated and Non-Fire-Rated:
1. Closer.
2. Exit Device, Exit Only Secure.
3. Pair: Both leaves active; Removable Mullion, removal by key only.
C. HW-42: Exit Only, Exit Device, Delayed Egress, Self-Closing, Fire-Rated and Non-Fire-
Rated:
1. Closer.
2. Exit Device, Exit Only, Delayed Egress.
3. Pair: Both leaves active; Removable Mullion, removal by key only.

4.9 SWING DOORS -- ELECTRICAL ACCESS CONTROL

A. HW-50: Entry Control, Electric Strike, Fail-Secure, Outswing, Fire-Rated and non-Fire-
Rated:

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 8|P a g e Section: 08 71 00
Amazon – Door hardware.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

1. Card Reader, located where indicated.

2. Closer.
3. Lockset, Always-Locked.
4. Electric Strike, Fail-Secure.
5. Lock Guard.
B. HW-54: Entry & Exit Control, Electrified Exit Device, Fail-Secure, Fire-
Rated and Non-Fire-Rated.
1. Card Reader, Inside and Outside, located where indicated.
2. Closer.
3. Exit Device, Always-Locked, Electric Bolt Retraction, Delayed Egress.
a. Fail-secure, remaining locked with delayed egress deactivated in event of fire
alarm activation or power failure.
b. Pressure on exit device pad will delay egress for 15 seconds and sound alarm,
after which pad depresses and egress is allowed.
a. Entry Control: Upon signal from access control device, outside trim unlocks.
b. Exit Control: At interior, upon signal from access control device
alarm will be bypassed and egress allowed.
2. Pair: One leaf inactive; provide fire-rated self-latching flush bolts on fire-
rated doors, otherwise manual flush bolts.
B. HW-55: After Hours Access Control, Power Assist, Fire-Rated and Non-Fire-Rated:
1. Card Reader, outside, located where indicated.
2. Push Actuators, Wall-Mounted, Inside and Outside, located where indicated.
3. Closer.
4. Exit Device, Rim, Always-Locked, Electric Latch Retraction.
a. Fail-secure, remaining locked in event of fire alarm activation or power
failure.
b. Key entry at all times; free egress by pressing push pad at all times.
c. After Hours Entry Control: Upon signal from access control device, bolts
are retracted allowing entry.
d. Remote Locking: Switch between locked and dogged open activated
from remote location as indicated.
5. Power Operator:
a. Entry Assist: When exit device is dogged open, outside actuator actuates
operator normally. When exit device is locked, interlock between
operator, access control device, and exit device allows operator function
after exit device bolts are retracted.
b. Exit Assist: Pressing actuator releases exit device and activates operator.
6. Pair: Both leaves active; vertical rod exit devices.

END OF SECTION 08 71 00

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 9|P a g e Section: 08 71 00
Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 08 80 00: GLAZING

Prepared By

Year 2022

Rev. 00
Amazon – Glazing.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTION: 08 80 00

GLAZING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDS

A. Glass
B. Glazing compounds and accessories.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and back-up material.

B. Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Glazed doors and borrowed lites.
C. Section 08 42 33 - Revolving Door Entrances.
D. Section 08 83 00 - Mirrors.
E. Section 08 44 13 - Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls.
F. Section 10 28 00 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories: Mirrors.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition.
B. ANSI 297.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in
Buildings, Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test;
2010.
C. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; 2011.
D. ASTM C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets,
Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 2005 (Reapproved 2011).
E. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2011.
F. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011e1.
G. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass--Kind HS, Kind FT
Coated and Uncoated Glass; 2012.
H. ASTM C1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass; 2009e1.
I. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2011a.
J. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; 2012.
K. ASTM E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings;
2009a.
L. ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and
Evaluation; 2010.
M. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2009.
N. GANA (SM) - FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2008.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 1|P a g e Section: 08 80 00
Amazon – Glazing.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

O. GANA (LGDG) - Laminated Glazing Reference Manual; Glass Association of North

America; 2009.
P. SIGMA TM-3000 - Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units; Sealed
Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association; 2004.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting
work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental
characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements.
C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental
characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors.
D. Samples: Submit two samples _300_ x _300_ mm in size of glass and plastic units,
showing coloration and design.
E. Samples: Submit 300 mm long bead of glazing sealant, color as selected.
F. Certificates: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
G. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that - glass meets or exceeds specified requirements.
H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Insulating Glass Units: One of each glass size and each glass type.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

B. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and FGMA Sealant
Manual for glazing installation methods.

1.7 MOCK-UP
C. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional mock-up
requirements.
D. Provide mockup of including glass and air barrier and vapor retarder seal.
E. Locate where directed.
F. Mockup may remain as part of the Work.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

G. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 10 degrees C.
H. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after
installation of glazing compounds.

1.9 WARRANTY
I. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 2|P a g e Section: 08 80 00
Amazon – Glazing.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

J. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Provide a five (5) year warranty to include
coverage for seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, including
replacement of failed units.
K. Laminated Glass: Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for
delamination, including replacement of failed units.
L. Polycarbonate Sheet Glazing (where indicated): Provide a D year warranty to
include coverage for breakage, coating failure, abrasion resistance, including
replacement of failed units.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GLAZING TYPES

A. Type IG-1 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Vision glazing.
1. Application(s): All exterior glazing unless otherwise indicated.
2. Outboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 6 mm thick, minimum.
a. Tint: Bronze.
3. Inboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 6 mm thick, minimum.
a. Tint: Clear.
4. Total Thickness: 25 mm.
B. Type IG-1 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Vision glazing, low-E.
1. Application(s): All exterior glazing unless otherwise indicated.
2. Between-lite space filled with air.
3. Total Thickness: 25 mm.
C. Type IG-2 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Spandrel glazing.
1. Application: Exterior glazing where indicated.
2. Outboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 6 mm thick, minimum.
a. Tint: Clear.
b. Coating: Same as on vision units, on #2 surface.
3. Inboard Lite: Heat-strengthened float glass, 6 mm thick.
a. Tint: Clear.
b. Opacifier: Ceramic frit, on #4 surface.
c. Opacifier Color: (As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range).
4. Total Thickness: 25 mm.
5. Glazing Method: Gasket glazing.
D. Type IG-3 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Safety glazing:
1. Applications: Provide this type of glazing in the following locations:
a. Glazed lites in exterior doors.
b. Glazed sidelights and panels next to doors.
c. Other locations required by applicable federal, state, and local codes and
regulations.
d. Other locations indicated on the drawings.
2. Type: Same as other vision glazing except use fully tempered float glass for both
outboard and inboard lites.
E. Type E-1 - Single Exterior Vision Glazing:
1. Type: Annealed float glass.
2. Tint: Clear.
3. Thickness: 6 mm.
4. Light Transmittance: (As indicated on the drawings) percent, nominal.
5. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: (As indicated on the drawings) percent, nominal.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 3|P a g e Section: 08 80 00
Amazon – Glazing.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

6. Glazing Method: Gasket glazing.

F. Type S-1 - Single Vision Glazing:
1. Applications: All interior glazing unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type: Annealed float glass.
3. Tint: Clear.
4. Thickness: 6 mm.
5. Light Transmittance: (As indicated on the drawings) percent, nominal.
6. Shading Coefficient: (As indicated on the drawings) percent, nominal.
7. Glazing Method: Gasket glazing.
G. Type S-2 - Fire-Rated Safety Glazing:
1. Applications: Provide this type of glazing in the following locations:
a. Glazed lites in fire doors.
b. Fire windows.
c. Sidelights, borrow lites, and other glazed openings in partitions indicated as
having an hourly fire rating.
d. Other locations indicated on the drawings.
2. Fire Rating: As indicated on the drawings.
3. Type: Glass-ceramic safety glazing.
4. Thickness: 6 mm.
H. Type S-3 - Single Safety Glazing: Non-fire-rated.
1. Applications: Provide this type of glazing in the following locations:
a. Glazed lites in doors, except fire doors.
b. Sliding glass doors.
c. Glazed sidelights to doors, except in fire-rated walls and partitions.
d. Glazed view windows and panels in partitions enclosing athletic activity rooms,
except in fire-rated walls and partitions.
e. Other locations indicated on the drawings.
2. Type: Fully tempered float glass as specified.
3. Tint: Clear.
4. Thickness: 6 mm.
5. Light Transmittance: (As indicated on the drawings) percent, nominal.
6. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: (As indicated on the drawings) percent, nominal.
7. Glazing Method: Gasket glazing.
I. Patterned Glass:
1. Application: Locations indicated on the drawings.
2. Position molded surface on inside.
3. Glazing Method: Gasket glazing.
J. Obscure Glazing: Translucent, showing shadows but not forms.
1. Application: Locations indicated on the drawings.
2. Type: Patterned glass, fully tempered.
3. Tint: Clear.
4. Thickness: 6 mm, nominal.
5. Glazing Method: Gasket glazing.
K. Decorative Glazing:
1. Application: Locations indicated on the drawings.
2. Type: Interior Glazing Heavy Flow Glass.
a. Tint: Ultra Clear {Low Iron).
b. Tint: Clear (None).
c. Type: Fully tempered.
3. Type: Back-painted low-iron ultra-transparent float glass.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 4|P a g e Section: 08 80 00
Amazon – Glazing.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

4. Type: Translucent float glass made with uniformly etched surface.

5. Type: Etched float glass, fully tempered.
6. Tint: Clear.
7. Thickness: 6 mm, nominal.
8. Glazing Method: Gasket glazing.
L. Plastic Sheet Glazing:
1. Type: Monolithic polycarbonate sheet.
2. Tint: Clear.
3. Thickness: 6 mm.

2.2 EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES

A. Structural Design Criteria: Select type and thickness to withstand dead loads and
wind loads acting normal to plane of glass at design pressures calculated in
accordance with IBC 2009 code.
1. Use the procedure specified in ASTM E1300 to determine glass type and
thickness.
2. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, whichever is less, with
full recovery of glazing materials.
3. Thicknesses listed are minimum.

2.3 GLASS MATERIALS

A Float Glass Manufacturers:
1. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Float Glass: All glazing is to be float glass unless otherwise indicated.
1. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality 03
(glazing select).
2. Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C1048.
3. Tinted Types: Color and performance characteristics as indicated.
4. Thicknesses: As indicated; for exterior glazing comply with specified
requirements for wind load design regardless of specified thickness.
C. Glass-Ceramic Safety Glazing: UL- or WH-listed as fire-protection-rated
glazing and complying with 16 CFR 1201 test requirements for Category II
without the use of a surface-applied film.
D. Patterned Glass: Cast or molded glass.

2.4 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS

A. Manufacturers:
1. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated.
1. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM
E2190.
2. Edge Spacers: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners.
3. Edge Seal: Glass to elastomer with supplementary silicone sealant.
4. Purge inter pane space with dry hermetic air.

2.5 PLASTIC SHEET GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Polycarbonate Sheet: Ultraviolet stabilized.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 5|P a g e Section: 08 80 00
Amazon – Glazing.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

2.6 GLAZING COMPOUNDS

A. Manufacturers:
1. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Silicone Sealant (Type _): Single component; neutral curing; capable of water
immersion without loss of properties; non-bleeding, non-staining; ASTM C
920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; cured Shore A hardness of
15 to 25; ------------ color

2.7 GLAZING ACCESSORIES

A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM

C864 Option I. Length of 25 mm for each square meter of glazing or
minimum 100 mm x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1.5 mm x height
to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.
B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C
864 Option I. Minimum 75 mm long x one half the height of the glazing stop
x thickness to suit application, self-adhesive on one face.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of
obstructions that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and
ready to receive glazing.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or
sealer.
C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.
D. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193 and FGMA Sealant Manual.
E. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.3 GLAZING METHODS

3.4 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR/INTERIOR DRY METHOD (GASKET GLAZING)

A. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 150 mm from
corners.
B. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient
pressure on gasket to attain full contact.
C. Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 6|P a g e Section: 08 80 00
Amazon – Glazing.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

continuous contact.

3.5 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR BUTT GLAZED METHOD (SEALANT ONLY)

A Temporarily brace glass in position for duration of glazing process. Mask edges
of glass at adjoining glass edges and between glass edges and framing members.
B. Temporarily secure a small diameter non-adhering foamed rod on back side of joint.
C. Apply sealant to open side of joint in continuous operation; thoroughly fill the
joint without displacing the foam rod. Tool the sealant surface smooth to
concave profile.
D. Permit sealant to cure then remove foam backer rod. Apply sealant to opposite
side, tool smooth to concave profile.
E. Remove masking tape.

3.6 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A Glass and Glazing product manufacturers to provide field surveillance of the
installation of their products.
B. Monitor and report installation procedures and unacceptable conditions.

3.7 CLEANING
A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
B. Remove labels after Work is complete.
C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.

3.8 PROTECTION
A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste;
do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units.

END OF SECTION 08 80 00

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 7|P a g e Section: 08 80 00
Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 08 83 00: MIRROR

Prepared By

Year 2022

Rev. 00
Amazon – Mirrors.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTION: 08 83 00

MIRRORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDS

A. Glass mirrors

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 10 28 00 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories: Metal-framed mirrors.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

B. ANSI 297.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in
Buildings, Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 2010.
C. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2011.
D. ASTM C1036- Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011e1.
E. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2011a.
F. ASTM C1503 - Standard Specification for Silvered Flat Glass Mirror: 2008.
G. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America: 2009.
H. GANA (SM) - FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2008.
I. GANA (TIPS) - Mirrors Handle with Extreme Care: Tips For the Professional on
the Care and Handling of Mirrors: National Association of Mirror Manufacturers:
2004 ([Link]

1.4 SUBMITTALS
J. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
K. Product Data on Mirror Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental
characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements.
L. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and
environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements.
Identify available colors.
M. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that mirrors, meets or exceeds specified
requirements.
N. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been
completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
O. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of
project.
1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 1|P a g e Section: 08 83 00
Amazon – Mirrors.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

P. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual for glazing installation
methods.
Q. Fabricate, store, transport, receive, install, and clean mirrors in
accordance with recommendations of GANA (TIPS) "Mirrors Handle
with Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of
Mirrors."

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS

R. Do not install mirrors when ambient temperature is less than 10 degrees C.
S. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after
installation of glazing compounds.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Mirrors:
Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Mirror Glass - General: Select materials and/or provide supports as required to
limit mirrored glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass with full recovery
of glazing materials, whichever is less.
B. Mirror Glass: Clear float type with copper and silver coating, organic
overcoating, arise edges, 6 mm thick minimum.
1. Sizes noted on Drawings.
C. Mirror Glass: ASTM C1036, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality 01
{mirror select); silvering, protective coating and physical characteristics
complying with ASTM C1503; 6 mm minimum thick.
1. Sizes noted on Drawings.

2.3 GLAZING COMPOUNDS

A Manufacturers:
B. Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M and A; single
component; chemical curing; non-bleeding, non-staining, cured Shore A hardness of
15 to 25; (As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range) color.
2.4 GLAZING ACCESSORIES
A Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness.
B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness.
C. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing
device; 10 to 15 Shore A durometer hardness; on release paper.
D. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.
E. Mirror Attachment Accessories: Stainless steel clips.
F. Mirror Adhesive: Chemically compatible with mirror coating and wall substrate.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 2|P a g e Section: 08 83 00
Amazon – Mirrors.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that openings for mirrored glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions,
and ready to receive mirrors.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or
sealer. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.
C. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193 for solvent release
sealants. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install mirrors in accordance with GANA recommendations.
B. Set mirrors plumb and level, free of optical distortion.
C. Set mirrors with edge clearance free of surrounding construction including
countertops or backsplashes.
D. Installation in Frames:
1. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1.6 mm
above sight
line.
2. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 150 mm from
corners.
[Link] mirrors on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at
perimeter of pane or unit.
4. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of mirrors in same manner described above.
5. Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on
tape for full continuous contact.
6. Knife trim protruding tape.
E. Frameless Mirrors: Set mirrors with adhesive, applied in accordance with
adhesive manufacturer's instructions.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove wet glazing materials from finish surfaces.
B. Remove labels after work is complete.
C. Clean mirrors and adjacent surfaces.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste.

END OF SECTION 08 83 00

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 3|P a g e Section: 08 83 00
Amazon – Table of Contents – Finishes.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

TABLE OF CONTENTS

ARCHITECTURAL WORKS

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

Section No.
Descriptions

09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

09.22 36.23 METAL LATH
09 24 00 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
09 30 00 TILING
09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
09 63 40 STONE FLOORING
09 64 23 WOOD PARQUET FLOORING
09 68 00 CARPETING
09 68 13 TILE CARPETING
09 69 00 ACCESS FLOORING
09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING
09 96 50 EPOXY WALL COATINGS

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |1 TOC
 Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 09 21 16: GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

Prepared By

Year 2022

Rev. 00
Amazon – Gypsum board assemblies.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTIION: 09 21 16

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDS

A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies.
B. Metal stud wall framing.
C. Metal channel ceiling framing.
D. Acoustic insulation.
E. Gypsum sheathing.
F. Cementitious backing board.
G. Gypsum wallboard.
H. Joint treatment and accessories.
I. Acoustic (sound-dampening) wall and ceiling board.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Exterior wind-load-bearing metal stud
framing.
B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Building framing and sheathing.
C. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution
requirements.
D. Section 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation: Acoustic insulation.
E. Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers: Water-resistive barrier over sheathing.
F. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Top-of-wall assemblies at fire rated walls.
G. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Acoustic sealant.
H. Section 09 22 16 - Non-Structural Metal Framing.
I. Section 09 30 00 - Tile: Tile backing board.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AISI SG02-1 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed
Steel Structural Members; American Iron and Steel Institute; 2001 with 2004
supplement. (Replaced SG-971)
B. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard for Interior Installation of
Cementitious Backer Units; 2011.
C. ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and
Specifications for Cernentitious Backer Units; 2011.
D. ASTM C208 - Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board; 2008a.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 1|P a g e Section: 09 21 16
Amazon – Gypsum board assemblies.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

E. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape
for Finishing Gypsum Board; 2002 (Reapproved 2007).
F. ASTM C557 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum
Wallboard to Wood Framing; 2003 {Reapproved 2009) e1.
G. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members;
2011a.
H. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal
Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012.
I. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members
to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2011.
J. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board;
2011.
K. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application
of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in.
(0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. {2.84 mm) in Thickness; 2011.
L. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws
for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood
Studs or Steel Studs; 2007.
M. ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum
Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base; 2010a.
N. ASTM C1278/C1278M - Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced
Gypsum Panel; 2007a (Reapproved 2011).
O. ASTM C1288 - Standard Specification for Discrete Non-Asbestos Fiber-
Cement Interior Substrate Sheets; 1999 (Reapproved 2010).
P. ASTM C1325 - Standard Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat
Reinforced Cement Substrate Sheets; 2008b.
Q. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2011.
R. ASTM C1629/C1629 - Standard Classification for Abuse-Resistant
Nondecorated Interior Gypsum Panel Products and Fiber-Reinforced Cement
Panels; 2006.
S. ASTM C1658/C1658M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum
Panels; 2012.
T. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on
the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2012.
U. ASTM E72 - Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels
for Building Construction; 2010.
V. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials; 2012.
W. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of
Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements;
2009.
X. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2010.
Y. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum
Association; 2010.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 2|P a g e Section: 09 21 16
Amazon – Gypsum board assemblies.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

Z. GA-226 - Application of Gypsum Board to Form Curved Surfaces; Gypsum

Association; 2008.
AA. AA. UL (FRO) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.;
current edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate special details associated with fireproofing, acoustic
seals, and control joints.
C. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, and
joint finishing system.
D. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure
connectors, showing compliance with requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216.
B. Interior Partitions Indicated as Acoustic: Provide completed assemblies
with the following characteristics:
1. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 45-49 calculated in accordance with ASTM
E413, based on
tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.
C. Shaft Walls at HVAC Shafts: Provide completed assemblies with the
following characteristics:
1. Air Pressure Within Shaft Sustained loads of 0.24 kPa with maximum mid-span
deflection of U240
2. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 35-39 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413,
based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.
D. Shaft Walls at Elevator Shafts: Provide completed assemblies with the
following characteristics:
1. Air Pressure Within Shaft: Intermittent loads of 0.24 kPa with maximum mid-
span deflection of L/240.
2. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 35-39 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413,
based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.
E. Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies with the following
characteristics:
1. Fire Rated Partitions: UL listed assembly No._______; hour rating.
2. Head of Fire Rated Partitions: UL listed assembly No._______; hour rating.
3. Fire Rated Area Separation Walls: UL listed assembly No._______; hour rating.
4. UL Assembly Numbers: Provide construction equivalent to that listed for the
particular assembly in the current UL Fire Resistance Directory.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 3|P a g e Section: 09 21 16
Amazon – Gypsum board assemblies.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

2.2 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet
steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing
indicated, with maximum deflection of wall framing of U240 at 240 Pa.
1. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces.
2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs.
3. Ceiling Channels: C shaped.
4. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 22 mm.
5. Resilient Furring Channels: 12 mm depth, for attachment to substrate
through one leg only.
B. Shaft Wall Studs and Accessories: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and
properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 and specified performance
requirements.
C. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required.
D. Partition Head to Structure Connections: Provide track fastened to structure with legs
of sufficient length to accommodate deflection, for friction fit of studs cut short and
fastened as indicated on drawings

2.3 BOARD MATERIALS

A. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM
C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Glass-mat-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1658/C1658M,
suitable for paint finish, of the same core type and thickness may be
substituted for paper-faced board.
3. Unfaced fiber-reinforced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1278/C1278M,
suitable for paint finish, of the same core type and thickness may be substituted
for paper-faced board.
4. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
a. Mold-resistant board is required whenever board is being installed before
the building is enclosed and conditioned.
b. Mold-resistant board is required at all locations.
5. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested
assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed.
6. Thickness:
Vertical Surfaces: 13 mm
a. Ceilings: 13 mm.
b. Multi-Layer Assemblies: Thicknesses as indicated on drawings.
B. Impact-Rated Wallboard: Tested to Level 3 soft-body and hard-body impact in
accordance with
ASTM C1629.
1. Application: High-traffic areas indicated.
2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
3. Paper-Faced Type: Gypsum wallboard as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M.
4. Unfaced Type: Interior fiber-reinforced gypsum panels as defined
in ASTM C1278/C1278M.
5. Type: Fire-resistance rated Type X, UL or WH listed.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 4|P a g e Section: 09 21 16
Amazon – Gypsum board assemblies.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

6. Thickness: 16 mm.
7. Edges: Tapered.
C. Backing Board For Wet Areas: One of the following products:
1. Application: Surfaces behind tile in wet areas including tub and shower surrounds,
shower
ceilings, and _
2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
3. ANSI Cement-Based Board: Non-gypsum-based; aggregated Portland cement
panels with glass fiber mesh embedded in front and back surfaces complying
with ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C1325.
a. Thickness: 12.7 mm.
4. ASTM Cement-Based Board: Non-gypsum-based, cementitious board
complying with ASTM C1288.
a. Thickness: 12.7 mm.
D. Backing Board for Non-Wet Areas: Water-resistant gypsum backing board as
defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimum joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Application: Vertical surfaces behind thinnest tile, except in wet areas.
2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
3. Type: Regular and Type X, in locations indicated.
4. Type X Thickness: 16 mm.
5. Regular Board Thickness: 13 mm.
6. Edges: Tapered.
E. Ceiling Board: Special sag-resistant gypsum ceiling board as defined in ASTM
C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Application: Ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Thickness: 13 mm.
3. Edges: Tapered.
F. Acoustical Sound Dampening Wall and Ceiling Board: Two layers of heavy paper
faced, high density gypsum board separated by a viscoelastic polymer layer and
capable of achieving STC rating of 50 or more in typical stud wall assemblies as
calculated in accordance with ASTM E413 and when tested in accordance with
ASTM E90.
1. Thickness: 13 mm.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
3. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
G. Acoustical Fiberboard: ASTM C208 cellulosic fiberboard without facing or
coating; square edged.
1. Thickness: 13 mm.
2. In 1-Hour Fire-Rated Partitions: UL listed for assembly used.

2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced.
Water-Resistive Barrier: As specified in Section 07 25 00.
B. Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer
for project conditions.
C. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members Less Than 0.7 mm In Thickness, to Wood
Members, and to Gypsum Board: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping type;
cadmium-plated for exterior locations.
D. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members From 0.8 to 2.8 mm in Thickness: ASTM

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 5|P a g e Section: 09 21 16
Amazon – Gypsum board assemblies.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

C954; steel drill screws for application of gypsum board to loadbearing steel studs.
E. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type
and size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place.
F. Adhesive for Attachment to Wood: ASTM C557.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.

3.2 SHAFT WALL INSTALLATION

A. Shaft Wall Framing: Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
1. Install studs at spacing required to meet performance requirements.
B. Shaft Wall Liner: Cut panels to accurate dimension and install sequentially
between special friction studs.

3.3 FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated.
C. Studs: Space studs as permitted by standard.
1. Extend partition framing to structure were indicated and to ceiling in other
locations.
2. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to
ceiling track in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach extended leg top runner to
structure, maintain clearance between top of studs and structure, and brace
both flanges of studs with continuous bridging.
D. Standard Wall Furring: Install at concrete walls scheduled to receive gypsum
board, not more than 100 mm from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls.
Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 600 mm on center.
E. Acoustic Furring: Install resilient channels at maximum 600 mm on center. Locate
joints over framing members.
F. Blocking: Install wood blocking for support of:

3.4 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION

A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and
around electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing
through partitions.
B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.5 BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ASTM C 840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to
minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 6|P a g e Section: 09 21 16
Amazon – Gypsum board assemblies.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction,

with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing.
C. Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with
requirements of assembly listing
A. Cementitious Backing Board: Install over steel framing members and plywood substrate
where indicated, in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's instructions.
B. Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of all gypsum board except face
layer of non-rated double-layer assemblies, which may be installed by means of adhesive
lamination.
C. Curved Surfaces: Apply gypsum board to curved substrates in accordance with GA-226.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES

A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated.
B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths.
C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as
indicated.

3.7 JOINT TREATMENT

D. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:
1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible
in the completed construction.
E. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface
ready to receive finishes.
1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 0.8 mm.
2. Taping, filling, and sanding is not required at surfaces behind adhesive applied
ceramic tile and fixed cabinetry.
3. Taping, filling and sanding is not required at base layer of double layer applications.

3.8 TOLERANCES
F. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 3 mm in 3 m
in any direction.

END OF SECTION 09 21 16

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. 7|P a g e Section: 09 21 16
Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 09 22 36.23: METAL LATH

Prepared By

Year 2022

Rev. 00
Amazon – Metal lath.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTIION: 09 22 36.23

METAL LATH

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDS

A. Metal lath for Portland cement and gypsum plaster.
B. Access panels.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

C. ASTM C847 - Standard Specification for Metal Lath; 2012.
D. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws
for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood
Studs or Steel Studs; 2007.
E. ASTM C1063 - Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring to
Receive Interior and Exterior Portland Cement-Based Plaster; 2012a.
F. NAAMM ML/SFA 920 - Guide Specifications For Metal Lathing and
Furring; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers;
2009.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
G. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
H. Product Data: Provide data on furring and lathing components, structural
characteristics, material limitations, and finish.
I. Samples:
1. Submit two samples, 1000 x 1000 mm in size illustrating lath material and
finish.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 LATH
A. Diamond Mesh Metal Lath: ASTM C847, galvanized; self-furring.
1. Weight: To suit application, comply with deflection criteria, and as specified
in ASTM C841 for framing spacing.
2. Weight: 1.4 kg/sq m.
B. Corner Mesh: Formed sheet steel, minimum 0.5 mm thick, perforated flanges
shaped to permit complete embedding in plaster, minimum 50 mm size; same
finish as lath.
C. Strip Mesh: Expanded metal lath, same weight as lath, 50 mm wide x 600
mm long; same finish as lath.
D. Beads, Screeds, Joint Accessories, and Other Trim: Depth governed by
plaster thickness, maximum possible lengths.
Salama Structural Engineers
Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |1 Section: 09 22 36.23
Amazon – Metal lath.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

1. Material: Formed sheet steel with rust inhibitive primer, expanded metal
flanges.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Anchorage: Tie wire, nails, and other metal supports, of type and size to suit
application; to rigidly secure materials in place, galvanized.
B. Fasteners: ASTM C1002 self-piercing tapping screws.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION -GENERAL

A. Install interior lath and furring in accordance with ASTM C841.
B. Install lath and furring for Portland cement plaster in accordance with ASTM
C1063.
J. Install lath and furring for fire-rated assemblies in accordance with the
requirements of the indicated assembly.

3.2 LATH INSTALLATION

A. Apply metal lath taut, with long dimension perpendicular to supports.
B. Lap ends minimum 25 mm. Secure end laps with tie wire where they occur between
supports.
C. Continuously reinforce internal angles with corner mesh, except where the metal lath
returns 75 mm from corner to form the angle reinforcement; fasten at perimeter
edges only.
D. Place corner bead at external wall corners; fasten at outer edges of lath only.
E. Place 100 mm wide strips of metal lath centered over junctions of dissimilar backing
materials. Secure rigidly in place.
F. Place lath vertically above each top corner and each side of door frames to 150
mm above ceiling line.
G. Place casing beads at terminations of plaster finish. Butt and align ends. Secure
rigidly in place.
H. Place additional strip mesh diagonally at corners of lathed openings. Secure rigidly in
place.

END OF SECTION 09 22 36.23

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |2 Section: 09 22 36.23
 Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 09 24 00: PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING

Prepared By

Year 2022

Rev. 00
Amazon – Portland cement plastering.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTIION: 09 24 00

PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDS

A. Portland cement plaster for installation over metal lath, masonry, concrete, and solid
surfaces.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Structural metal framing for plaster.
B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood stud framing for plaster.
C. Section 08 31 00 - Access Doors and Panels: Access panels.
D. Section 09 22 16 - Non-Structural Metal Framing: Metal stud framing and furring for
plaster.
E. Section 09 22 36.23 - Metal Lath: Metal furring and lathing for plaster.
F. Section 09 22 36.23 - Metal Lath: Access panels.
G. Section 09 23 00 - Gypsum Plastering.
H. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Metal stud framing and furring for
plaster.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM C91/C91M - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement; 2012.
B. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland cement; 2012.
C. ASTM C206 - Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime; 2003 (Reapproved
2009).
D. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry
Purposes; 2006 (Reapproved 2011).
E. ASTM C926 - Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement-Based
Plaster; 2011a.
F. ASTM C932 - Standard Specification for Surface-Applied Bonding Compounds
for Exterior Plastering; 2006.
G. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2012.
H. UL {FRO) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current
edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on plaster materials, characteristics and limitations
of products specified.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |1 Section: 09 24 00
Amazon – Portland cement plastering.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not apply plaster when substrate or ambient air temperature is under 10 degrees
C or over 27 degrees C.
B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 10 degrees C during installation of
plaster and until cured.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER ASSEMBLIES

A. Exterior Stucco: Portland cement plaster system, made of finish, brown, and
scratch coat and reinforcing mesh.

2.2 PLASTER MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement, Aggregates, and Other Materials: In accordance with ASTM C926.
B. Premixed Plaster for Stucco Scratch, Brown, and Finish Coats: Complying with
material requirements of ASTM C926.

2.3 METAL LATH

A. Metal Lath and Accessories: As specified in Section 09 22 36.23. Use metal lath
as plaster base at masonry, concrete and solid surfaces.
B. Beads, Screeds, and Joint Accessories: As specified in Section 09 22 36.23.

2.4 PLASTER MIXES

A. Over Solid Bases: Two-coat application, mixed and proportioned in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Over Metal Lath: Three-coat application, mixed and proportioned in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Premixed Plaster Materials: Mix in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Mix only as much plaster as can be used prior to initial set.
E. Mix materials dry, to uniform color and consistency, before adding water.
F. Protect mixtures from freezing, frost, contamination, and excessive evaporation.
G. Do not retemper mixes after initial set has occurred.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify the suitability of existing conditions before starting work.
B. Masonry: Verify joints are cut flush and surface is ready to receive work of this
section. Verify no bituminous or water repellent coatings exist on masonry
surface.
C. Concrete: Verify surfaces are flat, honeycomb are filled flush, and surfaces are ready
to receive work of this section. Verify no bituminous, water repellent, or form
release agents exist on concrete surface that are detrimental to plaster bond.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |2 Section: 09 24 00
Amazon – Portland cement plastering.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

D. Metal Lath and Accessories: Verify lath is flat, secured to substrate, and joint
and surface perimeter accessories are in place.
E. Mechanical and Electrical: Verify services within walls have been tested and approved.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Dampen masonry surfaces to reduce excessive suction.
B. Clean concrete surfaces of foreign matter. Clean surfaces using acid solutions,
solvents, or detergents. Wash surfaces with clean water.
C. Roughen smooth concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.

3.3 PLASTERING
A. Apply premixed plaster in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Apply plaster in accordance with ASTM C926.
C. Two-Coat Application:
1. Apply first coat to nominal thickness of 9 mm.
2. Apply finish coat to nominal thickness of 3 mm.
D. Three-Coat Application Over Metal Lath:
C. Apply first coat to a nominal thickness of 9 mm.
D. Apply second coat to a nominal thickness of 9 mm.
E. Apply finish coat to a nominal thickness of 3 mm.
E. Three-Coat Application Over Solid Bases:
4.1 Apply first coat to a nominal thickness of 6 mm.
Apply second coat to a nominal thickness of 6 mm
4.2 Apply finish coat to a nominal thickness of 3 mm.
A. In exterior work, scribe contraction joints through entire plaster application at 3 m on
center each way.
B. Moist cure base coats.
C. Apply second coat immediately following initial set of first coat.
D. After curing, dampen previous coat prior to applying finish coat.
E. Finish Texture: Float to a consistent and smooth finish.
F. Avoid excessive working of surface. Delay troweling as long as possible to
avoid drawing excess fines to surface.
G. Moist cure finish coat for minimum period of 48 hours.

3.4 TOLERANCES
A Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 3 mm in 3 m.

END OF SECTION 09 24 00

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |3 Section: 09 24 00
Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 09 30 00: TILING

Prepared By

Year 2022

Rev. 00
Amazon – Tiling.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTIION: 09 30 00

TILING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDS

A. Tile for floor applications.
B. Tile for wall applications.
C. Stone thresholds.
D. Ceramic accessories.
E. Ceramic trim.
F. Non-ceramic trim.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 07 12 00 - Built-Up Bituminous Waterproofing.
B. Section 07 13 00 - Sheet Waterproofing.
C. Section 07 14 00 - Fluid-Applied Waterproofing.
D. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers.
E. Section 09 24 00 - Portland Cement Plastering: Lath and Portland cement scratch
coat and membrane, where required by The Tile Council of North America
Method specified.
F. Section 09 21 16- Gypsum Board Assemblies: Installation of tile backer board.
G. Section 22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures: Shower receptor.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series/A136.1 - American National Standard Specifications
for the Installation of Ceramic Tile (Compendium); 2011.
B. ANSI A108.1a - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of
Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 2011.
C. ANSI A108.1b - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of
Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex
Portland Cement Mortar; 2011.
D. ANSI A108.4 -American National Standard Specifications for Installation of
Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy
Adhesive; 2011.
E. ANSI A108.5 -American National Standard Specifications for Installation of
Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement
Mortar; 2011.
F. ANSI A108.6 -American National Standard Specifications for Installation of
Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -
Grouting Epoxy; 2011.
G. ANSI A108.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of
Salama Structural Engineers
Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |1 Section: 09 30 00
Amazon – Tiling.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout; 2011.
H. ANSI A108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of
Ceramic Tile with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 2011.
I. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout
in Tilework; 2011.
J. ANSI A108.11 -American National Standard for Interior Installation of
Cementitious Backer Units; 2011.
K. ANSI A118.1 -American National Standard Specifications for Dry-Set Portland
Cement Mortar; 2011
L. ANSI A118.3 -American National Standard Specifications for Chemical
Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile Setting and -Grouting Epoxy and Water
Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 2011.
M. ANSI A118.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Latex-Portland
Cement Mortar; 2011.
N. ANSI A118.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Standard
Cement Grouts for Tile Installation; 2011.
O. ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods
and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units; 2011.
P. ANSI A136.1 - American National Standard for Organic Adhesives for
Installation of Ceramic Tile; 2011.
Q. ANSI A137.1 -American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile;
2008.
R. ASTM C847 - Standard Specification for Metal Lath; 2012.
S. TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation; 2011.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and
accessories. Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives.
B. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, minimum 450 x
450 mm in size illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size
variations.
C. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials,
stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes.
D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of
project.
1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Tile: 1 percent of each size, color, and surface finish combination.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A Maintain one copy of The Tile Council of North America Handbook and ANSI
A108 Series/A118 Series on site.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the
types of products specified in this section, with minimum 5 years of
documented experience.
Salama Structural Engineers
Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |2 Section: 09 30 00
Amazon – Tiling.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

1.6 MOCK UP
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for
mock-up.
B. Construct tile mock-up were indicated on the drawings, incorporating all
components specified for the location.
1. Minimum size of mock-up is indicated on the drawings.
2. Approved mock-up may remain as part of the Work.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 10 degrees C during
installation of mortar materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 TILE
A Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer.
Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements
B. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: ANSI A137.1, and as follows:
1. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent.
2. Size and Shape: 25 mm square.
3. Edges: Square.
4. Surface Finish: Unglazed.
5. Colors: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
C. Glazed Wall Tile: ANSI A137.1, and as follows:
1. Moisture Absorption: 3.0 to 7.0 percent.
2. Size and Shape: 108 mm square.
3. Edges: Cushioned.
4. Surface Finish: High gloss.
5. Colors: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
D. Quarry Tile: ANSI A137.1, and as follows:
1. Moisture Absorption: 0.5 to 3.0 percent.
2. Size and Shape: 200 mm square.
3. Thickness: 19 mm.
4. Edges: Square.
5. Surface Finish: Unglazed.
6. Colors: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.

E. Tile Type: Glazed paver tile.

1. Composition: Porcelain.
2. Face Size: As indicated on Drawings.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |3 Section: 09 30 00
Amazon – Tiling.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

3. Thickness: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).

4. Face: Pattern of design indicated, with square or cushion edges.
5. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
6. Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
7. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
F. Paver Tile: ANSIA137.1, and as follows:
1. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent.
2. Size and Shape: 150 mm square.
3. Thickness: 9.5 mm
4. Face: Plain.
5. Edges: Cushioned.
6. Surface Finish: Unglazed.
7. Colors: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.

2.2 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES

A. Ceramic Accessories: Glazed finish, same color and finish as adjacent field
tile; same manufacturer as tile.
1. Soap Dish: With handle, clam shell design, recess mounted; cast strength
sufficient to resist lateral pull force of 34 Kg.
2. Toilet Tissue Holder: Recessed, for single roll, with spring loaded holder.
3. Towel Bars: Standard design, surface mounted with extensions for casting into
small wall openings; cast strength sufficient to resist lateral pull force of 14 Kg.
B. Ceramic Trim: Matching bullnose, double bullnose, cove base, and cove ceramic
shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile.
1. Applications: Use in the following locations:
a. Open Edges: Bullnose.
b. Inside Corners: Jointed.
c. Floor to Wall Joints: Cove base.
C. Non-Ceramic Trim: Satin brass anodized extruded aluminum, style and
dimensions to suit application, for setting using tile mortar or adhesive.
1. Applications: Use in the following locations:
a. Open edges of wall tile.
b. Open edges of floor tile.
c. Wall corners, outside and inside.
d. Transition between floor finishes of different heights.
e. Thresholds at door openings.
f. Expansion and control joints, floor and wall.
g. Floor to wall joints.
h. Borders and other trim as indicated on drawings.
D. Thresholds: Marble, white or gray, honed finish; 50 mm wide by full width of wall
or frame opening; 12 mm thick; beveled one long edge with radiused corners on top
side; without holes, cracks, or open seams.
1. Applications: Provide at the following locations:
a. At doorways where tile terminates.

2.3 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Provide setting materials made by the same manufacturer as grout.
B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.4.
Salama Structural Engineers
Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |4 Section: 09 30 00
Amazon – Tiling.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

1. Application(s): Use this type of bond coat were indicated and where no
other type of bond coat is indicated.
C. Epoxy Adhesive and Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.3.
1. Applications: Where indicated.
D. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, thinnest mastic type.
1. Use Type I in areas subject to prolonged moisture exposure.
E. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.1.

2.4 GROUTS
A. Polymer Modified Grout: ANSI A118.7 polymer modified cement grout.
1. Applications: Use this type of grout were indicated and where no other type
of grout is indicated.
2. Use sanded grout for joints 1/8 inch wide and larger; use unsanded grout for joints
less
than 1/8 inch wide.
3. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.
B. Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3 chemical resistant and water-cleanable epoxy grout.
2.1 Applications: Where indicated.
2.2 Color{s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.
C. Tile Sealant: Gunn able, silicone, siliconized acrylic, or urethane sealant; moisture and
mildew resistant type.
4.1 Applications: Between tile and plumbing fixtures.
4.2 Color{s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.
D. Grout Sealer: Liquid-applied, moisture and stain protection for existing or new
Portland cement grout.
4.3 Composition: Water-based colorless silicone.

2.5 THICK-BED MATERIALS

A. Mortar Bed Materials: Portland cement, sand, latex additive, and water.
B. Cleavage Membrane: 0.1 mm thick polyethylene film.
Waterproofing Membrane Under Mortar Bed: As specified in Section 07 14 00.
C. Reinforcing Mesh: 50 x 50 mm size weave of 16/16 wire size; welded fabric,
galvanized.
D. Metal Lath: ASTM C 847, Flat diamond mesh, of weight to suit application, galvanized
finish.

2.6 THIN-SET ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Concrete Floor Slab Crack Isolation Membrane: Material complying with ANSI
A118.12.
1. Thickness: 0.5 mm, maximum.
2. Crack Resistance: No failure at 1.6 mm gap, minimum.
B. Waterproofing Membrane at Floors: Specifically designed for bonding to
cementitious substrate under thick mortar bed or thin-set tile; complying with ANSI
A 118.10.
1. Type: Fluid-applied.
2. Material: PVC sheet membrane, 1 mm, thick, minimum.
C. Waterproofing Membrane at Showers and Tiled Tubs: Specifically designed for
bonding to cementitious substrate under thick mortar bed or thin-set tile;
Salama Structural Engineers
Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |5 Section: 09 30 00
Amazon – Tiling.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

complying with ANSI A118.10.

1. Type: Fluid-applied.
2. Material: PVC sheet membrane, 1 mm, thick, minimum.
3. Thickness: 0.6 mm, minimum, dry film thickness.
D. Underlayment at Floors: Specifically designed for bonding to thin-set setting
mortar; not primarily a waterproofing material and having the following
characteristics:
1. Crack solation: ComplywithANSIA118.12.
2. Water Resistance: Comply with ANSI A118.10, bonded waterproofing.
3. Type: Fluid-applied.
4. Do Not Use: Gypsum or cementitious based self-leveling underlayment.
E. Cementitious Backer Board: ANSI A118.9; High density, cementitious, glass fiber
reinforced, 13 mm thick; 50 mm wide coated glass fiber tape for joints and
corners.
F. Mesh Tape: 50 mm wide self-adhesive fiberglass mesh tape.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for
that type of work and are ready to receive tile.
B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that
type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile.
C. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair
bonding of setting materials to sub-floor surfaces.
D. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for
moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within
limits recommended by tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect surrounding work from damage.
B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.
C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to
acceptable flatness tolerances.
D. Install backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's
instructions. Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of setting material to a
feather edge.
3.3 INSTALLATION -GENERAL
A. Install tile, thresholds, and stair treads and grout in accordance with applicable
requirements of ANSI A108.1 through A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and The
Tile Council of North America Handbook recommendations
B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.
C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners
and bases neatly. Align floor joints.
D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size.
Make grout joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little
grout.
E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed.
Salama Structural Engineers
Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |6 Section: 09 30 00
Amazon – Tiling.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

F. Install ceramic accessories rigidly in prepared openings.

G. Install non-ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
H. Install thresholds where indicated.
I. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.
J. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints.
K. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours.
L. Grout tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated.
M. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar
planes.

3.4 INSTALLATION - FLOORS-THIN-SET METHODS

A. Over exterior concrete substrates, install in accordance with The Tile Council of
North America Handbook Method F102, with standard grout.
Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with The Tile Council of North
America Handbook Method F113, dry-set or latex-Portland cement bond coat, with
standard grout, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Over exterior concrete substrates, install in accordance with The Tile Council of
North America Handbook Method F102, with standard grout.
C. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with The Tile Council of
North America Handbook Method F113, dry-set or latex-Portland cement bond
coat, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 INSTALLATION· FLOORS· MORTAR BED METHODS
A. Over exterior concrete substrates, install in accordance with The Tile Council of
North America F101, bonded, with standard grout.
B. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with The Tile Council of
North America Handbook Method F111, with cleavage membrane, unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Cleavage Membrane: Lap edges and ends.
D. Waterproofing Membrane: Install as recommended by manufacturer and as
specified in the section in which the product is specified.
Mortar Bed Thickness: 15 mm, unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 INSTALLATION - SHOWERS AND BATHTUB WALLS

A. t tiled shower receptors install in accordance with The Tile Council of North
America Handbook Method B415, mortar bed floor, and W244, thin-set over
cementitious backer unit walls.
B. At bathtub walls install in accordance with The Tile Council of North America
Handbook Method B412, over cementitious backer units with waterproofing
membrane.
C. Grout with standard grout as specified above
D. Seal joints between tile work and other work with sealant Type------ specified in
Section 07 90.

3.7 INSTALLATION - WALL TILE

Salama Structural Engineers
Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |7 Section: 09 30 00
Amazon – Tiling.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

A. over cementitious backer units install in accordance with The Tile Council of
North America Handbook Method W223, organic adhesive.
B. Over interior concrete and masonry install in accordance with The Tile Council of
North America Handbook Method W202, thin-set with dry-set or latex-Portland
cement bond.

3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean tile and grout surfaces.

3.9 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation

END OF SECTION 09 30 00

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |8 Section: 09 30 00
 Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 09 51 00: ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

Prepared By

Year 2022

Rev. 00
Amazon – Acoustical ceilings.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTIION: 09 51 00

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDS

A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system.
B. Acoustical units.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forms and Accessories: Placement of special anchors
or inserts for suspension system.
B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of special anchors or
inserts for suspension system.
C. Section 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation: Acoustical insulation.
D. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Acoustical sealant.
E. Section 28 31 00 - Fire Detection and Alarm: Fire alarm components in ceiling system.
F. Section 21 13 00 - Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems: Sprinkler heads in ceiling
system.
G. Section 23 37 00 - Air Outlets and Inlets: Air diffusion devices in ceiling.
H. Section 26 51 00 - Interior Lighting: Light fixtures in ceiling system.
I. Section 27 51 17 - Public Address Systems: Speakers in ceiling system.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM C635 - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and
Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel
Ceilings; 2007.
B. ASTM C636/C636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension
Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels; 2008.
C. ASTM E580/E580M - Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension
Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake
Ground Motions; 2011.
D. ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2008e1.
E. NFPA 286 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Contribution of Wall
and Ceiling Interior Finish to Room Fire Growth; 2011.
F. UL (FRO) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings not installed until building is
enclosed, sufficient heat provided, dust-generating activities have terminated, and
overhead work is completed, tested, and approved.
B. Do not install acoustical units until after interior wet work is dry.
Salama Structural Engineers
Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |1 Section: 09 51 00
Amazon – Acoustical ceilings.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components.
C. Samples: Submit two samples _300_x_300_ mm in size illustrating material and
finish of acoustical units.
D. Manufacturer is Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.
E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of
project.
1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Resistive Assemblies: Complete assembly listed and classified by UL
for the fire resistance indicated.
B. Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in
manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three
years documented experience

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 16 degrees C, and maximum humidity of
40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACOUSTICAL UNITS
A. Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E1264, Class A.
1. Units for Installation in Fire-Rated Suspension System: Listed and
classified for the fire-resistive assembly the suspension system is a part of.
B. Acoustical Tile: Painted mineral fiber, ASTM E1264 Type 111, with to the
following characteristics:
1. Size: 12 x 12 inches (300 x 300 mm).
2. Thickness: 15 mm.
3. Composition: Water felted.
4. Density________ kg/cu cm
5. Light Reflectance______ percent, determined as specified in ASTM E1264
6. NRC Range
7. Articulation Class (AC): determined as specified in ASTM E1264.
8. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC):
9. Joint: Kerfed and rabbeted.
10. Edge: Square.
11. Surface Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard line.,
determined as specified in ASTM E1264.
12. Suspension System: Concealed grid.
C. Acoustical Tile Type Plastic faced mineral fiber, ASTM E1264 Type IV, with the
following Characteristics::
1. Size: 12 x 12 inches (300 x 300 mm).
2. Thickness: 15 mm.
Salama Structural Engineers
Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |2 Section: 09 51 00
Amazon – Acoustical ceilings.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

3. Composition: Water felted.

4. Density: kg/cu cm.
5. Light Reflectance: percent, determined as specified in ASTM E1264.
6. NRC Range: to , determined as specified in ASTM E1264.
7. Articulation Class (AC): , determined as specified in ASTM E1264.
8. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): determined as specified in ASTM
E1264
9. Joint: Kerfed and rabbeted.
10. Edge: Square.
11. Surface Color: White.
12. Surface Pattern: Perforated, regularly spaced large holes.
13. Suspension System: Concealed grid.
D. Acoustical Panels: Painted mineral fiber, ASTM E1264 Type 111, with the following
characteristics:
1. Size: 300 x 600 mm.
1. Thickness: 19 mm.
2. Composition: Wet felted.
3. Density: kg/cu cm.
4. Light Reflectance: _ percent, determined as specified in ASTM E1264
5. NRC Range:------To-------- determine as specified in ASTM E1264
6. Articulation Class {AC): determined as specified in ASTM E1264.
7. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): ______, determined as specified in ASTM
E1264.
8. Edge: Square.
9. Surface Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard line.
10. Surface Pattern: Perforated, regularly spaced large holes.
11. Suspension System: Exposed grid.

E. Acoustical Panels Type : Plastic faced mineral fiber, ASTM E1264 Type IV, with the
following characteristics:
1. Size: 300 x 600 mm.
2. Thickness: 19 mm.: Plastic faced mineral fiber, ASTM E1264 Type IV, with the
3. Composition: Wet felted.
4. Density: kg/cu cm.
5. Light Reflectance: percent, determined as specified in ASTM E1264.
6. NRG Range: to , determined as specified in ASTM E1264.
7. Articulation Class (AC): , determined as specified in ASTM E1264.
8. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): , determined as specified in ASTM E1264.
9. Edge: Square.
10. Surface Color: White.
11. Surface Pattern: Perforated, regularly spaced large holes.
12. Suspension System: Exposed grid.

F. Glass Fiber Acoustical Panels Type Vinyl faced glass fiber, ASTM E1264 Type
XII, with the following characteristics:
1. Size: 300 x 600 mm.
2. Thickness: 19 mm.:
3. Density: kg/cu cm.
Salama Structural Engineers
Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |3 Section: 09 51 00
Amazon – Acoustical ceilings.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

4. Light Reflectance: percent, determined as specified in ASTM E1264.

5. NRC Range: to , determined as specified in ASTM E1264.
6. Articulation Class (AC): determined as specified in ASTM E1264.
7. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC):
8. Edge: Square.
9. Surface Color: White.
10. Suspension System: Exposed grid

2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S)

A. Suspension Systems - General: ASTM C635; die cut and interlocking
components, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold
down clips as required.
B. Exposed Steel Suspension System: Formed steel, commercial quality
cold rolled; intermediate-duty.
1. Profile: Tee; 24 mm wide face.
2. Construction: Double web.
3. Finish: As shown on the drawings.
C. Fire-Rated Exposed Steel Suspension System: Formed steel, commercial quality
cold rolled; light-duty.
1. Profile: Tee; 24 mm wide face.
2. Construction: Double web.
3. Fire Rating: Listed and classified for use in a 2 hour fire-resistive assembly.
Finish: As shown on the drawings.
D. Exposed Aluminum Suspension System: Extruded aluminum; light-duty.
1. Profile: Tee; 24 mm wide face.
2. Finish: Clear anodized.
E. Concealed Suspension System: Formed steel, commercial quality cold rolled; light-
duty.
1. Profile: Tongue and groove.
2. Construction: Double web.
3. Fire Rating: Listed and classified for use in a 2 hour fire-resistive assembly; -
Design Number
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit
application, seismic requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement
specified.
B. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid.
1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation
as face of grid.
2. At Concealed Grid: Provide exposed L-shaped molding.
C. Gypsum Board: Fire rated type; 15 mm thick, ends and edges square, paper faced.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |4 Section: 09 51 00
Amazon – Acoustical ceilings.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

3.2 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C636/C636M, ASTM
E580/E580M, and manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this
section.
B. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components,
for maximum deflection of 1:360.
C. Lay out system to a balanced grid design with edge units no less than 50 percent of
acoustical unit size.
D. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of
hangers with other work.
E. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit.
Where carrying members spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of
adjacent members.
F. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce
the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra
distance.
G. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes
total dead load to exceed deflection capability.
H. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 150 mm of each
corner, or support components independently.
I. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.
J. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at
junctions with other interruptions.
1. Use longest practical lengths.
2. Overlap and rivet corners.
K. Install light fixture boxes constructed of gypsum board above light fixtures in
accordance with fire rated assembly requirements and light fixture ventilation
requirements.

3.3 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS

A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to
appearance and function.
C. Lay directional patterned units with pattern parallel to longest room axis.
D. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.
E. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete.
F. Install acoustical unit’s level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents.
G. Cutting Acoustical Units:
1. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim.
2. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges.
H. Install hold-down clips on each panel to retain panels tight to grid system; comply
with fire rating requirements.

3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 3 mm in 3 m.
Salama Structural Engineers
Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |5 Section: 09 51 00
Amazon – Acoustical ceilings.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2

degrees

END OF SECTION 09 51 00

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |6 Section: 09 51 00
Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 09 63 40: STONE FLOORING

Prepared By

Year 2022

Rev. 00
Amazon – Stone flooring.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTIION: 09 51 00

STONE FLOORING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDS

A. Stone on floors and bases.
B. Thresholds.
C. Stone setting and grouting.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 07 90 05 - Joint
Sealers.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series/A136.1 -American National Standard
Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile (Compendium); 2011.
B. ANSI A118.3 - American National Standard Specifications for Chemical
Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile Setting and Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable
Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 2011.
C. ANSI A118.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Latex-Portland
Cement Mortar; 2011.
D. ANSI A118.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Standard Cement
Grouts for Tile Installation; 2011.
E. ANSI A118.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Modified
Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 2011.
F. ANSI A136.1 -American National Standard for Organic Adhesives for Installation
of Ceramic Tile; 2011.
G. ASTM C503 - Standard Specification for Marble Dimension Stone; 2010.
H. TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation; 2011.

1.4 SUBMITTAL$
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide instructions for using grout.
C. Samples: Mount stone and apply grout on two plywood panels, _300_x_300_
mm in size illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations.
D. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials,
stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes.
E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of
project.
1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |1 Section: 09 63 40
 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with TCNA Handbook instructions for Methods
specified.
1.6
1.7 MOCK-UP
A. Locate where directed.
B. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain 10 degrees C during installation of flooring materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STONE
A Marble: ASTM C503, Classification I - Calcite; free of defects detrimental to
appearance or durability:
A. Variety: as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
B. Unit Size: as indicated on Drawings.
C. Thickness: I] unless otherwise noted.
D. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range..
E. Surface Finish: Polished.
B. Base: Match flooring for surface finish and color:

2.2 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS

A. Provide setting and grout materials from same manufacturer.
B. Mortar Bed Materials: Portland cement, sand, latex additive, and water.
C. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.4.
1. Application(s): Use this type of bond coat where indicated and where no other
type of bond coat was indicated.
D. Epoxy Adhesive and Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.3.
1. Applications: Where indicated.
E. Polymer Modified Grout: ANSI A118.7 polymer modified cement grout.
1. Applications: Use this type of grout where indicated and where no other type of
grout is indicated.
2. Use sanded grout for joints 1/8 inch wide and larger; use unhanded grout for joints less
Than 1/8 inch wide.
3. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.
F. Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3 chemical resistant and water-cleanable epoxy grout.
1. Applications: Where indicated.
2. Color (s}: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.

2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Cleavage Membrane: 6.9 kg asphalt saturated felt.
B. Waterproofing Membrane at Floors: As specified in Section 07 12 00.
C. Underlayment at Floors: Specifically designed for bonding to thin-set setting mortar;
having the following characteristics:

2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MIX

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |2 Section: 09 63 40
 A. Mix and proportion cementitious materials for site made slurry coat and mortar bed.
B. Mix and proportion pre-mixed setting bed and grout materials in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
C. Add mortar color in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Control uniformity of
mix and coloration.

2.5 STONE FABRICATION

A. Cut stone into sizes and thickness required.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Vacuum clean substrate surfaces; damp clean stone.
B. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to
acceptable flatness tolerances.
C. Clean stone prior to installation, with edges and surfaces free of dirt or foreign material.
D. Do not use wire brushes or implements that mark or damage exposed surfaces?

3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Lay stone units to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt pattern through openings.
B. Cut and fit stone units tightly to penetrations, leaving sealant joint space. Ensure
finish trim will cover cut edges. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor and
base joints.
C. Maintain uniform joint width subject to variance in tolerance allowed in stone unit
size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout.
D. Maintain joint width of 6 mm where abutting vertical surfaces or protrusions.
E. Sound test the units after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.
F. Keep expansion and control joints free of mortar or grout. Apply sealant to joints.
G. Grout joints. Pack and work grout into voids. Neatly tool to flush surface.

3.4 MORTAR BED METHOD

A. Install in accordance with TCNA Handbook Method F111, over cleavage membrane.
B. Set stone in full mortar bed to support stone over full bearing surface.
C. Allow units to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting.
D. To accommodate joint grout, rake out joints 6 to 10 mm.

END OF SECTION 09 63 40

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |3 Section: 09 63 40
 Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 09 64 23: WOOD PARQUET FLOORING

Prepared By

Year 2022

Rev. 00
Amazon – Wood Parquet flooring.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTIION: 09 64 23

WOOD PARQUET FLOORING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDS

A. Wood parquet flooring, adhesive applied.
B. Surface finishing.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. MFMA (SPEC) - Guide Specifications for Maple Flooring Systems;
Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association; current edition.
B. NWFA- Installation Guidelines and Methods; National Wood Flooring
Association; current edition located at [Link].

1.3 SUBMITTAL$
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data for flooring and floor finish materials.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate floor joint pattern and termination details.
D. Samples: Submit two samples x mm-in size illustrating floor finish, color, and
sheen.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform work of this section in accordance with MFMA (SPEC).
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products
specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS

A Do not install wood flooring until wet construction work is complete and ambient
air at installation space has moisture content stabilized at maximum moisture
content of 40 percent.
B. Provide heat, light, and ventilation prior to installation.
C. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to
installation.
D. Maintain minimum room temperature of 18 degrees C and relative humidity in
accordance with adhesive manufacturer's instructions for a minimum period of 48
hours prior to delivery of materials to installation space, during installation, and
after installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |1 Section: 09 64 23
N-31 Wood Parquet flooring. 2022 Festival Tower – Code 25 - MU3 – Downtown New Administrative Capital

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Wood Parquet Flooring:
1. Species: White oak.
2. Grade: Clear.
3. Cut: Plain sawn.
4. Moisture Content: 7 to 9 percent.
5. Actual Thickness: 19 mm.
6. Tile Unit Size: 150 x 150 mm.
7. Edging: Tongue and groove, end matched.
8. Pattern/Design: Grain matched edges and ends.
9. Treatment: Acrylic Impregnated.
10. Factory Finish: Penetrating type stain selected by Architect.

2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material
manufacturer.
B. Divider and Edge Strip: Angle mill finish aluminum.
C. Transition Strip: Same species and finish as flooring material; profiles indicated.
D. Floor Finish: Polyurethane, to achieve high gloss surface: type recommended by
flooring manufacturer.
E. Floor Stain: 0enetrating type recommended by flooring manufacturer.
F. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect and stamp species and grade on underside of each piece of wood flooring at
factory.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for
that type of work and are ready to receive wood flooring.
B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair
bonding of materials to sub-floor surfaces.
C. Verify that wood sub-floors have 12 percent maximum moisture content.
D. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for wood flooring installation by
testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results
are not within limits recommended by adhesive materials manufacturer.
E. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.

3.2 PREPARATION

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |3 Section: 09 64 23
N-31 Wood Parquet flooring. 2022 Festival Tower – Code 25 - MU3 – Downtown New Administrative Capital

A. Prepare sub-floor to receive wood flooring in accordance with manufacturer's,

MFMA, and NOFMA instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Wood Flooring:
1. Install wood flooring in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
2. Set wood flooring in place; press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.
3. Arrange flooring with end matched grain set flush and tight.
4. Terminate flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is
dissimilar; provide divider strips and transition strips in accordance with
flooring manufacturer's recommendations and as indicated.
5. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, and where flooring terminates.
6. Install flooring tight to floor access covers.
7. Install flooring under movable partitions without interrupting floor pattern.
8. Provide mm expansion space at fixed walls and other interruptions.
B. Finishing:
1. Mask off adjacent surfaces before beginning sanding.
2. Sand flooring to smooth even finish with no evidence of sander marks. Take
precautions to contain dust. Remove dust by vacuum.
3. Apply finish in accordance with floor finish manufacturer's instructions.
4. Apply filler and three finish coats.
5. Apply first coat, allow drying, then buffing lightly with steel wool to
remove irregularities. Vacuum clean and wipe with damp cloth before
applying succeeding coat.
6. Lightly buff between coats with steel wool and vacuum clean before applying
succeeding coat.
7. Apply last coat of finish.
C. Floor Access Covers: Install floor access covers in accordance with cover
manufacturer's installation instructions.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damaging
surfaces.
B. Clean and polish floor surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic on floor finish for 48 hours after installation.
B. Place protective coverings over finished floors; do not remove coverings until
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09 64 23

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |4 Section: 09 64 23
Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 09 68 00: CARPETING

Prepared By

Year 2022

Rev. 00
Amazon – Carpeting 2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTIION: 09 68 00

CARPETING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDS

A. Carpet, stretched-in, with cushion underlay.
B. Accessories

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal:
Reclamation/Recycling of new carpet scrap, new cushion scrap, removed carpet,
and removed carpet cushion.
B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds
for concrete slabs and floors to receive adhesive-applied carpet.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM D2859 - Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished
Textile Floor Covering Materials; 2006 (Reapproved 2011).
B. ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering
Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2010e1.
C. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive
Resilient Flooring; 2011.
D. CRI {CIS) - Carpet Installation Standard; Carpet and Rug Institute; 2009.
E. CRI {GLA) - Green Label Testing Program - Approved Adhesive Products;
Carpet and Rug Institute; Current Edition.
F. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering
Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; National Fire Protection Association;
2011.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and
performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of
installation.
C. Samples: submit two samples illustrating color, pattern for each carpet, and
cushion material specified.
D. Manufacturer is Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.
E. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance
materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning.
F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of
project.
Salama Structural Engineers
Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |1 Section: 09 68 00
N- 31 Carpeting. 2021 Festival Tower – Code 25 - Mu3 – Downtown New Administrative Capital

1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional requirements.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet with
minimum three years’ experience.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to
installation.
B. Maintain minimum 21 degrees C ambient temperature 24 hours prior to, during
and 24 hours after installation.
C. Ventilate installation area during installation and for 72 hours after installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 CARPET
A. Carpet:
1. Roll Width: Manufacturer's standard width in mm.
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
3. Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
4. Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.22 watts/sq. cm, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E648 or NFPA 253.
5. Surface Flammability Ignition: Pass ASTM D2859 (the "pill test").
B. Carpet: Tufted, nylon, conforming to the following criteria:
1. Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.22 watts/sq. cm, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E648 or NFPA 253.
2. Surface Flammability Ignition: Pass ASTM D2859 (the "pill test").
3. Color:
4. Pattern: _
5. Roll Width: mm.
6. Static Control Fiber: ---
7. Max. Electrostatic Charge: 3 Kv. @ 20 percent R.H...
8. Primary Backing:
a. Material: Polypropylene.
9. Secondary Backing:
a. Material: Jute.
C. Carpet: Woven, wilton weave, wool, conforming to the following criteria:
1. Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.22 watts/sq. cm, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E648 or NFPA 253.
2. Surface Flammability Ignition: Pass ASTM D2859 (the "pill test").
3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range..
4. Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range..
5. Roll Width: Manufacturer's standard roll width, mm
6. Static Control Fiber: As approved by the Architect.
7. Max. Electrostatic Charge: 3 Kv. @ 20 percent R.H...
Salama Structural Engineers
Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |2 Section: 09 68 00
N- 31 Carpeting. 2021 Festival Tower – Code 25 - Mu3 – Downtown New Administrative Capital

8. Rows: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range, per cm.

9. Pitch: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range..
[Link] Height: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range, mm.
11. Yarn Size: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range, Otex.
[Link] Weight: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range, gm/sq. m.
[Link] Factor: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range, kilotex.
[Link] Fastness: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
[Link] Backing:
a. Material: Polypropylene.
16. Secondary Backing:
a. Material: Jute.

2.3 CUSHION
A. Cushion: Cellular rubber:
1. Nominal Thickness: Manufacturer's standard thickness, selected by
Architect from manufacturer's full range, mm.
2. Roll Width: Manufacturer's standard roll width, mm.
3. Weight: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range, g/sq. m.
4. Density: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range, kg/cu m.

2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Sub-Floor Filler: Type recommended by carpet manufacturer.
B. Tackless Strip: Carpet gripper, of type recommended by carpet
manufacturer to suit application, with attachment devices.
C. Adhesives - General: Compatible with materials being adhered; maximum
VOC content as specified in Section 01 61 16.
D. Adhesives - General: Compatible with materials being adhered; maximum
VOC content of 50 g/L; CRI Green Label certified; in lieu of labeled product,
independent test report showing compliance is acceptable.
E. Seam Adhesive: Recommended by manufacturer.
F. Contact Adhesive: Compatible with carpet material; releasable type.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances
specified for that type of work and are ready to receive carpet.
B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could
impair bonding of adhesives to sub floor surfaces.
C. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and
ready for flooring installation by testing for moisture and PH.
1. Test in accordance with ASTM F710.
2. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by
flooring material manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.
D. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.
Salama Structural Engineers
Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |3 Section: 09 68 00
N- 31 Carpeting. 2021 Festival Tower – Code 25 - Mu3 – Downtown New Administrative Capital

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers.
B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks,
joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler.
C. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit
traffic until filler cured.
D. Clean substrate.

3.3 INSTALLATION· GENERAL

A. A Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.
B. Install carpet and cushion in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
and CRI Carpet Installation Standard.
C. Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots.
D. Lay out carpet and locate seams in accordance with shop drawings:
1. Locate seams in area of least traffic, out of areas of pivoting traffic, and
parallel to main traffic.
2. Do not locate seams perpendicular through door openings.
3. Align run of pile in same direction as anticipated traffic and in same
direction on adjacent pieces.
4. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline.
5. Provide monolithic color, pattern, and texture match within any one area.
E. Install carpet tight and flat on subfloor, well fastened at edges, with a uniform
appearance.

3.4 STRETCHED-IN CARPET

A. Install Tackless strips with pins facing the wall around entire perimeter, except
across door openings. Use edge strip where carpet terminates at other floor
coverings.
B. Space Tackless strips slightly less than carpet thickness away from vertical
surfaces, but not more than 9 mm.
C. Install cushion in maximum size pieces using spot adhesive to adhere to sub-floor.
D. Lay out cushion so that seams will be perpendicular to, or offset from, minimum
150 mm from carpet seams.
E. Butt cushion edges together and tape seams.
F. Trim cushion tight to edge of Tackless strip and around projections and contours.
G. Double cut carpet seams, with accurate pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and
unfrayed. Apply seam adhesive to all cut edges immediately.
H. Join seams by hand sewing. Form seams straight, not overlapped or peaked, and free
of gaps.
I. Following seaming, hook carpet onto Tackless strip at one edge, power stretch, and
hook firmly at other edges. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for method
and amount of stretch.
J. Trim carpet neatly at walls and around interruptions. Tuck edges into space
between Tackless strip and wall.
Salama Structural Engineers
Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |4 Section: 09 68 00
N- 31 Carpeting. 2021 Festival Tower – Code 25 - Mu3 – Downtown New Administrative Capital

3.5 DIRECT-GLUED CARPET

A. Double cut carpet seams, with accurate pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and
unfrayed. Apply seam adhesive to cut edges of woven carpet immediately.
B. Apply contact adhesive to floor uniformly at rate recommended by manufacturer.
After sufficient open time, press carpet into adhesive.
C. Apply seam adhesive to the base of the edge glued down. Lay adjoining piece
with seam straight, not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps.
D. Roll with appropriate roller for complete contact of adhesive to carpet backing.
E. Trim carpet neatly at walls and around interruptions.

3.6 CLEANING
A Remove excess adhesive from floor and wall surfaces without damage.
B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.

END OF SECTION 09 68 00

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |5 Section: 09 68 00
Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 09 68 13: TILE CARPETING

Prepared By

Year 2022

Rev. 00
Amazon – Tile carpeting.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTIION: 09 68 13

TILE CARPETING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDS

A. Carpet tile, fully
adhered.
B. Matching roll carpet for direct glue installation on base.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM D2859 - Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished
Textile Floor Covering Materials; 2006 (Reapproved 2011).
B. ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering
Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2010e1.
C. CRI (CIS) - Carpet Installation Standard; Carpet and Rug Institute; 2009.
D. CRI (GLA) - Green Label Testing Program - Approved Adhesive Products;
Carpet and Rug Institute; Current Edition.
E. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering
Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; National Fire Protection Association;
2011.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of joints.
C. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and
performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of
installation.
D. Samples: Submit two carpet tiles illustrating color and pattern design for each
carpet color selected.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Carpet Tile: Tufted, manufactured in one color dye lot.
1. Tile Size: 450 x 450 mm, nominal unless noted otherwise.
2. Thickness: As indicated on the drawings. mm.
3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range..
4. Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
5. Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.22 watts/sq. cm, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E648 or NFPA 253.
6. Surface Flammability Ignition: Pass ASTM D2859 (the "pill test").
7. Static Control Fiber: As indicated on the drawings..
Salama Structural Engineers
Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |1 Section: 09 68 13
N- 31 Carpeting. 2022 Festival Tower – Code 25 - MU3 – Downtown New Administrative Capital

8. Max. Electrostatic Charge: 3 Kv. at 20 percent relative humidity.

9. Rows: Manufacturer is standard; selected by Architect from manufacturer's
full range per cm.
10. Gage: Manufacturer is standard; as selected by Architect from manufacturer's
full range mm.
11. Stitches: Manufacturer's standard; as selected by Architect from manufacturer's
full range, per cm.
12. Yarn Size: Manufacturer's standard; as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range, Dtex.
13. Pile Weight: Manufacturer's standard; as selected by the Architect from
manufacturer's full range, gm/sq. m.
14. Density Factor: Manufacturer is standard, as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range. Kilotex.

15. Light Fastness: Manufacturer's standard; as selected by Architect from

manufacturer's full range..
16. Primary Backing Material: Polypropylene.
17. Primary Backing Weight Manufacturer's full range; as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's full range. g/sq. m.
18. Laminate: As indicated on the drawings..
19. Laminate Weight: Manufacturer's standard; as selected by the
Architect from manufacturer's full range. g/sq. m.
20. Secondary Backing Material: Jute.
21. Secondary Backing Weight: Manufacturer is standard; as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's full range. g/sq. m.
22. Total Weight: Manufacturer's standard; as selected by the Architect from
manufacturer's full range. g/sq. m.
B. Roll Carpet: Same manufacturer, type, color and pattern, and face fiber
characteristics as carpet tile, manufactured in same color dye lot as tile.

2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Sub-Floor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by flooring material
manufacturer.
B. Base Cap: type, finish, and color; as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range..
C. Edge Strips: Embossed aluminum, color as selected.
D. Stair Nosing: Rubber type, square nose, ribbed top surface , one piece per stair tread
width,
_ _ _ _ finish , color.
E. Adhesives: Acceptable to carpet tile manufacturer, compatible with materials being
adhered; maximum VOC of 50 g/L; CRI Green Label certified; in lieu of labeled
product, independent test report showing compliance is acceptable.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |2 Section: 09 68 13
N- 31 Carpeting. 2022 Festival Tower – Code 25 - MU3 – Downtown New Administrative Capital

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified for
that type of work and are ready to receive carpet tile.
B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that
type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive carpet tile.
C. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair
bonding of adhesive materials to sub-floor surfaces.
D. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready
for flooring installation by testing for moisture and PH.
1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by
flooring material manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.
E. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit
traffic until filler cured.
B. Vacuum clean substrate.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.
B. Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI Carpet
Installation Standard.
C. Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match.
D. Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps.
E. Lay carpet tile in square pattern, with pile direction parallel to next unit, set parallel to
building lines.
F. Fully adhere carpet tile to substrate.
G. Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions.
H. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges.

3.4 INSTALLATION ON STAIRS

A. Use one piece of carpet for each tread and the riser below. Apply seam adhesive to
all cut edges.
B. Lay carpet with pile direction in the length of the stair.
C. Adhere carpet tight to stair treads and risers.

3.5 CLEANING
A. Remove excess adhesive without damage, from floor, base, and wall surfaces.
B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.

END OF SECTION 09 68 13

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |3 Section: 09 68 13
Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 09 69 00: ACCESS FLOORING

Prepared By

Year 2022

Rev. 00
Amazon – Access flooring.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTIION: 09 69 00

ACCESS FLOORING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDS

A. Structural floor supported pedestal-framing system.
B. Removable floor panels.
C. Accessories, including facial panels, plenum dividers, grilles, ramps, and railings.
D. System electrostatic grounding.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

E. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers.
F. Section 09 68 13 - Tile Carpeting: Finish for access flooring panels.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

G. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; 2012.
H. NFPA 75 - Standard for the Protection of Information Technology Equipment;
National Fire Protection Association; 2009.
I. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
J. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
K. Product Data: Provide data for grid system, panels, and accessories; electrical
resistance characteristics and ground connection requirements.
L. Shop Drawings: Indicate floor layout, interruptions to grid, special sized panels,
panels requiring drilling or cutout for services, appurtenances or interruptions, edge
details, elevation differences, ramps, grilles, and registers.
M. Samples: Submit two samples of floor grid and panel, illustrating finishes and color.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Designer Qualifications: Design floor system structure layout for this project under
direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of floors
of the type required and licensed in the State in which the Project is located

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |1 Section: 09 69 00
Amazon – Access flooring.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCESSFLOORING
A. Access Flooring: Factory-fabricated system consisting of removable floor panels
and supporting structure that allows access to each space below floor without
requiring removal of panels other than the one directly above the space to which
access is needed; provide all components and accessories required for complete
installation and as indicated.
1. Comply with requirements of NFPA 75.
2. Comply with applicable codes for access for the handicapped.
3. Configuration: Stringer less system.
4. Finished Floor Elevation: As indicated on Drawings.
5. Floor Panel Size: 600 x 600 mm.
6. Electrical Grounding Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters
Laboratories as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
B. Performance Requirements:
1. Pedestals:
a. Maximum Axial Load: 2,268 kg without permanent deformation.
b. Ultimate Strength: Not less than twice design load.
2. Floor Panels: Conform to the following:
a. Live Load: 11.9 KPA.
b. Maximum Deflection: 1 mm.
c. Concentrated Load: 500 kg on 710 sq. mm at any location with maximum
deflection of 2mm.
d. Permanent Deformation: 0.5 mm maximum at design load.
e. Ultimate Strength: Not less than twice design load.
f. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25, maximum;
smoke developed index of 450, maximum; when tested in accordance
with ASTM E84.
3. Lateral Stability: Design system for lateral stability in all directions, with or
without panels in place.
4. Surface Electrical Resistance: Maximum 1 ohm per panel.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Pedestals: Steel with flat bottom base plate, threaded supporting rod, vibration proof
lock nut to permit 38 mm adjustment, galvanized finish.
B. Frame Grid Stringers: Continuous type, consisting of steel channels, box, or tee
sections.
C. Floor Panels:
1. Die formed galvanized steel top and bottom plates; steel reinforcement stiffeners.
2. Panel Edge: Vinyl trim, slip-on type.
3. Floor Panel Finish Adhesive: Moisture resistant type recommended by
floor finish manufacturer.
D. Perforated Floor Panels: Same material, size, and construction as floor panels
with slide dampers for controlled air circulation.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |2 Section: 09 69 00
Amazon – Access flooring.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Facia Panels: Laminated construction as follows:
1. Front and Back Face Sheets: Aluminum sheet; thickness as indicated on the
drawings.
2. Core: 0lywood; thickness as indicated on the drawings.
3. Accessories: Include corner pieces, trim, reinforcing, and clip angles.
B. Ramps and Stairs: Same materials, structural strength, and construction as floor
panels; flush extruded aluminum cover plates at junction with floor system.
C. Ramp and Stair Hand Railings: Posts and rails of tubular; assembled with welded
connections; cast metal end caps, floor sockets, collars, brackets, and fittings.
D. Plenum Dividers: 0alvanized steel sheet; thickness as indicated on the drawings.
E. Air Grilles: Galvanized sheet steel; blade size (as indicated on the drawings);
with straight vanes and shut-off damper; with integral fire damper.
F. Electrostatic Grounding Connectors: Solid copper.
G. Cable Cutout Protection: Extruded polyvinyl chloride edging, self-extinguishing.
H. Gaskets: Closed cell sponge rubber, preformed to suit.
I. Wall Base: Extruded plastic angles.
J. Sealant: Type as specified in Section 07 90 05.

2.4 FINISHES
A. Floor Panel Finish:
1. Carpet tile, as specified in Section 09 68 13; as selected.
B. Exposed Metal Surfaces: Baked enamel finish; color as selected.
C. Facia Panel: Baked enamel finish; color as selected.
D. Ramp Surface: Sheet rubber; color as selected.

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Fabrication Tolerances:
1. Floor Panel Flatness: Plus, or minus 0.5 mm in any direction.
2. Floor Panel Width or Length from Specified Size: Plus, or minus 0.5 mm.
3. Floor Panel Squareness: Plus, or minus 0.8 mm difference between
opposite diagonal dimensions.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify field measurements are as shown on shop drawings.
B. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Vacuum clean substrate surfaces.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |3 Section: 09 69 00
Amazon – Access flooring.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Secure pedestal base plate to subfloor with adhesive.
C. Install additional pedestals where grid pattern interrupted by room
appurtenances or at cutouts.
D. Install stringers and floor panels on pedestals with full bearing.
E. Install grilles as indicated on drawings.
F. Close field cut floor panels with edge trim.
G. Provide floor with edge trim and end closures. Provide lateral braces at stair
edges and other locations where pedestals are not braced.
H. Install plenum dividers to provide a positive air seal between structural floor and
elevated floor. Provide gaskets and sealant to ensure airtight seal where holes
are cut in elevated floor for penetration of cable.
I. Provide positive electrical earth grounding of entire floor assembly in accordance
with NFPA 75.
J. Facia Panels:
1. Install Facia panels at exposed sides.
2. Secure panels to clip angles attached to structural floor and edge of floor
panels.
3. Install metal trim at intersection of Facia panels and access floor and at
abutting walls and columns.
K. Railings:
1. Extend railing posts through floor panels to structural floor; secure to
flange fittings anchored to structural floor.
2. Brace posts in position at floor panels with floor collar retainers.
3. Electrically ground railings to floor system.

3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Out of Level Floor Panel Tolerance: 1.6 mm in 3 m, non-cumulative.

3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust pedestals to achieve a level floor and to assure adjacent floor panel surfaces
are flush.

3.6 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface.

END OF SECTION 09 69 00

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |4 Section: 09 69 00
 ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 09 90 00: PAINTING AND COATING

Prepared By

Year 2022

Rev. 00
Amazon – Painting and coating.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTIION: 09 90 00

PAINTING AND COATING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDS

A. Surface preparation.
B. Field application of paints, stains, varnishes, and other coatings.
C. Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-
finished and unless otherwise indicated, including the following:
1. Both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telecom
equipment before installing equipment.
2. Elevator pit ladders.
3. Exposed surfaces of steel lintels and ledge angles.
4. Surfaces inside cabinets.
5. Prime surfaces to receive wall coverings.
6. Interior walls and bottom of swimming pools and fountains.
D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and
products having factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished.
2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.
3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.
4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating
parts of equipment.
5. Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, tern, and lead items.
6. Marble, granite, slate, and other natural stones.
7. Floors, unless specifically so indicated.
8. Ceramic and other tiles.
9. Glass.
10. Concrete masonry in utility, mechanical, and electrical spaces.
11. Acoustical materials, unless specifically so indicated.
12. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.
B. Section 32 17 23.13 - Painted Pavement Markings: Painted pavement markings.
C. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items.
D. Section 09 96 00 - High-Performance Coatings.
E. Section 21 05 53 - Identification for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment:
Painted identification.
F. Section 21 05 53 - Identification for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment:
Color coding scheme for items to be painted under this section.
G. Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Painted
Salama Structural Engineers
Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |2 Section: 09 90 00
Amazon – Painting and coating.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

identification.
H. Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Color coding
scheme for items to be painted under this section.
I. Section 23 05 53 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Painted
identification.
J. Section 23 05 53 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Color coding
scheme for items to be painted under this section.
K. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Painted identification.
L. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Color coding scheme for
items to be painted under this section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Conform to ASTM 016 for interpretation of terms used in this section.

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards
for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current
edition.
B. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and
Applications; 2011a.
C. ASTM 04442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement
of Wood and Wood-Base Materials; 2007.
D. Green Seal GS-11 - Paints; 1993.
E. SSPC (PM1) - Good Painting Practice: SSPC Painting Manual, Vol. 1; Society for
Protective Coatings; Fourth Edition.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide complete list of all products to be used, with the following
information for each:
1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product
category
(e.g. "alkyd enamel").
2. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include
description of each system.
3. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
4. If proposal of substitutions allowed under submittal procedures,
explanation of all substitutions proposed.
C. Samples: Submit three paper "drop" samples, 216 by 279 mm in size, and
illustrating range of colors available for each finishing product specified.
1. Where sheen specified, submit samples in only that sheen.
2. Where sheen is not specified, submit each color in each sheen available.
3. Allow 30 days for approval process, after receipt of complete samples by Architect.
4. Paint color submittals will not be considered until color submittals for major

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |3 Section: 09 90 00
Amazon – Painting and coating.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

materials not to be painted, such as masonry, have been approved.

D. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products, including VOC content.
E. Samples: Submit two paper chip samples, 300 x 300 mm in size illustrating range of
colors and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled.
F. Samples: Submit two painted samples, illustrating selected colors and textures for
each color and system selected with specified coats cascaded. Submit on aluminum
sheet, 600 x 600 mm in size.
G. Certification: By manufacturer that not all paints and coatings contain any of the
prohibited chemicals specified; Green Seal GS-11 certification is not required but if
provided shall constitute acceptable certification.
H. Manufacturer is Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures.
I. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted
and coated surfaces.
J. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of
project.
1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Paint and Coatings: 4 L of each color; store where directed.
3. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the
products specified, with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of
work specified approved by manufacturer.

1.7 MOCK-UP
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up.
B. Provide door and frame assembly-illustrating paint coating color, texture, and finish.
C. Locate where directed.
D. Mock-up may remain as part of the work.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify
acceptability.
Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand
B. Code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color
designation, and instruct ions for mixing and reducing.
C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 7 degrees C and a
maximum of 32 degrees C, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's
instructions.

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |4 Section: 09 90 00
Amazon – Painting and coating.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.

B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including
testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature
limitations.
C. Provide lighting level of 860 Ix measured mid-height at substrate surface.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL

A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating.
1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being
readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and
brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates
indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
3. For opaque finishes, tint each coat including primer coat and intermediate coats,
one-half shade lighter than succeeding coat, with final finish coat as base color.
4. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's
work from a single production run.
5. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such
procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.
B. Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular
substrate, use primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer.
C. Chemical Content: The following compounds are prohibited:
1. Aromatic Compounds: In excess of 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic
compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings).
2. Acrolein, acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di
(2-ethylhexyl) phthalate, di-n-butyl phthalate, di-n-octyl phthalate, 1,2-
dichlorobenzene,
diethyl phthalate, dimethyl phthalate, ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent
chromium, isophorone, lead, mercury, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl
ketone, methylene chloride, naphthalene, toluene (methylbenzene), 1,1,1-
trichloroethane, vinyl chloride.
D. Flammability: Comply with applicable code for surface burning characteristics.
E. Sheens: Provide the sheens specified; where sheen is not specified, Architect will
select sheen later from the manufacturer's full line.
F. Colors: As indicated on drawings
1. In utility areas, finish equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed ductwork
in colors according to the color-coding scheme indicated.

2.2 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR

A. Paint EC-OP - All Exterior Concrete and Masonry Surfaces Indicated to be Painted,
Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including concrete and concrete masonry.
1. Preparation as specified by manufacturer.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |5 Section: 09 90 00
Amazon – Painting and coating.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

2. Two top coats and one coat primer recommended by manufacturer.

3. Top Coat(s): Exterior Pigmented Elastomeric, Water Based, flat.
4. Top Coat(s): Exterior High Build Latex.
5. Top Coat(s): MPI Textured Latex Coating, flat.
6. Top Coat(s): MPI Exterior Light Industrial Coating, Water Based.
7. Velvet: MPI gloss level 2; use this sheen at all locations.
8. Eggshell: MPI gloss level 3; use this sheen at all locations.
9. Satin: MPI gloss level 4; use this sheen at all locations.
10. Semi-Gloss: MPI gloss level 5; use this sheen at all locations.
11. Primer On Concrete and Concrete Masonry: One heavy coat latex block filler (100
percent acrylic) squeegeed into pores.
12. Primer on Plaster:
B. Paint CE-OP-3A - Concrete/Masonry, Opaque, Alkyd, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of block filler.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
3. Flat: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
C. Paint CE-OP-2A - Masonry/Concrete, Opaque, Alkyd, 2 Coat:
1. One coat of block filler.
2. Semi-gloss: One coat of alkyd enamel.
3. Flat: One coat of alkyd enamel.
D. Paint CE-OP-3L - Masonry/Concrete, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of block filler.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.
3. Flat: Two coats of latex enamel.
E. Paint CE-OP-2L - Masonry/Concrete, Opaque, Latex, 2 Coat:
1. One coat of block filler.
2. Semi-gloss: One coat of latex enamel.
3. Flat: One coat of latex enamel.
F. Paint ME-OP-3A- Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Alkyd, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of alkyd primer.
2. Gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
3. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
G. Paint ME-OP-3L - Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of latex primer.
2. Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.
3. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.
H. Paint ME-OP-2A - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Alkyd, 2 Coat:
1. Touch-up with rust-inhibitive primer recommended by topcoat manufacturer.
2. Gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
3. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
I. Paint ME-OP-2L - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Latex, 2 Coat:
1. Touch-up with rust-inhibitive primer recommended by topcoat manufacturer.
2. Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.
3. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.
J. Paint MgE-OP-3A- Galvanized Metals, Alkyd, 3 Coat:
1. One coat galvanize primer.
2. Gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |6 Section: 09 90 00
Amazon – Painting and coating.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

3. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.

K. Paint MgE-OP-3L - Galvanized Metals, Latex, 3 Coat
1. One coat galvanize primer.
2. Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.
3. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.

2.3 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR

A. Paint I-OP -All Interior Surfaces Indicated to be Painted, Unless Otherwise
Indicated: Including gypsum board, concrete, concrete masonry, brick, wood,
plaster, uncoated steel, shop primed steel, galvanized steel, and aluminum.
1. Two top coats and one coat primer.
2. Top Coat(s): High Performance Architectural Interior Latex.
3. Velvet: Gloss level 2; use this sheen
4. Eggshell: Gloss level 3; use this sheen.
5. Satin: Gloss level 4; use this sheen
6. Semi-Gloss: Gloss level 5; use this sheen
7. Primer(s): As recommended by manufacturer of top coats.
B. Paint 1-0P-MD-DT - Medium Duty DoorfTrim: For surfaces subject to frequent
contact by occupants, including metals and wood:
1. Medium duty applications include doors, door frames, railings, handrails,
guardrails, and
Balustrades
2. Two top coats and one coat primer.
3. Top Coat(s): Interior Epoxy-Modified Latex; MPI #115, 215.
4. Semi-Gloss: Gloss level 5; use this sheen □
5. Gloss: Gloss level 6; use this sheen□
6. Primer(s): As recommended by manufacturer of top coats.
C. Paint I-OP-MD-WC - Medium Duty Vertical/Overhead: Including gypsum
board, plaster, concrete, concrete masonry, uncoated steel, shop primed steel,
galvanized steel, and aluminum.
1. Two top coats and one coat primer.
2. Top Coat(s): MPI Interior Epoxy-Modified Latex; MPI #115, 215.
3. Semi-Gloss: MPI gloss level 5; use this sheen at all locations.
4. Gloss: MPI gloss level 6; use this sheen at all locations.
5. Primer(s): As recommended by manufacturer of top coats.
D. Paint I-OP-HD - Heavy Duty Vertical and Overhead: Including gypsum board,
plaster, concrete, concrete masonry, uncoated steel, shop primed steel, galvanized
steel, and aluminum.
1. Applications: See Finish Schedule.
2. Two top coats and one coat primer; primer may be omitted if topcoat
manufacturer approves.
3. Primer(s): As recommended by manufacturer of top coats.
E. Paint I-0P-DF - Dry Fall: Metals; exposed structure and overhead-mounted
services in utilitarian spaces, including shop primed steel deck, structural
steel, metal fabrications,
Galvanized ducts, galvanized conduit, galvanized piping, and _
1. Shop primer by others.
2. One topcoat; white.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |7 Section: 09 90 00
Amazon – Painting and coating.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

3. Top Coat: Alkyd Dry Fall.

4. Flat: Gloss level 1; use this sheen.
5. Eggshell: Gloss level 3; use this sheen.
6. Semi-Gloss: MPI gloss level 5; use this sheen at all locations.
F. Paint I-OP-FL - Concrete and Wood Floors Indicated to be painted.
1. Two top coats and one coat primer.
2. Top Coat(s): Moisture-Cured Polyurethane Varnish, Gloss.
3. Gloss: MPI gloss level 6; use this sheen at all locations.
G. Paint I-TR - Transparent Finish on Wood, Unless Otherwise Indicated:
1. 2 top coats, no stain.
2. Top Coat(s): Polyurethane Varnish, Moisture Cured, Gloss.
3. Gloss: MPI gloss level 6; use this sheen at all locations.
H. Paint I-TR-FL - Transparent Finish on Wood Floors:
1. 2 top coats over stain.
2. Stain: Semi-Transparent Stain for Wood.
3. Top Coat (s}: Polyurethane Varnish, Moisture Cured, and Gloss.
4. Gloss: Gloss level 6; use this sheen D-
I. Paint WI-OP-3A - Wood, Opaque, Alkyd, 3 Coat:
1. One coat alkyd primer sealer.
2. Gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
3. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
4. Eggshell: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
5. Flat: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
J. Paint WI-OP-3L - Wood, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of latex primer sealer.
2. Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.
3. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.
4. Eggshell: Two coats of latex enamel.
5. Flat: Two coats of latex enamel.
K. Paint WI-TR-V- Wood, Transparent, Varnish, No Stain:
1. One coat sealer.
2. Gloss: One coat of varnish.
3. Satin: One coat of varnish.
4. Flat: One coat of varnish.
L. Paint WI-TR-VS - Wood, Transparent, Varnish, Stain:
1. Filler coat (for open grained wood only}.
2. One coat of stain.
3. One coat sealer.
4. Gloss: One coat of varnish.
5. Satin: One coat of varnish.
6. Flat: One coat of varnish.
M. Paint CI-OP-3A - Concrete/Masonry, Opaque, Alkyd, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of block filler.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
3. Flat Two coats of alkyd enamel.
N. Paint CI-OP-3L - Concrete/Masonry, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of block filler.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.
3. Flat: Two coats of latex enamel.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |8 Section: 09 90 00
Amazon – Painting and coating.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

O. Paint MI-OP-3A- Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Alkyd, 3 Coat:

B. One coat of alkyd primer.
C. Gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
D. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
P. Paint MI-OP-3L - Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Latex, 3 Coat:
3.1 One coat of latex primer.
3.2 Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.
3.3 Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.
Q. Paint MI-OP-2A - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Alkyd, 2 Coat:
3.4 Touch-up with alkyd primer.
3.5 Gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
3.6 Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
R. Paint MI-OP-2L - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Latex, 2 Coat:
3.7 Touch-up with latex primer.
3.8 Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.
3.9 Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.
S. Paint Mgl-OP-3A - Galvanized Metals, Alkyd, 3 Coat:
3.10 One coat galvanize primer.
3.11 Gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
3.12 Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
T. Paint Mgl-OP-3L - Galvanized Metals, Latex, 3 Coat:
3.13 One coat galvanize primer.
3.14 Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.
3.15 Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.
U. Paint Mal-OP-3A - Aluminum, Unprimed, Alkyd, 3 Coat:
3.16 One coat etching primer.
3.17 Gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
3.18 Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
V. Paint Mal-OP-3L - Aluminum, Unprimed, Latex, 3 Coat:
3.19 One coat etching primer.
3.20 Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.
3.21Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.
W. Paint CI-OP-3Af - Concrete/Masonry, Alkyd Floor Enamel, 3 Coat:
3.22 One coat of alkali resistant primer.
3.23Gloss: Two coats of alkyd floor enamel.
X. Paint CI-OP-3E - Concrete/Masonry, epoxy Enamel, 3 Coat:
3.24 One coat of catalyzed epoxy primer.
3.25Gloss: Two coats of catalyzed epoxy enamel.
Y. Paint GI-OP-3A - Gypsum Board/Plaster, Alkyd, 3 Coat:
3.26 One coat of alkyd primer sealer.
3.27Gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
3.28 Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
3.29 Eggshell: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
Flat: Two coats of alkyd enamel
Z. Paint GI-OP-2A - Gypsum Board/Plaster, Alkyd, 2 Coat:
3.30 One coat of alkyd primer sealer.
3.31 Gloss: One coat of alkyd enamel.
3.32 Semi-gloss: One coat of alkyd enamel.
3.33 Eggshell: One coat of alkyd enamel.
Salama Structural Engineers
Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |9 Section: 09 90 00
Amazon – Painting and coating.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

3.34 Flat: One coat of alkyd enamel.

AA. Paint GI-OP-3L - Gypsum Board/Plaster, Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of alkyd primer sealer.
2. Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.
3. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.
4. Eggshell: Two coats of latex enamel.
5. Flat: Two coats of latex enamel.
BB. Paint GI-OP-2L - Gypsum Board/Plaster, Latex, 2 Coat:
A. One coat of alkyd primer sealer.
B. Gloss: One coat of latex enamel.
C. Semi-gloss: One coat of latex enamel.
D. Eggshell: One coat of latex. Enamel.
E. Flat: One coat of latex enamel.
CC. Paint GI-OP-3LA - Gypsum Board/Plaster, Latex-Acrylic, 3 Coat:
A. One coat of alkyd primer sealer.
B. Gloss: Two coats of latex-acrylic enamel.
C. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex-acrylic enamel.
D. Eggshell: Two coats of latex-acrylic enamel.
E. Flat: Two coats of latex enamel-acrylic.
DD. Paint GI-OP-2LA - Gypsum Board/Plaster, Latex-Acrylic, 2 Coat:
C. One coat of alkyd primer sealer.
D. Gloss: One coat of latex-acrylic enamel.
E. Semi-gloss: One coat of latex-acrylic enamel.
F. Eggshell: One coat of latex-acrylic enamel.
G. Flat: One coat of latex-acrylic enamel.
EE. Paint GI-P-2A- Gypsum Board/Plaster, Alkyd Primer, 2 Coat:
1. Two coats of alkyd primer sealer.
FF. Paint GI-P-1A - Gypsum Board/Plaster, Alkyd Primer, 1 Coat:
1. One coat of alkyd primer sealer.
GG. Paint 1-TR-F - Fire-Retardant Coating, intumescent:
1. One coat of fire-retardant primer sealer.
2. Gloss: One coat of intumescent coating, flame/smoke rating of 25/50.
HH. Paint FI-OP-3A - Fabrics/Insulation Jackets, Alkyd, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of alkyd primer sealer.
2. Gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
3. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
4. Eggshell: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
5. Flat: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
II. Paint FI-OP-2A - Fabrics/Insulation Jackets, Alkyd, 2 Coat:
1. One coat of alkyd primer sealer.
2. Gloss: One coat of alkyd enamel.
3. Semi-gloss: One coat of alkyd enamel.
4. Eggshell: One coat of alkyd enamel.
Flat One coat of alkyd enamel

2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths,
sanding materials, and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified
Salama Structural Engineers
Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e | 10 Section: 09 90 00
Amazon – Painting and coating.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

whether specifically indicated or not; commercial quality.

B. Patching Material: Latex filler.
C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product
manufacturer.
C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work.
Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application.
D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
E. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
F. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not
apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following
maximums:
1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.
2. Plaster and Stucco: 12 percent.
3. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent.
4. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.
5. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.
6. Concrete Floors and Traffic Surfaces: 8 percent.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for
achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light
fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.
E. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-
sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
F. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar,
scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with
a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow drying. Remove stains
caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium met silicate
after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.
G. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound.
Spot prime defects after repair.
H. Plaster Surfaces to be painted: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections
with latex patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash
and neutralize high alkali surfaces.
I. Concrete Floors and Traffic Surfaces to be painted: Remove contamination, acid
etch, and rinse floors with clear water. Verify required acid-alkali balance is
Salama Structural Engineers
Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e | 11 Section: 09 90 00
Amazon – Painting and coating.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

achieved. Allow to dry.

J. Aluminum Surfaces to be painted: Remove surface contamination by steam or high-
pressure water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply
etching primer immediately following cleaning.
K. Galvanized Surfaces to be painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and
wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer.
L Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove
loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous.
Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-
primed item.
M. Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to
priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and
cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces
before installation.
N. Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior
to sealing, seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes
and cracks after sealer has dried; sand lightly between coats. Prime concealed
surfaces with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with thinner.
0. Exterior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Remove dust, grit, and
foreign matter. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with
tinted exterior calking compound after prime coat has been applied. Back prime
concealed surfaces before installation.
P. Exterior Wood to Receive Transparent Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign
matter; seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes
with tinted exterior calking compound after sealer has been applied. Prime
concealed surfaces.
Q_ Wood Doors to be Field-Finished: Seal wood door top and bottom edge surfaces
with clear sealer.
R. Metal Doors to be painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces.

3.03 APPLICATION
A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and
electrical components and paint separately.
B. Exterior Wood to Receive Opaque Finish: If final painting must be delayed more
than 2 weeks after installation of woodwork, apply primer within 2 weeks and final
coating within 4 weeks.
C. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is
applied.
E. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before
next coat is applied.
F. Apply each coat to uniform appearance.
G. Dark Colors and Deep Clear Colors: Regardless of number of coats specified,
apply as many coats as necessary for complete hide.
H. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
I. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and
particles just prior to applying next coat.
Salama Structural Engineers
Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e | 12 Section: 09 90 00
Amazon – Painting and coating.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

J. Wood to Receive Transparent Finishes: Tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers
into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface.
K. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and
fittings removed prior to finishing.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field
inspection.
B. Owner will provide field inspection.

3.05 CLEANING
A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal
containers, and remove daily from site.

3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished coatings until completion of project.
B. Touch-up damaged coatings after Substantial Completion

END OF SECTION 09 90 00

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e | 13 Section: 09 90 00
 Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 09 96 50: EPOXY WALL COATINGS

Prepared By

Year 2022

Rev. 00
Amazon – Epoxy wall coatings.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTIION: 09 96 50

EPOXY WALL COATINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. The section includes:
1. High-performance epoxy glazed coating, as shown on Drawings.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section.
Other Specification Sections that relate directly to work of this Section include, but
are not limited to, the following:
1. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies
2. Section 099000 - Painting and Coating
3. Section 099600 - High-Performance Coatings

1.3 DEFINITIONS AND EXTENT

A. This Section includes surface preparation and field coating of designated interior
surfaces.
1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in
addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each coating system indicated. Include block fillers and primers.
1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each
material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application.
Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general
classification.
2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including
label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating
material.
B. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture
to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate.
C. Qualification Data: For Applicator.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying coatings
and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this
Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-
service performance.
B. Mockups: Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample for each type of coating and
substrate required, minimum 3m by 3m. Comply with procedures specified in
PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of approved sample Submittals.
Salama Structural Engineers
Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |1 Section: 09 96 50
Amazon – Epoxy wall coatings.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and
containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information:
1. Product name or title of material.
2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Application instructions.
6. Color name and number.
7. voe content.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area.
Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 EPOXY WALL COATING SYSTEM

A Components:
1. Two-component, epoxy based saturate layer.
2. Woven fiberglass reinforcement.
3. Coating: Two-component, high performance, and high solids epoxy glaze coating.
B. Physical Characteristics:
1. Minimum Dry Film Thickness: 25 mils/635 microns
2. Fire Resistance of Dry Film: ASTM E 84, Class A.
3. Bond Strength: ASTM D 7234, greater than 400 psi.
4. Hardness: ASTM D 2240, Shore D, 80 to 85.
5. Impact Resistance: ASTM D 2794 exceeds 70 inch-lbs.
6. VOC Content: ASTM D 2369, 70 grams/liter.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for
compliance with requirements for coating application.
1. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected and surfaces receiving coating are thoroughly dry.
2. Start of application will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and
conditions within a particular area.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces,
lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be coated. If
removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide
surface-applied protection before surface preparation and coating.
B. Cleaning: Before applying coating or other surface treatments, clean substrates of
substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease
before cleaning.
C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be coated according to
manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as
specified.
Salama Structural Engineers
Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |2 Section: 09 96 50
Amazon – Epoxy wall coatings.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare coating materials according to

manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply coating according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use
applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being
applied.
B. Application Procedures: Apply coatings according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
C. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply coating materials no thinner than
manufacturer is recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness
indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended
by manufacturer.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other
discarded coating materials from Project site.

3.5 PROTECTION
A Protect work of other trades. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and
recoating, as approved by Architect.

END OF SECTION 09 96 50

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |3 Section: 09 96 50
Amazon – Table of Contents – Specialties.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

TABLE OF CONTENTS

ARCHITECTURAL WORKS

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

Section No.
Descriptions

10 14 33 DIGITAL SIGNAGE
10 28 00 TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |1 TOC
Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 10 14 33: DIGITAL SIGNAGE

Prepared By

Year 2022

Rev. 00
Amazon – Digital signage.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTIION: 10 14 33

DIGITAL SIGNAGE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REALETED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this section.
B. Requirements specified in the following sections apply to this Section:
1. Section "Basic Division 16 Requirements".
2. Section "Structured Cabling Systems".

1.2 SUMMARY
C. This Section includes Digital Signage System including all software, hardware,
licensing and programming.
D. This Section includes requirements for video and sound system components
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Digital Signage Software.
2. Server.
3. Equipment Cabinets and Racks.
4. Encoders.
5. Decoders.
6. LCD Monitors.
7. Mounting Brackets.
8. Equipment Cabling.

1.3 DESIGN INTENT

A. To display scaled source video and content from the Computer, cable TV feed or
video camera as required onto flat panel LCD monitor.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The installation shall include comprehensive audio/video systems consisting of
modern solid state type equipment providing the following:
1. Distribution of digital signage content to multiple locations from a centralized
location with
a building.
2. System shall be flexible to accommodate various inputs and content.
Customize system as directed by the KFSHRC.
3. Provide software to allow Owner to create and customize various forms
of content including but not limiting to images, live CATV, power point,
text, video, RSS feeds.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |1 Section: 10 14 33
Amazon – Digital signage.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A Shop drawings and manufacturer's literature shall include all information necessary
to confirm that the proposed system is in complete compliance with the
Specifications.
1. All items of equipment must be new, in current production and currently
eligible for maintenance coverage.
a. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract,
Division 01
Specification Sections and Section Basic Division 16 Requirements:
1) Detailed bill of materials/equipment list.
2) Manufacturer's product data for each type of product specified.
3) Details of audio/visual system including, but not limited to the following.
a) Rack arrangements.
b) Wiring Diagrams detailing wiring for power, signal, and control
differentiating clearly between manufacturer-installed wiring and
field-installed wiring
Identify terminal numbers and wiring color codes to facilitate
installation, operation, and maintenance. Identify wiring
interface to other systems.
c) Field Testing Data.
d) Record Documents:
1) Provide record documents in accordance with Division 01 and
Division 16 Specification Sections.
e) Warranty information.
f) Qualifications as specified in Section 1.6.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications:
1. Firms regularly engaged in manufacture and installation of professional
audio/visual systems, components and accessories, of types, capacities and
characteristics required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 5 years and who shall be able to refer to similar
installations rendering satisfactory service.
a. Supplier's Qualifications:
1) Engage an experienced product supplier who is a factory-authorized
sales and service representative regularly engaged in the design and
installation of such systems to oversee the installation, trouble-shoot
and make final connections at headend equipment.
2) Supplier shall have represented the product and components being
installed for a minimum of 2 years.
b. Installer Qualifications:
1) Firms with at least 5 years of successful installation experience with
projects installing professional audio and video systems similar to
that required for this project.
a) Provide the names and certifications of two qualified
Manufacturer certified programmers currently on staff that are
capable and experienced in this type of installation.
b) Provide reference list of at least five similar installations
successfully completed within the last three years within a
100-mile radius. Include scope of work, contact name, title
and telephone number.
Salama Structural Engineers
Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |2 Section: 10 14 33
Amazon – Digital signage.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

c. Electrical Component Standard:Provide work complying with applicable

requirements of NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code."
d. EIA Compliance: Comply with the following Electronics Industries
Association Standards:
1) Sound Systems, EIA-160.
2) Loudspeaker, Dynamic Magnetic Structures, and Impedance, EIA-299-
A.
3) Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment, EIA-310-A.
4) Amplifiers for Sound Equipment, SE-101-A.
5) Speakers for Sound Equipment, SE-103.
6) UL Compliance: Comply with requirements of UL 50.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products in factory containers. Store in clean, dry space in original
containers. Protect products from fumes, dust and construction traffic. Handle
carefully to avoid damage.

1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate all work to be performed with actual field and project conditions. At
a minimum, perform the following tasks prior to submitting bids or shop
drawings for the project:
1. Perform field investigations to determine all necessary incidental items,
which will be required for complete and proper installation of all work. Verify
all items affecting the bid price prior to bidding.
2. Perform all necessary field measurements to provide complete, accurate, and
coordinated shop drawing submittals.
3. Organize and attend all necessary coordination meetings required to
assure proper coordination and installation of all related work included in
the project.

1.9 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

A. At the time of Contract execution, the NV Contractor shall assign a Project
Manager to the Project that will be responsible for administering all
correspondence between the NV Contractor, administering all other trades,
Construction Manager, Owner and Architect V Engineer. The Project Manager
shall also be responsible for the following:
1. Attending all meetings and reporting on project status, schedule, deliverables,
man power, shutdowns, etc.
2. Approving all submittal information.
3. Supervising and providing implementation, installation, testing,
certification cutover, acceptance and documentation for all installed
work.
a. The project team will consist of a Project Engineer that will be responsible
for all
On-site day-to-day tasks, installation, and data collection and programming
at the site.
b. Kickoff Meeting - Purpose of the meeting is to introduce the project team
to the Owner and Engineer and to identify any schedule conflicts,
equipment lead times, review any previously approved substitutions,
environmental and space requirements, additional data/electrical
requirements and customer responsibilities.
Salama Structural Engineers
Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |3 Section: 10 14 33
Amazon – Digital signage.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

1) Provide a list of milestone dates to meet the installation schedule

including shop drawing review, equipment delivery, programming
review, customer review, etc.
c. Programming Design Meetings:
1) The NV Contractor shall provide a comprehensive block diagram or
flow chart for each NV system to present to the Owner the intuitive
operation of all components controlled by the touch screen/controller
in each room.
2) Provide a configuration review session for the operation of the system
component sources and outputs for the Owner's review and input prior
to beginning programming . Be prepared with sample control scenarios
and each system input/output criteria for the design session. Provide
follow-up information in submittal format for written approval.
d. Installation Review
1) Complete a review meeting with the Owner and review all the required
inputs/outputs and scenarios discussed in the design meetings and
implement to verify with all the equipment in operating condition.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. All items of equipment including wire and cable shall be designed by the
manufacturer supplier to operate as a complete system and shall be accompanied
by complete service notes and drawings detailing all inter-connections.
B. Equipment shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. Each major
component shall bear the manufacturer's name and catalog number.
C. Careful attention has been made to specify current production models for all
equipment listed, however due to frequent updates of equipment in this field some
model numbers may become with the same features by the time this project is built.
In such cases the nearest equivalent product discontinued by the same
manufacturer shall be provided.

2.2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Provide complete and fully functional Digital Signage System using
materials and equipment of types, sizes, ratings, and performances as indicated.
Use materials and equipment that comply with referenced standards and
manufacturers' standard design and construction in accordance with published
product information. Coordinate the features of
materials and equipment so they form an integrated system with components and
interconnections matched for optimum performance of specified functions.
B. Provide head end service capable of streaming one channel of digital signage
content to multiple end points.

2.3 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A. Digital Signage Server
1. Multiple zone capable.
2. Integral HD digital tuner/analog tuner.
3. 1 TB hard drive.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |4 Section: 10 14 33
Amazon – Digital signage.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

4. 10/100/1000 network interface.

5. Intel i7 processor.
6. 16X recordable DVD/CD Rom.
7. (4) USB inputs.
8. RS323 control port.
9. Power cord.
10. Video Out: (1) HDMI, (12) 15 Pin VGA.
11. Audio Out: (1) via HDMI.
12. Support the following resolutions: 1280 x 720, 1360 x 768, 1366 x 768, 1600 x
900, 1920X 1080.
13. Rack mount kit.
14. Remote Decoder/Receiver
a. (1) RJ45 input.
b. (1) VGA output.
c. Minicam or approved equal.
15. Broadcaster Encoder
a. (1) VGA input.
b. (8) RJ4 system output.
c. Resultion: 1600 x 1200@ 75 Hz.
16. 46" LCD Flat Panel Monitor:
a. Aspect Ratio: 16 x 9.
b. Resolution: 1366 x 768.
c. HD Display Standards: 480i, 480p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p.
d. Contrast Ratio: 800:1.
e. Inputs: DVl-O, composite, S-Video, component, RS-232, RCA audio.
f. External speakers.
g. PIP/POP/Split Screen.
h. Wall mounted.
i. Support integration with flat panel overlay.
j. 3 year warranty.
17. LCD TV Wall Mount Bracket:
a. Low profile, less than 2 inches.
b. Pitch-Adjustable (Pull-N-Pitch Adjustment Control).
c. Q-Laser Locking Mechanism System.
d. 90 deg. Rotation adapter.
e. Use tamper resistant hardware.
f. Chief PLP series or approved equal.

2.4 CABLES/WIRES
A. Utilize factory-manufactured patch cords in lieu of field terminated cables and
components at rack connections and wherever possible.
1. Utilize industry standard color coded connectors.
2. Verify patch cord length and routing through sleeves/conduits prior to submittal
stage.
3. Utilize compression type connectors for all field terminated components
where required. Provide industry standards identifiable color rings
indicating connection type.
4. All cabling shall be plenum rated.
5. Provide all video cabling/connectors to produce the optimal video signal
available from the source to the display as available from the equipment.
6. Amplify video signals as required for intended video resolution.
Salama Structural Engineers
Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |5 Section: 10 14 33
Amazon – Digital signage.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

7. A/V UTP Cable:

a. Enhanced skew free cabling.
b. 4-unshielded twisted pairs, in an exterior jacket.
c. 23 AWG solid copper insulated conductors.
d. Outer jacket shall be blue and identified per NEC.
e. Cable shall be plenum rated.
2.5 LABELING
A. Engraved Faceplates:
1. Engrave faceplates with input type in Classrooms and finished areas.
2. Machine Printed Labels:
a. Self adhesive, smudge resistant vinyl labels for cables and faceplates.
b. Size labels appropriately for cable diameters; utilize "wrap" installation.
c. Size labels appropriately to fit in recessed area of faceplate, under
available plastic cover or at proper location to identify control
buttons or inputs.
d. Submit samples of labels to verify color of label and size of font for each
application.
e. Center justify all text.
f. Utilize Hellermon-Tyton Spirit 2100 or approved equal by Rhino
Pro, Brother or Panduit.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions for compliance with requirements and other
conditions affecting the performance of the Digital Signage system work.
B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A General : Install system in accordance with NFPA 70 and other
applicable codes. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions.
B. All installation practices shall be in accordance with, but not limited to, these
specifications and drawings. Installation shall be performed in accordance with
the applicable standards, requirements and recommendations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
C. If, in the opinion of the installer, an installation practice is desired or required,
which is contrary to these specifications or drawings, a written request for
modification shall be made to the Consultant. Modifications shall not
commence without written approval from the Consultant.
D. Maintain a competent supervisor and supporting technical personnel ,
acceptable to the University and Engineer during the entire installation. The
Contractor shall submit the name and contact information of the supervisor.
Change of supervision during the project is not acceptable without prior
written approval from the Owner.
E. Install all equipment to industry safety and ergonomic standards and provide

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |6 Section: 10 14 33
Amazon – Digital signage.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

full engineering and technical support throughout the installation process.

F. Wiring Methods: Install wiring in raceway except within accessible ceiling
spaces, where open cable wiring methods may be used. Use UL-listed plenum
cable. Conceal wiring.
1. Install cabling in conduit/raceway in all areas with exposed structure.
2. Install all cabling as required for proper system operation.
3. Cable shall be homerun per manufacturer's specifications .

4. Impedance and Level Matching: Carefully match input and output impedances
and signal levels at signal interfaces. Provide matching networks where
required.
5. Install cables/conduits parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed
structural members, and follow surface contours. Secure and support
cables/conduits by straps or similar fittings so designed and installed as not to
damage the cables. Secure cable at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not
more than 6 inches from every cabinet, box, or fitting.
6. Wiring Within Enclosures: Provide adequate length of conductors to allow
sliding cabinet to open and rotate 90 degrees. Bundle, lace, and train the
conductors to terminal points with no excess. Provide and use lacing bars.
7. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make splices, taps, and terminations on
numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, terminal
cabinets, and equipment enclosures.
8. Identification of Conductors and Cables: Use color coding of conductors and
apply wire and cable marking tape to designate wires and cables so all media
are identified in coordination with system wiring diagrams.
9. Repairs: Wherever walls, ceilings, floors, or other building finishes are cut for
installation, repair, restore, and refinish to original appearance.
10. Adjust and balance all circuits as specified herein. Set all controls and
software parameters to render a fully and optimally operating systems and
subsystems. All computer-controlled functions shall require complete
audio/computer/software setup, balancing, label-entry and documentation.
11. Provide intelligible, permanent identification on or adjacent to all patching
jacks, connectors, receptacles, terminal blocks meters, indicators, switches,
equalizers, mixers, amplifiers, etc. The identification shall clearly indicate the
function or circuit.
12. The installer must take such precautions as are necessary to guard against
electromagnetic and electrostatic hum, to supply adequate ventilation, and to
install the equipment so as to provide maximum safety to the operator.
13. Care shall be exercised in wiring so as to avoid damage to the cables
and to the equipment. All joints and connections shall be made with
rosin-core solder or with mechanical connectors approved by the
Consultant.

3.3 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Mount all equipment in equipment racks designed to support the equipment.
B. Install all equipment per manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Meet with Owner for detailed system design and configuration review.
Meeting to explain features, functionality and operability of system. Provide
two (2) sessions.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |7 Section: 10 14 33
Amazon – Digital signage.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

D. Identify, initiate, coordinate and complete all required programming of all

equipment for proper and safe operation of equipment and users.
E. Utilize optimal video inputs for connection of digital signage equipment to encoder and
decoder.
F. Properly test all equipment for proper operation and provide final adjustments as
required for optimal audio and visual performance.
G. Provide all equipment test reports, signed and certified to Owner and
Engineer prior to substantial completion.

3.4 LCD INSTALLATION

A Coordinate exact unit location with drawings and exact field dimensions.
A. Install wall mount as required including bracing in wall as required.
B. Install all NV patch cords, test and adjust unit per manufacturer's recommendation.
C. Connect monitor to security cable. Coordinate with security system installer.
D. Provide laminated plastic plate and mount to LCD monitor the following "Device
Protected by Integrated Security System Contact AN Department Before
Removal."

3.5 LABELING
A. Provide labels on all cabling and patch cords identifying source, output, type to easily
and correctly indicate operation and use.
B. Provide at equipment (rack) and outlet as required.
1. Engrave faceplates for AN outlets with input type or provide factory
provided (non-removable) markings acceptable to Owner and
Engineer.
2. Provide labels at all equipment controls requiring user interface or not
for Owner troubleshooting and easy identification for future re-
programming or configuration.
3. Labels shall be affixed free of smudges and fingerprints within three inches of
termination.
4. Labels shall be viewable without rotating or removing patch cords or cables.

3.6 GROUNDING
A. Provide equipment grounding connections for systems. Division 16 will
provide ground conductor to signal grounding busbar per J-Std 607A.
B. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard
486A to assure permanent and effective grounds.
C. Ground equipment, conductor, and cable shields to eliminate shock hazard and to
minimize to the greatest extent possible, ground loops, common mode returns, noise
pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. Measure, record , and report ground
resistance.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide services of a factory-authorized service
representative to supervise the field assembly and connection of components and the
Salama Structural Engineers
Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |8 Section: 10 14 33
Amazon – Digital signage.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

pretesting, testing, and adjustment of the system.

B. Before final acceptance of the system, manufacturer-supplier of system shall, in
presence of Owner's representative, test each and every component and device in
the system. Test shall be documented with signed copy submitted to the Owner
and Architect/Engineer.
C. The system shall be physically inspected by the Owner's representative and the
Architect/Engineer to assure that all equipment is installed in a neat and
workmanlike manner as called for in the plans and specifications.

3.8 SYSTEM TESTING AND ADJUSTMENTS

A. Upon completion of the system installation, and after circuitry has been
energized with the normal power source, the manufacturer/supplier shall test the
system to verify the following:
1. All components are operational and functioning properly to the system designs
intent.
2. Perform all necessary adjustments and balancing of all signal and amplifier
level controls to insure proper operation. Ensure output levels of sources are
equal.
3. The complete system is free from grounds, open and shorts except for made
grounds required by the system installation.
4. The system is free of hum or noise including but not limited to ground
loops, improper impedance matching or improper shielding.
5. Configure signal processor to perform all gating, precedence,
equalization and compression to provide optimal performance.
6. Correct all of the above and retest to demonstrate compliance where required by
Engineer.
7. All testing shall be documented. Provide a signed copy to the
Owner/Engineer verifying the system is complete, and fully functional.
8. Make observations to verify that units and controls are properly
labeled and interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.

9. The manufacturer/supplier shall set all field adjustable components to optimize

the system. Balance all signals, adjust and verify input voltages, current settings
and frequency settings.
10. Occupancy Adjustments:
a. When requested by the Architect, within one year of date of substantial
completion, provide on-site assistance in re-programming systems to suit
user operation and actual, occupied conditions.
b. Provide up to three visits for this work.

3.9 CLEANING
A. Provide cutting and patching necessary to perform work per appropriate Sections.
Clean all equipment on a day-to-day basis and final cleaning of all equipment prior
to turning over to the Owner. All necessary cleaning referred to herein shall be
cleaned to the satisfaction of the Owner's representative.
B. Equipment:
1. Clean all equipment completely inside and out prior to testing.
2. Furnish cleaning consisting of vacuuming all panels, terminations, enclosures
(inside and out), etc. If equipment is wet or contains moisture, it shall be

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |9 Section: 10 14 33
Amazon – Digital signage.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

thoroughly dried before testing.

3. Raceways and Junction Boxes:
a. Blow out and dry all raceways and conduits prior to installation of cabling.
4. Final Cleaning:
a. Clean all devices, device plates, etc. left in "like new" condition to the
satisfaction of the Owner's representative prior to Owner occupancy.
b. Dispose of all rubbish and discarded materials and remove from the site, as
required.
c. Clean all equipment to the satisfaction of the Owner's representative.
d. Include all costs for service such as travel, mileage, expenses, labor, etc.

3.10 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Prepare, set up, and supervise installation of system equipment to the
satisfaction of the Owner's Representative and requirements of manufacturer
warranty.
B. Include services of technician to review installation techniques and service final
connections, and system testing.
C. Final Adjustment Upon Achieving Substantial Completion of the Work: Adjust all
operable components to ensure that they are properly installed and functioning
smoothly. Replace any component which cannot be adjusted for proper operation.

3.11 OPERATION INSTRUCTION

A. The installer shall provide on-the-job training by a suitably qualified instructor, to
personnel designated by the Owner, to instruct them in the operation and
maintenance of the systems. At no additional cost to the Owner, the Installer shall
provide a manufacturer's representative for such instruction in the event the Installer
does not have qualified instructors on staff for certain sophisticated equipment. All
training shall take place after the systems are operational, but before the acceptance
tests. There shall be a total of 16 hours of training on the systems included in this
specification, at the discretion of the Owner. There shall be 2 follow-up training
visits after 6 months, each a 4 hour training session for a refresher on equipment as
determined by the Owner.
B. The Installer shall orally instruct and demonstrate, to personnel selected by the
Owner, the Owner's Operating Manual and all final drawings as provided for in
this Section.
C. This training session shall be performed independent of any acceptance testing
procedures, and factory training at any manufacturer's facility. This training
session shall be performed independent of any other clause in this Section.
D. A schedule shall be submitted clearly defining the training period two
weeks prior to commencement of such training.

3.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Equipment Manuals:
1. Approved copy of system submittal.
2. Provide a complete set of equipment cut sheets, parts list, including
maintenance criteria, "trouble-shooting" guide, distributor information and
service information for all equipment provided.
3. Provide a complete set of instruction manuals; including complete written
programming
Salama Structural Engineers
Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e | 10 Section: 10 14 33
Amazon – Digital signage.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

instructions, programming documentation and system set-up documentation.

a. Provide an additional quick-start guide with all commonly used
procedures for operating the system. Laminate and provide copies
during training session.
1) Provide all test results performed. Include manufacturer's
certifications that installed system complies with specification
requirements.
4. Equipment Drawings:
a. Contractor shall provide a revised set of system wiring diagrams upon the
completion of the installation for subsequent testing of the system to show
actual cable routing, connections with other systems cable lengths values of
all equipment as installed and actual signal values as tested.
b. Utilize architectural floor plans for system layout.
5. Software:
a. Provide copies of all system programming for backup of systems
and future reworking/reconfiguration.
b. Provide all documentation to Owner on CD in PDF and Word format.

3.13 SPARE PARTS/ MAINTENACE EQUIPMENT

A. Provide two spare projector lamps for future replacement.

END OF SECTION 10 14 33

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e | 11 Section: 10 14 33
 Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 10 28 00: TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

Prepared By

Year 2022

Rev. 00
Amazon – Toilet, Bath and laundry Accessories.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTIION: 10 28 00

TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Accessories for toilet rooms, showers, residential bathrooms, and utility rooms.
B. Grab bars.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

C. Section 08 83 00 - Mirrors: Other mirrors.
D. Section 09 30 00 - Tiling: Ceramic washroom accessories.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)
Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2012.
B. ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-
Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip; 1999 (Reapproved 2009}.
C. ASTM A269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic
Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service; 2010.
D. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip
Process; 2011.
E. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic
Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.
F. ASTM B456 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus
Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium; 2011e1.
G. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011e1.
H. ASTM C1503 - Standard Specification for Silvered Flat Glass Mirror; 2008.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

E. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wan reinforcement,
concealed ceiling supports, and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive
anchor attachments.
1.5 SUBMITTAL$
F. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
G. Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of
function, attachment methods.
H. Samples: Submit two samples of each accessory, illustrating color and finish.
I. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and
conditions requiring special attention.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |1 Section: 10 28 00
Amazon – Toilet, Bath and laundry Accessories.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged
complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor
components for installation.
1. Grind welded joints smooth.
2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces.
B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304.
C. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, Type 304 or 316.
D. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with
G90/Z275 coating.
E. Mirror Glass: Float glass, ASTM C1036 Type I, Class 1, Quality Q2, with silvering,
protective and physical characteristics complying with ASTM C1503.
F. Adhesive: Two component epoxy type, waterproof.
G. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamper-proof, security type.
H. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer
for component and substrate.

2.2 FINISHES
A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin brushed finish, unless otherwise noted.
B. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B456, SC 2, satin finish, unless otherwise noted.
C. Baked Enamel: Pretreat to clean condition, apply one coat primer and minimum
two coats epoxy baked enamel.
D. Galvanizing for Items Other than Sheet: Comply with ASTM A123/A123M;
galvanize ferrous metal and fastening devices.
E. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pretreat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and
bake.
F. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent
electrolysis.

2.3 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Single roll, surface mounted bracket type, chrome-plated
zinc alloy brackets.
1. Attached Purse Shelf: 0.8 mm satin finished stainless steel, with rolled or formed
edge at
front.
B. Paper Towel Dispenser: Folded paper type, stainless steel, semi-recessed, with viewing
slots on sides as refill indicator and tumbler lock.
1. Capacity: 300 C-fold minimum.
C. Paper Towel Dispenser: Electric, roll paper type.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |2 Section: 10 28 00
Amazon – Toilet, Bath and laundry Accessories.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

1. Cover: Stainless steel.

2. Paper Discharge: Auto-cut dispense.
3. Capacity: 6 inch diameter roll.
4. Mounting: Fully recessed.
5. Power: Battery operated.
6. Refill Indicator: Illuminated refill indicator.
D. Electric Hand Dryer:
1. Voltage: 110 -120 volts.
2. Total Energy Usage: 540 watts or less.
3. Style: Vertical - Contemporary, Surface mounted.
4. Air Velocity: 16000 lfm (81.28 m/sec).
5. Warranty: 5 year.
6. Vandal-resistant tamper resistant screw attachment.
7. Vandal-resistant heavy duty cast iron cover.
8. Vandal-resistant inaccessible motor and heater.
9. Cover Material: 6 mm thick cast iron.
10. Finish: Porcelain enamel.
11. Mounting Height: to the bottom of the nozzle.
a. Men: 44 inches (1110 mm).
b. Women: 1060 mm.
c. Teenager: 41 inches (1035 mm).
d. Child: 810 mm.
e. Handicap: 36 inches (910 mm).
E. Waste Receptacle : Stainless steel, freestanding style with swing top.
1. Liner: Removable seamless stainless steel receptacle.
2. Liner: Removable, heavy-duty vinyl liner, attached at a minimum of 4 points
with stainless steel grommets and hooks.
3. Minimum capacity: 38 liters.
F. Soap Dispenser: Liquid soap dispenser, deck-mounted on vanity, with polyethylene
container concealed below deck; piston and 100 mm spout of stainless steel with bright
polished finish; chrome-plated deck escutcheon.
1. Minimum Capacity: 0.5 liter.
G. Seat Cover Dispenser: Stainless steel, surface-mounted, reloading by concealed
opening at base , tumbler lock.
1. Minimum capacity: 250 seat covers , each side.
H. Grab Bars: Stainless steel, 32 mm outside diameter, minimum 1.3 mm wall thickness,
nonslip grasping surface finish, concealed flange mounting; 38 mm clearance between
wall and inside of grab bar.
1. Length: 900 mm.

2.4 SHOWER AND TUB ACCESSORIES

A. Shower Curtain Rod: Stainless steel tube, 25 mm outside diameter, 1.0 mm wall
thickness, satin-finished, with 75 mm outside diameter, minimum 1.0 mm thick satin-
finished stainless steel flanges, for installation with exposed fasteners.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |3 Section: 10 28 00
Amazon – Toilet, Bath and laundry Accessories.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

B. Shower Curtain:
1. Material: Opaque vinyl, 0.2 mm thick, matte finish, with antibacterial treatment,
flameproof and stain-resistant.
2. Material: Cotton, machine washable, and mildew-resistant.
3. Size: 914 by 1830 mm, hemmed edges.
4. Grommets: Stainless steel; pierced through top hem on 150 mm centers.
5. Color: White.
6. Shower curtain hooks: Chrome-plated or stainless steel spring wire designed
for snap closure.
C. Wall-Mounted Soap Dish: Heavy duty, seamless stainless steel, surface-mounted
with drain holes, without grab bar, satin finish; with concealed mechanical fastening
suitable for substrate and backplate.
D. Towel Bar: Stainless steel Type 304, 20 mm square tubular bar; rectangular
brackets, concealed attachment, satin finish.
E. Towel Ring: Stainless steel, 64 mm extension from wall, with 6 mm diameter
trapezoidal shaped ring, rectangular-shaped bracket and backplate for concealed
attachment, satin finish.
F. Robe Hook: Heavy-duty stainless steel, single-prong, rectangular-shaped
bracket and backplate for concealed attachment, satin finish.

2.5 RESIDENTIAL ACCESSORIES

A Tumbler and Toothbrush Holder: Wall-mounted, stainless steel, 58 mm diameter
tumbler hole, 2 toothbrush holes located on each side of tumbler hole, rectangular-
shaped bracket and backplate for concealed attachment, satin finish.
B. Medicine Cabinet: One-piece construction of heavy-gage steel with factory-applied,
gloss white, baked enamel finish, surface-mounted, satin finish stainless steel mirror
frame, reversible type.

2.6 UTILITY ROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Mop and Broom Holder: 1.3 mm thick stainless steel, Type 304, hat-shaped
channel.
B. Combination Utility Shelf/Mop and Broom Holder: 1.3 mm thick stainless steel,
Type 304, with 12 mm returned edges, 1.6 mm steel wall brackets.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.
C. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings.

3.2 PREPARATION

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |4 Section: 10 28 00
Amazon – Toilet, Bath and laundry Accessories.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation.

B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.
C. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations, as
indicated on drawings, and as follows:

END OF SECTION 10 28 00

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |5 Section: 10 28 00
Amazon – Table of Contents – Equipment.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

TABLE OF CONTENTS

ARCHITECTURAL WORKS

DIVISION 11 - equipment

Section No.
Descriptions

11 24 23 BUILDING MAINTENANCE UNITS

11 12 00 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |1 TOC
 Diamond Tower – New Capital project

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 11 24 23: BUILDING MAINTENANCE UNITS

Prepared By

Year 2022

Rev. 00
Amazon – BMU,.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

SECTIION: 11 24 23

BUILDING MAINTENANCE UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REALETED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A Section includes BMU system, complete and ready for use as shown on
Drawings and as specified.

1.3 REFERENCE DOCUMENT

A BMU Concept Design Report (Option 5}, dated 06 December 2012 (Rev. A),
prepared by MEINHARDT for DAMAC Twin Towers, Riyadh, KSA.

B. Reference Standards: As listed in BMU Concept Design Report above.

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A British Standards

B. European Standard Norme

C. Australian Codes/Regulations

D. American Standards

PART 2 PRODUCTS

a. BMU SYSTEM
Salama Structural Engineers
Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |1 Section: 11 24 23
Amazon – BMU,.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

A Horizontal Track BMU System: The machines will travel along horizontal tracks
to reach the working positions. The machines would be fitted with telescoping and
luffing jibs with approximately 21.5 m reach for an ideal working position.
Estimated machine mass shall be approximately 25 tons. BMU shall be parked
with jib parallel to the tracks to minimize visual appearance.

B. Cradle Capacity: 250 kg suitable for 2 operators plus cleaning water and light-duty
hand tools.

b. BMU SYSTEM DESIGN

A BMU Restraint System: The cradle shall be held against the fa9ade at minimum of
20 m to prevent it from swaying around in a manner where it could endanger the
occupants or damage the fa9ade.

C. Materials Hoist (Glass Replacement Unit): Upgrade BMU's with additional hoists to
support the additional weight of replacement glass panel and associated lifting frame
(glass suction unit).
3.1 Capacity of Hoist: 350 kg but could be custom-made to suite site requirements.

D. MEP Requirements: Provide 3 phase (+ Neutral + Earth) power outlets around

perimeter of the building, adjacent to BMU paths.

0. Weather Tightness: BMU components shall not result in degradation of the thermal
and weather proofing of the facade system.

A. Weather Conditions: BMU shall be designed to work efficiently in ambient

temperature ranging from -10 degrees Celsius through to 55 degrees Celsius in
compliance with EN 1808.

B. Steel Coating Selection

o Hot Dipped Galvanized
o Paint
o Stainless Steel
o Aluminum Coating Selection
o Anodized

o Powder-Coated

c. BMU SYSTEM EFFICIENCY

A. Cleaning Cycles: 4 times a year, complete cleaning of vision glass, spandrel and other
features.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |2 Section: 11 24 23
Amazon – BMU,.2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

B. BMU Applied Loads: Refer to BMU Concept Design Report.

d. P3 EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)

END OF SECTION 11 24 23

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |3 Section: 11 24 23
Amazon – Table of Contents – Conveying system .2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 14 – Conveying System

Section No.
Descriptions

14 01 22 General Provision - Elevators and Escalators

14 02 03 Lifts-Field Quality Control

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |1 TOC
Diamond Tower – New Capital project

SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 14 01 22 - Conveying Systems

General Provision - Elevators and Escalators

Prepared By

Year 2022
Rev. 00
Amazon – Conveying System .2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital
General Provision – Elevators & Escalators

SECTION 14 01 22: GENERAL PROVISION - ELEVATORS AND ESCALATORS

1. GENERAL

1.1 SECTIONS INCLUDES

1. Comply with General Conditions of Contract, Conditions of Particular Application, and

the Requirements of Division 1 of these Specifications.

2. Where a device or piece of equipment is referred to in the singular number, it is intended

that such references shall apply to as many devices or pieces of equipment as are
required.

1.2 SUMMARY

1. This Section applies to the provision of:

1. Passengers elevators

2. Firemen elevator

2. Elevators provided include:

Elevators to be gearless or geared, with a rated speed of 2.5mps, and capacity
of 1250 kg. doors to be centre opening , 1000 mmx2100 mm high , with 400 mm high
fixed transom , stainless steel with hairline finish.

3. Passenger elevator cab interiors are custom designed to harmonize with the design
caliber of the main lobby areas and with the first class image of the building. Finishes
include stone tile flooring, stainless steel with hairline finish.

1.3 RELATED WORK

1. Power of necessary characteristics during erection of elevators and s to provide

illumination, operation of required tools, hoists and power for starting, testing and
adjusting elevators.

2. Cutouts in concrete to accommodate elevator entrances, cab and fixtures. Reinforced

concrete slabs constructed after the elevator machine beams are in place, at top of hoist
way for all elevators.

3. Concrete and steel work required for fire rated and plumbs hoist ways, machine rooms,
secondary levels, well ways and pits. Beams, floor slabs, or other building construction
(except divider beams and sill supports) shall not project more than 100 mm inside
general line of hoist way unless top surface in beveled at an angle of not less than 75
degrees with the horizontal.

4. Supports to carry all structural reaction, impact and uplift loads imposed by the elevator

5. Masonry and grouting of elevator hoist way entrances and landing sills.

6. : Pit ladders, equipment hoist beams and shaft divider beams. Maximum spacing of
divider beams shall be 4200 mm, with additional divider beams required at the midpoint
of typical floors and other areas where the floor-to-floor height exceeds 4200 mm.
Divider beams are provided by the Structural Contractor.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |2 SECTION 14 01 22
Amazon – Conveying System .2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital
General Provision – Elevators & Escalators

7. Elevator numbering as follows:

1. Provide minimum 75 mm high, raised numbers for each car and mount above each
car’s entrance frame header at Main Entrance Level.

2. Numbers shall be finished in stainless steel.

3. Numbers shall be mounted to lobby wall surfaces without visible fastening devices,
in a location as confirmed by the Consultant at time of shop drawings review.

8. Waterproofing to keep pits dry.

9. Pit access door for elevators as shown on Drawings. Doors shall be fire-resistive, self-
closing, self-locking and permit the door to be opened from inside without a key.

10. : Finishing coat of paint on all prime coat entrance frames and door panels as provided
as per elevator Particular. Spec

11. Landing floor finishes to access landing plates.

12. : Permanent heating, ventilation, air conditioning necessary to keep Machine Room
temperature below 32ºC.

13. Two sets of fire alarm signals will be provided to each Elevator Machine Room. These
signals include:

1. General Recall Signal, including all Building fire alarm sensors and devices, except
those located at the Stress Level lobbies.

2. Machine Room Fire, from smoke sensors in respective Elevator Machine Rooms.
These Machine Room smoke sensors shall be provided with a set of dry or auxiliary
contacts wired directly to the elevator controllers and tied into the Building’s fire
alarm system.

14. Proper electric feeder wires to controllers as determined by supplier, including necessary
mainline switches, circuit breakers or fuses. Supplementary disconnect switches at
remote locations. Necessary outlets or feeder wires to controller as necessary for signal
circuit, car lights, fans and in pit for pit light.

15. Conduit runs remote from machine rooms and hoist ways and pulling of interconnecting
wiring through the conduits.

16. Elevator Machine Room, secondary level, elevator pit lighting and receptacle outlets.
Minimum light level of 100 lux at floor of Machine Room in front of each controller, at
secondary floor slab level and at pit floor slab level. Locate light switches adjacent to pit
and Machine Room access doors, pit access ladders and secondary level access hatch.
17. Emergency power and emergency power transfer switches sufficient to operate six
elevators in the tower,

18. Provide two advance warning transfer signals from the transfer switch. Signals will warn
of impending transfer from normal to emergency power (i.e. Emergency power test
simulation) and from emergency back to normal power. Signal delay time will be
approximately 20 seconds.
19. Elevator communications system except as specified herein.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |3 SECTION 14 01 22
Amazon – Conveying System .2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital
General Provision – Elevators & Escalators

20. Supply in-car speakers and interconnect terminal strips with one way voice emergency
(EVAC) paging system as specified herein.

21. It is responsibility of this Division to ensure all related work to be provided by separate
Sections is correctly shown on the Contract Documents at time of Tender. All
rearrangements to suit Division requirements not identified in writing and accepted by
Division prior to or at time of Tender, will be at the expense of the Division.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1. Acceptable Elevator Companies:

1. Mitsubishi Elevators & s (ETA Melco Elevator Co. L.L.C.)

2. Schindler Elevator (Techno Lift L.L.C.)

2. Work shall be performed in strict accordance with current requirements of all applicable
local codes, ordinances and by-laws. Building is designated as “fully sprinkle red”. Work
shall conform to the following standards:

1. CAN/CSA-B44-94 Safety Code for Elevators, s, Dumbwaiters, Moving Walks and

Freight Platform Lifts (latest edition and supplements).
2. ASME A17.1 (latest edition) or
3. EN-81 (latest edition)

3. Obtain and pay for necessary design submission registration, inspection and permit,
except operation permits, and make such tests as called for by regulations of such
authorities. Tests shall be made in presence of authorized representatives of such
authorities, the Engineer and the Employer’s authorized representative(s).

4. Use only components which can be shown to have locally performed satisfactorily and
proven reliable for a high rise building environment application for a minimum period of
two years. Upon and Engineer’s request, provide location of similar installations and
references.

5. All elevator work shall be performed by properly trained and skilled mechanics in the
direct employ of the unit's manufacturer or authorized Installation Company.

1.5 WARRANTY

1. Provide 400 DAYS warranty from date of substantial completion of all Division.

2. Warranty period shall commence on same date for all units and shall cover defects in
equipment and workmanship provided by this Section.

3. Warranty shall include prompt remedy of all defects upon written notification from
Employer that defects exist. Remedy shall include labor, materials, equipment and
services required to make good defective areas of Work. Where defects occur in the
case of factory-fabricated components, Warranty shall cover for provision of new
components at no cost to Employer.
4. Warranty work shall be undertaken at times convenient to Employer.
5. Warranty shall also include making well other Building parts, finishes and other Building
property, damaged or disturbed in course of remedying defects at no additional cost to
Employer.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |4 SECTION 14 01 22
Amazon – Conveying System .2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital
General Provision – Elevators & Escalators

1.6 SUBMITTALS, SAMPLES, SHOP DRAWINGS

1. All shop drawings shall be of the same uniform size. Drawings shall use Metric System
of weights and measures.

2. Submit, with Tender, the following information:

1. Equipment starting and running currents and recommended fuse ratings.

2. Electrical power confirmation.

3. Starting within six weeks of Contract Award, submit detailed shop drawings showing
complete layout of elevator equipment including the following:

1. Location of machinery and apparatus (and its relationship to adjacent structural

components of the Building including grid line references).

2. Loads to be carried on structure.

3. Machine room clear height requirements, HVAC requirements and equipment heat
emission rates.

4. Design of elevator cab enclosure including front elevation showing all signage,
signals, and operating controls (Separate Drawing). Indicate the accurate location of
all glass, metal, wood and plastic laminate joints.

5. Design of hoist way entrances showing the location of all signals in elevation
(Separate Drawing).

6. Design of all hall and car operating controls and signals (Separate Drawing).

7. Design of remote control panels (Separate Drawing).

4. Submit layouts as required to Authorities having jurisdictions before work proceeds.

5. Where samples are required, a minimum of three sets of each sample item shall be
submitted for review.

6. Submit samples for approval which will be visible in final finish, before fabrication.
Samples shall fully represent physical and chemical properties of materials to be
supplied. Samples for all operating buttons signage plaques and handicapped markings
shall be full size. Samples of material shall be minimum 250 mm x 250 mm.

7. Submit the following samples for review:

1. Hall landing buttons

2. Car operating buttons.
3. CAN/CSA-B44-94 Appendix “E” in car and lobby signage (tactile plates and raised
Arabic numeral characters)
4. In car signage plaques.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |5 SECTION 14 01 22
Amazon – Conveying System .2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital
General Provision – Elevators & Escalators

8. Submit data indicating the sizes, quantities, locations and other relative data for related
work requires to be done under other Sections. For work to be provided, provide the
following:

1. All interconnecting wiring conduit size requirements running between Street Level
elevator hoist ways and remote elevator control panel in Central Control Room.

2. All interconnecting wiring conduit size requirements running between upper pits
and remote elevator control panel in Central Control Room.

3. Number of wires, gauge and cable size required to be pulled between Street Level
elevator hoist ways and Central Control Room.

4. Number of wires, gauge and cable size required to be pulled between Street Level
elevator pit and remote elevator control panel in Central Control Room.

9. The approval of submittal data or shop drawings for material, equipment, apparatus,
devices, arrangements and/or layout shall not relieve Sub-Contractor from responsibility
of furnishing all equipment of proper dimensions and weight, capacities, sizes,
quantities, quality and installation details and to efficiently perform the requirements and
intents of these Contract Documents. Review of these documents shall not relieve of
final responsibility for meeting Contract Document requirements.

1.7 CONSTRUCTION CONTACT MAINTENANCE

1. Provide construction contract maintenance services for all elevators for a period of 400
DAYS from date equipment is taken over and accepted by the Employer. Maintenance
shall include for all services as specified in Article 14205.1.8. Cost of this maintenance
service shall be included in the Tender Price. State in Tender Form, Itemized Price
included for this 400 DAYS Construction Contract Maintenance coverage.

2. Include costs for each of the packages of elevators noted in 14205.1.2. Over entire
period specified. Maintenance shall be undertaken during regular working hours but
emergency overtime callbacks, available on a 24 hour, 7 days a week basis, shall be
included, without additional cost to the Employer.

3. Employer shall have right to postpone commencement of this 400 DAYS maintenance
period in connection with any specific unit, providing that such unit taken out of service
after work specified in this Contract Document is complete. Put into service such unit on
basis of seven (7) days notice from Employer.

1.8 MAINTENANCE CONTRACT AND MAINTENANCE SERVICES

1. The Contractor may be requested to enter into renewable, full maintenance type of
contract at option of Employer. Cost of this Maintenance Contract, shall not be included
in Tender Price. State, in Tender Form, Separate Price for first year maintenance
contract, incorporating following items.

2. Maintenance Contract shall commence at termination of the 400 DAYS Construction

Contract maintenance period as specified in Article 14205.1.7 and Contract shall cover
all elevators and s provided under these specifications.

3. Full maintenance price to include for complete maintenance for 400 DAYS, based on
today’s standard elevator industry material and labor cost indices and requirement that
this Section will enter into Maintenance Contract with Employer for a five year period.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |6 SECTION 14 01 22
Amazon – Conveying System .2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital
General Provision – Elevators & Escalators

Maintenance services shall include 24-hour emergency callback service without

additional cost for overtime premium payments. Emergency call back service is

Defined as responding to trouble calls for free trapped passengers, or to calls where all
elevators within a group are shut down. Maintenance price shall also include for any and
all traveling time charges.

4. Submit with Tender, written maintenance service proposal, substantiating and detailing
services to be provided, under the Maintenance Contract. Maintenance contract
proposal shall include following provisions:

1. The maintenance contract shall be subject to termination by either party with ninety
(90) days written notice to the other party, ninety (90) days prior to the end of the
initial or any renewal period.

2. The maintenance company may terminate the Contract at any time by written notice
to the Employer if:

1. Unsafe conditions for which the Employer is responsible, persist (as judged by
an inspector of the Ministry responsible for, Elevating Devices) after written
notice has been allowed for the problem to be solved.

3. The Employer may terminate the Contract at any time by written notice to the
maintenance company if a professionally qualified third party, retained by the
Employer, whose decision shall be final, judges the maintenance performed on any
unit as not according to the terms of the Contract and thirty (30) days written notice is
given to the maintenance company to correct the problem, and the problem has not
been corrected within thirty (30) days.

4. Maintenance shall include systematic examination, adjustment and lubrication of all

elevator and equipment and apparatus, and repair or replacement of electrical and
mechanical parts of equipment and apparatus. Repair and replacement of damaged
or worn parts shall be with parts of equivalent or better material and strength to the
original manufacturer’s design.

5. Replace all wire ropes as often as necessary to maintain adequate factor of safety.
Changes of cables, both wire ropes and conductor cables as found necessary,
based on inspection standards of CEMA standard wire rope inspection. Examining
and equalizing tensions of all hoist and compensation ropes shall be included and
performed on a regular basis.

6. Renewals or repairs, necessitated by reason of misuse, accidents or negligence

beyond the reasonable control of the maintenance Contractor shall not be included.
Renewals or repairs, necessitated by ordinary wear and tear or component defect,
shall be included.
7. Supply all necessary lubricants, cleaning materials and repair parts required to keep
installation in good working order.

8. Guide rails and step tracks shall be kept clean and properly aligned. When
necessary, guides, step tracks and car and counterweight guide rails shall be
renewed, readjusted, or realigned as required to insure smooth and quiet operation.
All oil reservoirs shall be kept properly sealed to prevent leakage. Safety devices and
governors shall be periodically examined and tested.

9. Relays, resistors, solid state components, condensers, transformers, contacts, leads,

dashpots on controllers and selectors shall be kept in good operating condition.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |7 SECTION 14 01 22
Amazon – Conveying System .2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital
General Provision – Elevators & Escalators

10. Machines and other motor static drive units shall be kept in good working condition
with particular attention being given to machine brake operation, motor brushes

and commentators being in good condition. Bearings shall be checked periodically

for vibration, heat, wears and kept lubricated.

11. Safety circuits shall always be kept in proper adjustment.

12. Include for re-lamping of all pit lighting.

13. Maintenance coverage shall include for the servicing, lubrication, cleaning, repair
and replacement of elevator cab ventilation fans.

14. Equipment performance figures, as specified shall be maintained, unless

subsequently modified in writing by the Client.

15. Machine room equipment shall be kept clean and painted. Hoist way, tops and
bottoms of cabs, as well as elevator and machinery spaces shall be kept in clean
condition.

16. Should it become necessary to work on elevators with hall or landing doors held
open, proper safety barricades shall be erected to protect people from all hazards.

17. Should Employer request work to be performed on equipment covered by, but not
included in the terms of this Maintenance Contract, then such work shall be based on
rates included in Contract for time and material (as modified by defined price index
contained in contract).

18. All work on equipment shall be registered in Employer’s log book, including time of
arrival, nature of work or problem, and action taken. Log book shall be kept in the
respective elevator machine room or alternatively in a location specified by the
Employer.

19. Maintenance program shall be set up and followed to meet or exceed the minimum
equipment maintenance frequencies. Program shall be designed to minimize
shutdowns and callbacks. No two elevators in the same group shall be shut down at
the same time for maintenance purposes without the Employer’s prior approval.
Shutdowns shall be scheduled only after prior notification to Employer and with
Employer’s consent.

20. Maintenance shall include an annual test, conducted after hours, to ensure proper
operation of all emergency and life safety circuits.

5. Adequate stock of spare parts shall be maintained locally and men shall be available at
such places to ensure fulfillment of service without unreasonable loss of time in reaching
building location.

6. Work under this maintenance provision shall be performed by personnel under

supervision and in direct employ of the maintenance company.

1.9 INTERIM MAINTENANCE

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |8 SECTION 14 01 22
Amazon – Conveying System .2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital
General Provision – Elevators & Escalators

1. Maintenance for all elevators as specified in Article shall start on the same date. Some
units may be turned over for use of the Employer before other units, necessitating
interim maintenance until Construction Contract Maintenance period commences.

2. Interim maintenance is defined as maintenance provided, from time unit put initially into
service to date of when all units are turned over, accepted by the Employer and
Construction Contract Maintenance period commences. Interim maintenance shall
include full maintenance services.

1.10 SEPARATE PRICES (PRICES NOT INCLUDED IN STIPULATED PRICE)

1. State, in Tender Form, Separate Price to provide full maintenance services for first year
of five ear maintenance agreement, covering all elevators. Maintenance services shall
contain all requirements.

1.11 ITEMIZED PRICES (PRIZES INCLUDED IN STIPULATED PRICE)

1. State, in Tender Form, Itemized Price to provide for 12 months Construction Contract
Maintenance coverage.

1.12 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

1. Provide insulated wiring to connect all parts of equipment. Insulated wiring shall have a
flame retarding and moisture resisting outer cover and shall be run in metal conduit,
metallic tubing or wire ducts.

2. Emergency power, fire alarm, intercom, Building EVAC speaker and security signals
wiring shall be bought to terminal strips, located on elevator machine room walls.
Provide all necessary wiring and interconnections between these signals, signal terminal
strips and the elevator controllers.

3. Provide all necessary interconnecting wiring running between the elevator machine
rooms, upper pits and remote control panels.

4. Traveling cables shall have flame retarding and moisture resisting outer cover. Traveling
cables shall be flexible and suitably suspended to relieve strains in individual
conductors. Provide traveling cables with minimum 10% spare conductors. Security
system shielded cables shall be contained within separate traveling cable. Do not hang
shielded cable outside of or affixed to main traveling cable.

5. Insulated conductors and conduit, as well as fittings, including metal boxes, troughs and
ducts, shall comply with requirements of Canadian Electrical Code.

6. Provide all interconnections at elevator control cabinets for power feeds and control
circuits.

7. Provide all elevators with security wiring, consisting of eight pairs of shielded signal
wires (no.18 gauge) running between machine room controllers and in-car card reader
slot.

8. Provide flexible conduit interconnections with proper anti shorts. Properly anchor and
support all flexible and rigid conduit sections. Lengths of conduit shall be supported at
intervals of not more than 1500 mm.

9. Provide car crosshead with fixed work light unit, complete with mesh protective guard.
Provide light fixture with control switch and grounded receptacle outlet.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |9 SECTION 14 01 22
Amazon – Conveying System .2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital
General Provision – Elevators & Escalators

10. Where time clocks are used, they shall meet the following criteria:

1. Clock shall be electronic type, with continual read out of both time and day.

2. Clock shall be 24 hour, seven day type.

3. Clock shall be provided with battery backup, sufficient for a minimum period of 24
hours.

4. Clock shall be provided with ready means adjusting time and day settings.

1.13 SPECIAL EMERGENCY SERVICE: PHASE I AND II

1. Provide all elevators with automatic Phase I (recall) and Phase II (in-car) controls.
Elevators shall be arranged to operate in accordance with CAN/CSA-B44-94 rule
3.12.15 SPECIAL EMERGENCY SERVICE as well as local building codes.

2. Provide remote signal switches and fixtures with the following additional provisions

1. All switch and control status indicator lights shall be LED’s.

2. GROUND LEVEL LOBBY fixture faceplate shall be finished in stainless steel.

Provide lobby fixture faceplates with concealed fastenings.

3. Provide lobby recall switches with emergency recall keys and switch lock boxes.
Mount these lobby lock boxes as directed by Consultant at time of shop drawing
review. GROUND LEVEL LOBBY key switch lock boxes shall be finished in
stainless steel.

4. Provide Central Control Room panel with one key switch lock box. Box finish
shall match panel cover plate and be mounted adjacent to remote control panel.

3. The service elevator shall be designated as the Fire Fighter’s elevators for the Building.
All remaining elevators shall be designated as special emergency service cars. Provide
Fire Fighter’s elevators with fire fighter’s hat symbol, mounted adjacent to Street Level
entrance opening.

4. Provide three position special emergency service Phase II (in-car) operation key switches in all
elevator cabs. In Fire Fighter’s cars, provide three position fire fighter’s service key switch.
Designate each key switch with appropriate signage as required by Code. Phase II operations
shall automatically override car call security access restrictions on all cars.

5. Building is designated as “fully sprinkle red”, including elevator machine room spaces. Provide
automatic recall capability for all cars to the primary recall floor lobby upon receipt of
appropriate signal from Building fire alarm system or machine room smoke detectors.
Activation of a fire sensing device shall signal the elevator controllers to automatically initiate
emergency recall operation.

6. Primary recall level shall be designated as Street Level for all cars.

7. Fire detection system, provided by separate Sections, will be wired to a terminal strip mounted
in each elevator machine room.

8. Signal wiring from machine room wall locations of fire alarm signal terminal strips to elevator
control equipment.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e | 10 SECTION 14 01 22
Amazon – Conveying System .2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital
General Provision – Elevators & Escalators

1.14 EMERGENCY POWER AUTOMATIC SEQUENCING

1. When transfer switch transfers to emergency power, there will be sufficient emergency
power available to run two elevators in the Building, at any one time, one in each group.

2. Operation of elevators shall be controlled to allow the following sequence of operation:

1. One elevator at a time amongst the Building elevator groups shall start up and
automatically return nonstop to the emergency power recall level. Upon arrival at
emergency power recall level, elevator shall fully open its doors and then shut down.
After shutting down, the cat shall automatically signal its duplex controller to allow the
remaining cat to commence recall sequence to emergency power recall level. Once
each group has sequenced down to Street Level its controller shall automatically allow
one elevator, depending upon selection switch position, to commence normal
operation under standby power. This designated car shall respond to hall and car calls
as if operating under normal power.

3. Under automatic emergency power recall operation, the following shall occur:

1. A car on independent service shall sound a buzzer, automatically close its doors and
return to emergency power recall Lobby.

2. A car parked at emergency power recall lobby with its doors closed, shall open its
doors, and then shut down.

3. Flight times and other car operating performance times shall comply with the specified
settings.

4. A car which on “independent service” shall not be selected to operate as the

designated emergency power elevator. Instead, this elevator shall return to the main
recall lobby, open its doors, and then shut down. At that time, another elevator shall be
automatically selected to operate under standby power.

5. A car with its doors blocked open shall sound continuous buzzer until the obstruction is
removed or the car has been bypassed.

6. Should an elevator fail to start up and commence its return to emergency power recall
lobby, after an adjustable period of time initially set at 20 seconds, it shall be
automatically by-passed and the next car within that group shall be signaled to start
up. Should the last elevator within a group fail to start up and commence its return to
emergency power recall lobby, after an adjustable period of time, initially set at 20
seconds, its group or duplex controller shall automatically signal the next group or
duplex controller in the sequencing chain as described above.

5. Upon receipt of signal from transfer switch, indicating imminent transfer of power supplies
from normal to emergency (i.e. under a test or simulation condition), bring all elevators to a
safe stop at their next available floor landing. Upon arrival, elevators shall open their doors
and shut down, leaving their doors open. Elevators shall start up and commence
sequence return operations after transfer to emergency power has been completed. Once
cars are operating under emergency power, and transfer switch signals return to normal
power, bring cars which are in operation to their next, safe stopping, available floor landing
and park cars with their doors open. Restart elevators once normal power has resumed.

1. Any additional emergency to normal or normal to emergency power transfer time

delay requirements, as required to specifically suit the elevator control equipment

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e | 11 SECTION 14 01 22
Amazon – Conveying System .2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital
General Provision – Elevators & Escalators

.
6. Provide at remote panel, an emergency power rotary or positively mechanically
interlocked, re-selection switches for each group of elevators. Switches shall permit the
selection of only one elevator at a time in each group.

7. After all elevators have been sequenced down to the main recall level and an elevator has
been selected to run on emergency power, manually operating the re-selection switches
shall cause the following sequence of operations:
1. An elevator which is already operating on emergency power shall complete all
registered car calls.

2. Once all car calls have been answered, elevator shall return non-stop to the
emergency power recall level. Upon arrival at this level car shall fully open its
doors, and then shut down.

3. Elevator shall not respond to any further hall call demands.

4. Elevator which was manually selected to run on emergency power shall respond
to hall and car as if operating under normal power.

8. Manually operating the emergency re-selection switches during the return sequencing of
the elevators shall not automatically select an elevator to run on emergency power.

9. Provide the remote control panel with emergency power status LED indicators for all
elevator groups.

10. Provide each GROUND LEVEL LOBBY fixture, which also contains lobby S.E.S. Phase I
recall switch, with emergency power LED indicator light. Designate indicator light with
black colored engraving.

11. Provide necessary sequencing and logic circuits, plus all interconnecting wiring, to
permit sequence operations within and between elevator groups as required.

1.15 BATTERY POWER CAB LIGHTING

1. Provide each elevator with battery powered emergency cab lighting as follows:

1. Use battery operated emergency lighting equipment to CSA C22.2 No. 141, to provide
general illumination in car at operating panel(s) for four hours minimum. Provide
sealed rechargeable battery unit, complete with LED status indicator.

2. Include a spring return, momentary position type key switch for manual operation and
testing of battery unit. Mount this switch within the car service cabinet for all elevators.

3. Design battery unit of sufficient strength to support a 90 kg person without causing

malfunction or damage.

4. Include means of containing any leakage or spillage of electrolyte.

5. In all elevators provide battery light fixture unit above suspended ceiling, hidden from
normal sight lines.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e | 12 SECTION 14 01 22
Amazon – Conveying System .2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital
General Provision – Elevators & Escalators

1.16 ELEVATOR TWO WAY VOICE COMMUNICATION

1. Provide a flush-mounted stainless steel cabinet with its outside cover plate engraved with
telephone handset symbol. Locate cabinet below car operating buttons in main swing front
return panel.

2. Telephone handset is to be provided. Cabinet is to be of sufficient size and depth to

accommodate telephone handset as selected by Employer. Engraved rear door of cabinet
with respective elevator number (minimum 25 mm high), Building name and location. In
addition, on interior of cabinet faceplate, engrave phrase; “In case of emergency, lift
receiver, wait for answer” in letters at least 6 mm high. All cabinet engraving shall be filled in
black. On exterior side of cabinet faceplate, engrave telephone handset symbol. Height of
symbol shall be a minimum of 75 mm high.

3. Provide necessary wiring running between in-car telephone handset cabinet and elevator
machine room terminal block. In each machine room, bring all telephone wiring to a central
or common terminal strip to allow for connections by others without interference with
elevator controls. Clearly label all connections points with each elevator number.

1.17 PAINTING

1. All exposed metalwork provided under these Specifications, shall be painted a minimum of
one coat of prime enamel after fabrication. Use oil resistant enamel on machinery and rust
resistant primer on structure parts of equipment.

2. Paint following equipment with a minimum of one finishing coat of rust resistance enamel,
manufacturer’s standard colour, after final equipment clean up.

1. Hoist machine yoke and support frame.

2. Pit equipment including support channels, buffer stands, governor tension weight,
tension weight carriage and assembly, working platform, working platform access
ladder, counterweight screens, compensating sheave assembly and support frame.

3. Paint all hoist way equipment including guide rails, except for running surfaces. Paint
fishplates, guide rail brackets, car plank, car crosshead, car top, and counterweight
frame and filler weights.

4. Paint machine beams, deflector beams, dead end hitch beams and all other support
beams.

3. When painting equipment covers, protect signage, nameplates and all other tags from paint
splashes or being painted over. After painting, apply car numbers designations to equipment
components.

4. Paint 300 mm wide flat black colored stripe across full entrance width of all fascia plates
immediately below each hall landing sill. Paint similar size and colour strip across full width
of each car apron panel, immediately below car landing sill.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e | 13 SECTION 14 01 22
Amazon – Conveying System .2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital
General Provision – Elevators & Escalators

1.18 ENGRAVING

7. All key switches, signage and signal/control device engraving shall be filled in black colour,
except where required by Code to be filled red. Engraving filler shall consist of permanent
adhesive epoxy paint. Provide engraved identification and instructions on car operating
panels and on all elevator signal equipment including remote control panel. All engraving
must be in English and Arabic.

7. Where possible, all engraving shall be minimum of 6 mm high. Engraving to be in

manufacturer’s standard font style.

1.19 KEY SWITCHES

1. Key switches for elevator maintenance, maintenance, inspection; emergency recall and
emergency power selection shall be manufacturer’s standard type and grouped as required
by Elevator Code.

2. Provide Employer with a minimum of five copies of keys used for the following switches:

1. Cab light
2. Cab fan
3. Independent Service
4. Car “Shut Down”
5. Car “Return to Lobby”
6. Securing override
7. operation

1.20 POLISHED METAL AND SHEET STEEL

1. Reinforce all polished metal panels to prevent noticeable distortions. Stainless shall be type
316, satin or brushed finish, to ASTM A167.

2. Sheet steel used shall be to ASTM A366. Steel sheets shall be uncoated and pickled to
allow for onsite painting. Sheet steel members shall be free of all defects.

3. Provide typical floor fixture faceplates and handicapped signage entrance tactile markings
finished in satin or brushed stainless steel on all floors.

1.21 REMOTE MONITORING PROVISIONS

1. Provide all necessary interconnecting wiring required for complete operation of remote
panels. Supply interconnecting wiring running between elevator hoist ways, upper pits and
remote elevator control panels. Do interconnecting of wiring (running between machine
rooms, hoist ways and remote panel locations) and assume responsibility for correct
functioning of panels and interconnecting wiring. At remote panel location provide necessary
junction boxes to facilitate wiring installation.

2. Provide Central Control Room for Tower with a remote control panel, Panel shall have a
faceplate finished in satin stainless steel. Panel shall be housed in wall or desk mounted, to
suit available location, with panel arrangement to be confirmed at time of shop drawing
review. Provide panel with hinged cover plate to allow for ready service access. Where more
than one panel section is provided, individual sections shall be hinged for servicing. Provide
panel with the following flush mounted controls.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e | 14 SECTION 14 01 22
Amazon – Conveying System .2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital
General Provision – Elevators & Escalators

1. Red colored indicator, for each car, designated “car at lobby with doors open”.

2. Emergency power indicator light. Indicator shall illuminate whenever unit is operating
under emergency power.

3. Special emergency service Phase I recall key switches and indicator lights for each
elevator group.

4. Emergency power re-selection switches.

5. Provide emergency recall and emergency power re-selection key switch lock boxes and
locate in panel faceplate as directed by the Engineer.

3. Provide each Central Control Room with combination colour monitor, IBM PC compatible
computer, control keyboard and remote panel as follows:

1. Monitor unit shall be tied into all elevator groups so as to allow for interactive
communication between security desk monitor unit and each elevator controller. System
shall be arranged to display real time elevator operating information on monitor unit.
Information shall be displayed in a graphic and tabular or typed graphics format.

2. Monitoring system shall be provided with a master menu of various system information
and interactive control functions including, but not limited to:

1. Group status display which shall detail:

1. Identification of group
2. Location of elevators
3. Location of hall calls
4. Registered car calls (Optional)
5. Direction of car travel
6. Door operating status
7. Car loading information
8. Group supervisory system operating mode
9. Individual car operating mode

2. Group performance details including:

1. Dwell times
2. Car flight time
3. Interrupt time
4. Door times

3. Event and Error Record displaying:

1. Date of error or event

2. Location of error or event
3. Type of event or error
4. Number of occurrences

4. Group Performance Display detailing:

1. Individual car statistics such as door operations and door reversals

2. Hall call activity reports
3. Hall call waiting time summaries

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e | 15 SECTION 14 01 22
Amazon – Conveying System .2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital
General Provision – Elevators & Escalators

5. System shall be provided with a minimum 17 inch, high definition colour monitor,
complete with brightness, tint and colour controls.

6. Computer unit shall be compact design IBM PC with Pentium 4 processor, complete with
minimum 80 Gigabytes hard disk drive storage plus 3½ inch diskette drive.

Provide all necessary software and interface functions to allow for initial set up and
interconnection with Building’s standard printer and external communication devices.

7. Provide IBM “Enhanced” type keyboard unit complete with alphanumeric keys, number
pad and function keys. Keyboard unit shall allow for Building personnel to input
keystroke commands allowing the modification and alternation of existing car and group
operating parameters. Provide system with necessary control logic to allow, as a
minimum, for the implementation of the following remote control sequences:

1. Car “Return to Lobby. When appropriate keyboard commands are issued, car shall
respond to no further hall calls, complete all registered car call then express
nonstop to the Street Level landing. Upon arrival car shall park with its doors open
for a minimum period of 30 seconds? At the expiration of this extended dwell time,
if the in car independent service switch or other car control switches have not been
activated, car shall automatically return to normal group operation.

2. Car “Shut Down”. Keyboard commands, once activated, shall cause the respective
elevator to complete all registered car calls, then express to Street Level. Upon
arrival at this landing, elevator shall open its doors for the minimum lobby dwell
interval. Upon expiration of this dwell time, doors shall close and car shall shut
down. If the elevator is already at this Level when the “Shut Down” feature is
activated the elevator shall close its doors and shut down. Car door open button
shall operate as long as “Shut Down” operation is in effect. “Shut Down” operation
shall be cancelled from keyboard by a specified, unique command. The hall button
riser shall be de-activated when all cars within a group are “Shut Down”. Special
emergency service operation shall automatically override the “Shut Down”
sequence.

3. System software shall allow for unique password designations to protect against
unwarranted access to system modification and control functions.

3. Provide a panel with a faceplate finished in satin stainless and mounted adjacent to the
computer monitoring system. Panel shall have the following indicators:

1. Provide each elevator group with one yellow colored LED designated “SECURITY
OVERRIDE”. Light shall illuminate whenever respective remote control panel
security switch, as noted below, is turned to its “OFF” position.

2. Provide each elevator group with one two positions, MEDECO type, and key switch
designated “SECURITY”. Identify positions as “ON” and “OFF”.

3. Provide s with an “In Service” indicator light designed to illuminate whenever s are
running.

4. Provide s with directional arrows, designated as “UP” and Down“, and designed to
illuminate to identify the direction of travel.

5. Provide s with an indicator light, designated as “Emergency Stop Button Activated”,

and designed to illuminate whenever an emergency stop button has been pressed.
Provide a reset switch designed to extinguish the indicator light.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e | 16 SECTION 14 01 22
Amazon – Conveying System .2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital
General Provision – Elevators & Escalators

4. All panel indicators light shall be L.E.D. type. Colors of indications shall be
manufacturer’s standard except where noted or required by Code to be red.

5. Panel lettering shall be surface engraved in the manufacturer’s standard font style.

1.22 WORKING PLATFORMS, BUFFER EXTENSIONS, WORKING PLATFORM LADDERS

Provide working platforms, buffer extensions and working platform ladders of rust-inhibiting
prime-coated steel. Provide necessary pit supporting equipment to accommodate sloping pit
floors.

1.23 ELEVATOR HANDICAPPED PROVISIONS

1. All elevators shall be designed in compliance with CAN/CSA-B44-94, Appendix “E”

requirements for the Handicapped.

2. Provide all devices including but not limited to, tactile plates, gongs, directional indicators,
hall lanterns and handrails as outlined in Appendix “E”.

3. Provide audible soft toned signal in car to indicate car is passing or stopping at a floor level
and dual stroke gongs for all hall lanterns. Volume of audible car position signal shall be
adjustable at car operating panel service cabinet.

4. Provide lobby entrance tactile plates as follows:

1. No visible fastening devices.

2. Finishes to be colored black with raised floor number finished in stainless steel.

1.24 MANUFACTURER’S NAME AND TRADEMARKS

Manufacturer’s name shall not appear in the elevator cabs, entrances, remote control panels,
and elevator landing sill plates, s, landing plates or any other location visible to the general
public.

1.25 SECURITY SYSTEM PROVISIONS

1. All elevators shall be provided with provisions to accommodate security card readers as
specified herein. Card readers.

1. Card readers shall be installed within the elevator cab interiors. Installation of card
readers shall be co-ordinate with security contractor. The level security provided
shall be dictated by a master security controller, located exterior to the elevator
equipment by security contractor.

2. Elevators with card readers, once security mode is initiated by the master security
controller, shall only accept calls if placed in combination with a proper security card.
If a car call is placed to a floor not allowed by the master security controller, the
elevator shall not accept registration of that car call.

3. Hall calls shall still be active during security mode, without restrictions.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e | 17 SECTION 14 01 22
Amazon – Conveying System .2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital
General Provision – Elevators & Escalators

4. Under security mode, when not responding to landing or car calls, elevators shall
park with their doors closed. Cars shall only open doors in response to hall landing
call or alternatively, by activation of in-car DOOR OPEN button.

5. Car calls to Street Level shall not be controlled by card reader under security mode.

6. Make each car’s main operating panel capable of accommodating a flush mounted
reader device. Readers shall be installed in main car operating panel as directed by
the Engineer. Provide sufficient clear space, behind front return panel faceplate

7. To accommodate reader of the approximate size of 100 mm wide x 50 mm high x 90

mm deep.

8. Provide two status port holes and cut out for card reader slot in return panel. Provide
card reader mounting plate, affixed to rear of return panel faceplate and install reader
so it is completely concealed except for reader slot and status light portholes which
shall all be flush mounted with return panel.

9. Provide faceplates to cover the openings noted above in all elevators not supplied
with card readers.

10. Provide wiring from in-car reader to common machine room terminal strip/junction
box, provided by this Section and mounted on machine room wall, clearly identified
for interconnection to security system by security Contractor. Provide Security wiring
shall be installed without splices, cuts or breaks.

11. Provide necessary logic and apparatus required to interpret and act on the
commands given to the elevator controller by the master security controller.

12. Provide for each car call selection circuit, a pair of dry contacts, set in a terminal
strip, mounted in the elevator machine room, for interconnection to the security
system.

13. Isolate all car call signal circuits to prevent against unwarranted feedback through
interconnections with security system relay controls.

14. Provide signals for security controller to insure Phase II special emergency service
operation automatically overrides security provisions.

15. Car calls shall be enabled when security system relay controls close in response to a
cleared or authorized access card.

16. Security system shall keep car call circuit enabled for a limited time period. Elevator
controls shall ensure car call circuit, once established, is self holding until the
elevator responds to that call.

2. Provide security override controls using remote control panel key switches.

1. When “SECURITY” key switch is turned to its “ON” position, security operations, of
respective elevator group, shall be controlled automatically by the Building master
security controller.

2. When switch is turned to its “OFF” position, after hours security operations, of the

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e | 18 SECTION 14 01 22
Amazon – Conveying System .2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital
General Provision – Elevators & Escalators

Respective elevator group shall be over-ridden and elevators shall operate normally,
without any reader restrictions.

3. Security section will interconnect at each respective machine room. Provide all
necessary signal wiring from each elevator car call button and in-car card reader to
allow security system to interconnect at elevator machine rooms. Provide individual
signal circuits from each car’s respective car call buttons and terminate signals in a
common terminal strip in machine room for interconnections to security system.

1.26 CONSTRUCTION USE

Where elevators are utilized for construction use. The Contractor shall be responsible for
completely cleaning down the entire installation, returning to “like new” condition, readjust
and finish elevators to comply with final acceptance requirements of the Contract
Documents upon completion of construction use, at no cost to Employer.

1.27 PIT AND HOISTWAY ACCESS

Provide each elevator with hoist way access key switches. Provide hoist way access key
switches at the first landing above the bottom where safe access to the car top can be
achieved.

Where activation of more than one key switch is required for pit or car top access, key
barrels must be identical.

Hoist way access key switch controls shall be flush mounted in side jamb of entrance
frame approximately 1800 mm above the finished floor slab.
Provide each key switch with engraved faceplate. Engraving shall consist of wording
“ACCESS” plus “UP” and “DOWN”. Faceplate and key switch finish shall be stainless
steel.

Use of lunar key for hoist way access means is not acceptable.

1.28 PROTECTIVE PADS

Provide all elevators with pad hooks, finished in stainless steel. Mount pad hooks to suit
locations as confirmed by the Engineer at time of shop drawing review.

Provide one set of protective pads for each group. Protective pads shall be specifically sized
to suit platform dimensions, covering all non access cab walls. Cab access walls shall be
provided with pads covering return panels and header transom, with cut outs for one car
operating station, car position indicator(s), security card reader, telephone cabinet and
service cabinet. Pads shall hang from the cab suspended ceiling to 100 mm above the car
floor. Each wall shall be covered by a single piece pad, with adjacent pads overlapping a
minimum of 150 mm.

Protective pads shall be manufactured from heavy duty canvas, padding, edging and
thread. Pads shall be quilted, with all edges selvage. All seams shall be doubled. Pad
colour to be manufacturer’s standard.

1.29 SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA

1. Design and assemble lift equipment and components to withstand earthquake forces to
meet requirements of local Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e | 19 SECTION 14 01 22
Amazon – Conveying System .2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital
General Provision – Elevators & Escalators

2. Prevent compensating ropes and traveling cables from snagging on brackets and other
protrusions in hoist way.

3. Secure compensating sheaves and restrain movement of governor tension sheave.

4. Prevent ropes being dislodged from sheave grooves.

5. Arrange lift to stop should either car or counterweight disengage guide rails.

6. Include adjustable seismic trigger switches to operate lifts whenever predetermined level
of seismic acceleration is detected.

1. Prevent idle lifts from starting.

2. Stop lifts at next available stop.

7. Provide restrains of 6 mm thick steel plate under guide shoes; clearly rails by 3 mm.
Span rail tongue full depth of finished section.

8. Provide detailed shop drawings with calculations, stamped and signed by a

registered Professional Engineer.

1.30 MANUALS

1. Prior to final completion of work, provide 3 sets of Manufacturer’s Maintenance and

Operating Manuals. Manuals shall have sufficient detail regarding all equipment
components to allow the Employer to undertake equipment maintenance should he so
desire. Manuals shall contain, as a minimum, the following information:

Descriptions of system’s method of operation and control including, but not restricted
to, control system and special or non-standard features provided.

Replacement parts list.

Lubrication chart.

Information on each piece of equipment shall be assembled in the following order:

Equipment details such as:

1. Approved shop drawing

2. Model, part and serial number

Maintenance details such as:

1. Lubrication

2. Trouble-shooting procedures

3. Adjustment techniques

4. Operation checks

5. List of recommended spare parts to be kept on site

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e | 20 SECTION 14 01 22
Amazon – Conveying System .2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital
General Provision – Elevators & Escalators

6. List of all special tools and appropriate unique application

7. Detail manufacturer and supplier names and address

8. All equipment is to be listed as to types

All documents other than circuit diagrams larger than standard imperial size paper
shall be neatly folded and inserted in labeled envelop. All photocopies must be totally
legible. Only pertinent details shall be acceptable.

All maintenance and operating manuals/binders shall be approved by the

Engineer before certification of Substantial Performance of the elevator and work is
issued. Full release of all hold back monies will not be processed until manual/binder
submissions have been approved.

Upon completion of work, provide “As-Built” wiring diagrams including all field
wiring changes. Plasticize or laminate all wiring diagrams and sheets, and mount one
complete set to a wood frame with plywood back board. Provide one set of
respective “As Built” wiring diagrams for each machine room.

1.31 ONE WAY VOICE COMMUNICATION

1. Provide and properly identify a single terminal strip, wall mounted in each elevator
machine room, for connection to the building’s one way voice emergency paging system
(EVAC). Provide and connect all necessary wiring between the machine room terminal
strip and elevator cab. Division 16 will supply in-car speakers and interconnect terminal
strips with one way voice communication system.

2. Co-ordinate the installation of the one-way voice communication speakers with Division
16.

End of Section 14 01 22

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e | 21 SECTION 14 01 22
Diamond Tower – New Capital project

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

HVAC Works

SECTION 14 02 03: CONVEYING SYSTEMS

LIFTS-FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Prepared By

Year 2022
Rev. 00
Amazon – Conveying System .2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital
Lifts-Field Quality Control

SECTION 14 02 03: CONVEYING SYSTEMS

LIFTS-FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

1. GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:

1. Comply with General Conditions of Contract, Forms of Tender, Conditions of

Particular Application, and the requirements of these Specifications.

2. Obligations of the Lift Subcontractor concerning field quality control and

inspection and testing of lifts.
.

1.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL INSPECTION

1. Cost of inspection and of testing shall be by the Contractor. Work at the job site
will be checked during the course of installation. Cooperate with inspectors.
Accomplish corrective work prior to performing further installation dependent
upon or related to required correction.

2. Coordinate acceptance inspection and A.R.E. authorities’ acceptance

inspection. Verification that such tests have been completed, corrective work
accomplished, and installation reviewed for issuance of permit to operate shall
be required before acceptance of lifts.

3. Final acceptance shall be made only after field quality control inspections and
tests are complete, submittals and certificates have been received, and the
Consultant is satisfied that following have been satisfactorily completed:

1. Workmanship and equipment comply with Specification.

2. Contract speed, capacity, and floor to floor performance comply with

Specification.

3. Performance of following are satisfactory:

1. Starting, accelerating, and running.

2. Decelerating, leveling, and stopping.

3. Door operation and closing pressure.

2. PERSONNEL, EQUIPMENT AND INSTRUMENTS

1. Furnish personnel, equipment, and instruments to perform required tests.

2. Following instruments may be necessary to complete tests:

Salama Structural Engineers
Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |1 SECTION 14 02 03
Amazon – Conveying System .2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital
Lifts-Field Quality Control

1. 22.6 Kg test weights (larger weights with dollies or wheels are acceptable if
weight is certified).
2. Multi-meter.
3. 500 volt megger
4. Alternating current voltmeter and ammeter.

5. Stop watch
6. Celsius calibrated thermometers, four minimum on traction lift test.
7. Precision tachometer.
8. Spring scale for door pressure test.

3. INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST

1. Test safety circuit, door lock circuit, loop circuit, motor, and generator field
circuits at 500 volts.

2. Minimum resistance to ground shall be one mega ohm.

4. EXECUTION

1. Check floor to floor performance time, leveling accuracy and general ride with
full load, balanced load and no load in car.

5. TEST RESULTS

1. In test conditions, speed and performance times specified shall be met, leveling
accuracy shall be maintained without re-leveling, and general riding quality
shall be acceptable to the Engineer. Submit a report to the Engineer.

2. Temperature rise in windings shall not exceed 50 deg. C above ambient.

6. PERFORMANCE ADJUSTMENTS

1. Should tests indicate defects or poor workmanship, variance, or noncompliance

with requirements of specified codes and ordinances or variance or
noncompliance with requirements of Specifications, complete following work
and repairs at no expense to the Employer?

2. Replace equipment that does not meet specified standards and Specification
requirements.

3. Perform work and furnish materials and equipment necessary to complete

specified operation and performance.

4. Perform retesting required by governing authority, the Engineer or other

designated consultant to verify specified operation and performance.

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |2 SECTION 14 02 03
Amazon – Conveying System .2022 Capital Diamond Tower – CN09 – MU7 – CBD New Administrative Capital
Lifts-Field Quality Control

7. CLEANING

1. When directed, remove loose materials and fillings resulting from this work,
clean machine room equipment and floor of dirt, oil, and grease and clean
hoistway, car enclosures, entrances, operating and signal fixtures, handrails
and trim of dirt, oil, grease and finger marks.

End of Section 14 02 03

Salama Structural Engineers

Cairo, A.R.E. P a g e |3 SECTION 14 02 03